Home

User Manual

1. 158 10 14 Group 14 G14 161 10 15 Group 15 ae re 165 10 16 Group 16 G16 Skip 167 CI TK 169 10 18 Group 19 T9 Fine TUNNO 171 10 19 Group 20 G20 Serial Communication Controls 177 10 20 6160 25 G25 Pump Control emetic 184 11 FAULT MESSAGES DESCRIPTION AND ACTIONS 11 237 112172 DESEPION Oh 551 5 254 65 reir ere secede 237 Procedure Tor 5 239 11223 2281 EDO 242 12 COMMONLY USED 244 12 1 Start Stop Commands and Speed Reference by Keypad 244 12 2 Start Stop Commands by Terminals and Speed Reference by Analogue BREL 244 12 3 Start Stop Commands by Terminals and Speed Reference by Motorized OT oT omm 246 12 4 Start Stop Commands by Terminals and Seven Speed References
2. gt ti 5 ts 13 5 8 5 tes tiz DIS 3 ON t ur r r m 7 2 t 8 l t t li lio in 8 tis DM E OFF ti ts ts ts ls ty 8 tia tie 514 1 gt Multi reference 1 514 2 gt Multi reference 2 514 3 Multi reference 3 514 4 gt Multi reference 4 514 5 gt Mulli reference 5 314 6 gt Mulli reference 514 7 gt Mulli reference 7 G14 1 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function SD70ITCCOO21BI Figure 10 43 Selection of multi references through digital inputs MULTI REFERENCE 1 1 MREF 1 10 0 Multi reference 1 250 to 425096 1 0 0 YES It allows user to set the value of multi reference 1 This value is set in of motor rated speed For additional information see chapter 10 14 G14 MULTI REFERENCES and figure 10 43 162 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G14 2 MULTI REFERENCE 2 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 2 MREF 2 20 0 Multi reference 2 250 to 250 20 0 YES It allows user to set the value of multi reference 2 This value is set in of motor rated speed For additional information see chapter 10 14 G14 MULTI REFERENCES and figure 10 43 2143 MULTI REFERENCE Screen
3. 0 0 to 250 A YzYes OFF 0 to 1229A 625 4 131 13 FP erOFF 0 0 lt gt osanneet ors 625 417 17 4 105 7 saarnasi O 525 5 Speed Bypass 0 0 to 100 G25 5 1 1 BY SPon 70 0 0 0 to 250 525 5 212 BY T ON 10s G25 5 3 3 BY SPof 90 0 0 0 to 250 G25 5 4 4 BY T OFF 5s lt OFF 0 to 9995 525 6 Protection 625 6 1 1 PAUSE DEL 20s 41 010 9995 G25 6 2 2 CAVITATION N lt gt e N No Y Yes 325 6 3 3 CAV MODE FAULT G25 6 4 4 CAV CURR 0 0A G2565 5CAVSPEDz 1009 0 0 to 250 SD7OITGOO67AI Figure 10 15 Parameters structure from subgroup S25 4 G25 to subgroup S25 6 G25 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 59 80 700 ELECTRONICS amm omm amm G25 6 7 TENABLELOPRE N N No YzYes G25 6 9 9 LO PRE 5 0Bar lt gt OFF 0 to 3276 Engineer Units 6256 11 11 Lop Msp 0 0 0 0 to 250 G25 6 12 12 HP MODE PAUSE c3 PAUSE FAULT G25 6 13 13 HP LEV 100Bar 3 0 3276 Engineer Units 7 625615115 FLO SWm PAUSE G25 6 16 16 NO FLO FILLZN lt a N No Y es 17 NO 40 00 250 G25 6 17 117 NO FLsp 0 0 G25 6 18 18 NO FLbyp 0 0s G25 6 19 19 NO FLdly 0 0s G25 6 20 20 CYCLE Tl 0m OFF 0 to 999m 625 6 21 121 5 525 7 Pipe Filling
4. DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 113 80 700 ELECTRONICS 24 DC BRAKE Relay is activated if DC brake is active 25 3 RESERVE Reserved for future use 26 RESERVE Reserved for future use 27 RESERVE Reserved for future use 28 PUMP CNTRL The equipment activates the relay to connect the fixed pump See G25 9 1 gt To enable fixed pump associated to Output Relay 1 to G25 9 3 gt To enable fixed pump associated to Output Relay 3 29 JOCKEY PUMP For those periods of low demand if the drive is in sleep mode This pump will stop when the pump of the drive is connected or when the demand disappears 30 gt PRIMING PUMP To fill the suction pipe This pump will stop when the suction is filled and then the drive pump will start 31 gt SLEEP CONDIT The relay commutates if the equipment has the sleep conditions fulfilled or not Once the equipment is stopping the relay commutates again This function operates together with the parameter G25 4 28 gt To enable sleep mode see this parameter 08 12 ON DELAY TIME FOR RELAY 1 Screen 2 T R1 ON 0 0s Extended info R1 ACTIVAT DELAY Description ON delay time for the Relay 1 Range 0 0 999s Default value 0 0s Set on run YES Function It allows user to set a delay time before activating the Relay 1 If during this time the activation condition disappears the relay will be not activated G8 1 3 OFF DELAY TIM
5. configured for this objective The display will show F70 IRRIGATOR o No Flow Fault Produced by a digital input configured in this option The display will show F69 FLOW SWITCH Cavitation Produced by operation on underload conditions The display will show F68 CAVIT UNDERL o Pressure Switch Only with Priming pump The Pressure switch is open out of the allowed time indicating a sudden pressure loss The display will show F72 INPRESS SW DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 185 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 20 4 Inputs Configuration For inputs configuration it is necessary to consider some rules which will help in order to get a correct system configuration Digital input for flow acquisition by pulse counter All digital input can be configured in this option 51 gt FLOW PULSE The parameters for setting the flowmeter are located in the subgroup S4 4 Pulse Input The read flow can be used to limit the flow of the application see group G25 10 Flow Limitation Algorithm An analogue output can be configured to show this information by setting the option 20 CURRENT FLOW in this way this information can be used for the PLC or even can be connected to the drive as a feedback signal in PID mode without needing the use of external converter of pulses signal into 4 20mA signal Inputs programming There are some configuration options available when the pump program is acti
6. fans are connected at 51 C and they are disconnected when temperature is below 47 C DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 65 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 2 Group 2 G2 Motor Nameplate Data 66 G2 1 MOTOR RATED CURRENT Screen 1 MTR CUR 00 00A Extended info Description Motor rated current Range 0 2 1 5 In of the drive Default value Value depending on the drive rated current Set on run YES Function It allows setting the motor rated current according to the motor nameplate G2 2 MOTOR RATED VOLTAGE Screen 2 MTR VOLT 400V Extended info Description Motor rated voltage Range 220 999V Default value 400V Set on run YES Function It allows setting the motor rated voltage according to the motor nameplate G2 3 MOTOR RATED POWER Screen 3 MTR PWR 00 0kW Extended info Description Motor rated power Range 0 0 6500kW Default value Value depending on the drive rated current Set on run YES Function It allows setting the motor rated power according to the motor nameplate G2 4 MOTOR RPM Screen 4 MTR RPM 1485 Extended info Description Motor rpm Range 0 24000rpm Default value 1485 Set on run YES Function allows setting the motor rated speed according to the motor nameplate G2 5 COSINE PHI Screen 5 MTR PFA 0 85 Extended info Description Cosine Phi Range 0 10 1 Default value 0 85 Set on run Yes Function It allows setting the mo
7. gt 05 Start Stop 8 9 6 NC Contact os 2 NO Contact DI4 3 Multi reference L O Common 2 DI5 gt Multi reference M 6 Contact j IT DI6 gt Multi reference E 02 No Fault Motor PTC Input Incase of trip relay will change over SD70DTC0005AI Figure 12 3 Start Stop commands by terminals and 7 speeds by digital inputs Note Use screened cables for the controls and connect the screen to ground 12 5 Pressure Group Control with 3 Auxiliary Pumps Start and Stop on Demand 12 5 1 Parameters Configuration arameter Name Description G1 Options Menu LANG ENGLISH G1 4 Language selection ENGLISH 7 PROG PUMP 61 7 Program Activation PUMP It activates the extended functionality of the pump control in group G25 MTR CURR 00 00A 62 1 Motor rated current MTR VOLT 400V 62 2 Motor rated voltage MTR PWR 00 0kW 62 3 Motor rated power MTR RPM 1485 62 4 Motor rpm MTR PFA 0 85 G2 5 Cosine Phi MTR FRQ 50Hz 2 6 Motor frequency Use the following values as a reference Submersible pumps gt 20 00 7 MTR COOL 40 G2 7 Motor cooling at zero speed motor 409 Force cooled motor gt 100 64 Inputs 4 1 Digital Inputs 5 DIGITL IN 1 50 50 gt STARTISTP Automatic starting of the system 6 DIGITL IN 2 52 64 16 Multi function Digital Input 2 52 FIX PUMP1 FLT Detection of auxiliary pump 1 in fault configuration Status 7 D
8. 42 9 5 Parameters SV 5 Programmable 42 9 6 Parameters SV 8 Pump 43 10 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 45 GI Options MENU T EET 62 10 2 Group 2 G2 Motor Nameplate 66 10 3 Group 3 GS Helerell6BS 2 ve Lite 69 10 4 441000 4 5013 1 08 5 40 Tp r LE 71 10 5 Group 5 95 Acceleration and Deceleration 90 T06 Groupp G6 PID 97 10 7 Group 7 G7 Start Stop Mode Configuration 101 Grom e I8 OUIDUNS o3 ees cu 112 10 9 Group 9 G9 nennen nnn nnns nnn naar nnns nna 127 10 50 580 105 01 0 c 143 10 11 Group 11 G11 147 10 12 Group 12 G12 686 205 a I ouem Sad aa 153 SDRIVE 700 9 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS TOSS Faut
9. Figure 10 32 Format of analogue outputs SD70ITCCOD11AI G8 2 3 LOW RANGE SELECTION OF ANALOGUE OUTPUT 1 Screen 3 MIN1 RNG 0 Extended info Description Low range selection of Analogue Output 1 Range 250 to 250 Default value 0 YES Function It allows setting the minimum level of the Analogue Output 1 Minimum value setting can be higher than the value of maximum level This allows the user to achieve inverse scaling In this way as the magnitude taken as reference in G8 2 1 gt Mode selection for Analogue Output 1 increases the output will decrease and vice versa See figure 10 32 G8 2 4 HIGH RANGE SELECTION OF ANALOGUE OUTPUT 1 Screen 4 MAX1 RNG 100 Extended info Description High range selection of Analogue Output 1 Range 250 to 250 Default value 100 Set on run YES Function It allows setting the maximum level of the Analogue Output 1 Maximum value setting can be lower than the value of minimum level This allows the user to achieve inverse scaling In this way as the magnitude taken as reference in G8 2 1 gt Mode selection for Analogue Output 1 increases the output will decrease and vice versa See figure 10 32 120 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G8 2 5 FILTER SELECTION FOR ANALOGUE OUTPUT 1 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 5 FILTER 1 OFF Filter se
10. G3 2 Reference source 2 of speed with the option depending on the selected source is 1 or 2 Change speed is set in this parameter When the speed is above or below the change speed drive will start to apply the alternative ramps If this parameter is set to OFF any ramp change will not be done this is drive only applies the ramps set in G5 7 gt Ramp 1 of reference increase for motorized potentiometer and G5 8 gt Ramp 1 of reference decrease for motorized potentiometer See figure 10 24 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 95 96 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS SPEED REFERENCE REFERENCE is 55 7 gt Ramp 1 of reference increase for motorized pot VALUE A 55 8 gt Ramp 1 of reference decrease for motorized 35 9 gt Ramp 2 of reference increase for motorized pot T 55 10 gt Ramp 2 of reference decrease for motorized pot 85 9 658 55 11 gt Speed for ramp change with motorized pot 1 i A 1 i ae Acceleration 1 ZEN Acceleration 2 E N 65 10 Reference speed af Deceleration 1 TIME Deceleration 2 SD70ITCCOOO0S6BI Figure 10 24 Main and alternative acceleration deceleration ramps of motorized potentiometer G5 12 TIME CONSTANT TO FILTER THE SPEED Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note DESCRIPTION 12 SP FLT 0 250s
11. 5 LIM 1 C1 0 C1 WINDOW LIMIT1 0 6T C1 ON 0 0s ACTIVAT DELAY 0 0s 7 SP 0 DEACTIV LEVEL 0 8TC10F 0 0s C1 DEACTIV DELAY 0 0s 9 SEL FUNT C1 00 00 2222 G9 Comparators 9 2 Comparator 2 1 COMP 2 SEL 00 00 2 COMP 2 TYPE 0 0 3 SP C2 ON 100 C2 ACTIVAT LEVEL 100 4 LIM 2 C2 100 C2 WINDOW LIMIT2 100 5 LIM 1C2 0 C2 WINDOW LIMIT1 0 6 T C2 ON 0 0s C2 ACTIVAT DELAY 0 0s 7 SP C2 0 C2 DEACTIV LEVEL 0 8T C2 OF 0 0s C2 DEACTIV DELAY 0 0s 9 SEL FUNT C2 00 00 258 CONFIGURATION REGISTER POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 PARAMETERS FACTORY SETTINGS SETTING 1 SETTING 2 G9 Comparators 9 3 Comparator 3 1 COMP 3 SEL 00 00 2 3 0 0 3 SP ON 100 C3 ACTIVAT LEVEL 100 4 LIM 2 C3 100 C3 WINDOW LIMIT2 100 5 LIM 1 3 0 C3 WINDOW LIMIT1 0 6T C3 ON 0 0s C3 ACTIVAT DELAY 0 0s 7 SP OF 0 C3 DEACTIV LEVEL 0 8T OF 0 0s C3 DEACTIV DELAY 0 0s 9 SEL FUNT C3 00 00 G10 Limits 1 MIN1 SP 0 00 SPEED MIN LIMIT1 0 00 2 MAX1 SP 100 PEED MAX LIMIT 3 MIN2 SP 100 100 SPEED MIN LIMIT2 100 4 2 SP 100 SPEED LIMIT2 100 5ILIMIT CURRENT 61LIM TO OFF IMOUT CURRE OFF 71 MAX2 __A MAX CURRENT 2 8 MI2 brSP OFF MAX CURR BRK SPD OFF 9 MAX TOR 1150 tion 10T LIM TO OFF IMEOUT MAX TORQ OFF 11 INVERSION N N G11 Protections 15 TO OFF OFF
12. 5 6 4 5 PUMPS Option 28 2 83 has the same functionality but in downward direction v Push to read the code description If ESC key is pressed while navigation inside a group then you can access to the 3 main screen of this specific group SD7OITCOO15DI Figure 7 4 Example of parameters navigation DISPLAY UNIT AND CONTROL KEYPAD 37 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 8 STATUS MESSAGES The upper line of the display corresponds to the status line In this line we can display the equipment status motor current A and the motor speed It is always displayed and it is not programmable by the user Status Line 1 To show the drive status normal operation warnings and trips To show the average motor current 3 Current motor speed displayed as percentage of rated motor current The sign means the motor rotates in a direction The plus sign does not only mean that the motor rotates in hourly direction SD70ITCO016CI Figure 8 1 Status Line Description 0 1 Listof Status Messages Scren Name 7 Descipion 2 OFF Deactivated power Drive power is deactivated ON Activated power Drive power is activated ACL Accelerating m the output frequency Motor increasing in speed it is RUN Running Drive is operating at reference speed Operation at steady status DEC Decelerating 2 the output frequency Motor decreasing in speed it i
13. 50 0 260 CONFIGURATION REGISTER POWER ELECTRONICS SETTING 2 POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 PARAMETERS FACTORY SETTINGS SETTING 1 SETTING 2 6 MREF 6 60 0 MULTI REFERENCE6 60 0 7 MREF 7 70 0 MULTI REFERENCE7 70 0 G15 Inch Speeds 1 INCH1 0 00 INCH SPEED 1 0 00 2 INCH2 0 00 INCH SPEED 2 0 00 3 INCH3 0 00 INCH SPEED 3 0 00 G16 Skip Frequencies 1 SKIP 1 0 0 SKIP FREQUENCY 1 0 0 2 SKIP 2 0 0 SKIP FREQUENCY 2 0 0 3 SKIP BAND OFF OFFSET BAND OFF G17 Brake 1T DC OFF 2 DC CURR 0 DC CURRENT LEVEL 0 3 DC VOLTS 0 0 DC BR VOLT LEVEL 0 0 4 HEATING OFF Idc HEATING OFF 5 DYN BRAK N N 6 VDC BRAKE OFF OFF G19 Fine Tuning 19 1 IGBT Control 1 CRTL V Hz V Hz 2 FRQ 4000 4000 3 PEWAVE Y Y G19 Fine Tuning 519 2 MTR Load 1 MIN FLUX 100 MINIMUM FLUX 100 2 V BOOST 0 0 BOOST VOLTAGE 0 0 3 BW BOOST 0 0 BOOST BAND 0 0 4 SLIP COMPENS N N 5 DAMPING 0 0 0 0 6 TTP BAND 0 0 0 0 715 2 0 I SLIP COMPENSAT 2 0 9 STR FRQ 0 0 0 0 10 V H BREK 0FF OFF 11 STA F AC OFF STABILIZE F ACC OFF CONFIGURATION REGISTER 261 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS PARAMETERS FACTORY SETTINGS SETTING 1 SETTING 2 12 STA F DC OFF STABILIZE F DEC OFF 13 CTR Vbus OFF REGEN BUS VOLT OFF G19 Fine Tuning 19 3 MTR Model 1 R STATOR 0 9 STATOR RESISTOR 0 9 G20 Serial Communication Controls 1PROTOCOL M 2 COMMS COMMS TIMEOUT
14. ELECTRONICS Example 2 for configuring the analogue output as read flow If the flowmeter data configured G4 4 are Units litres Pulses second 100l s Maximum Range 1000 litres Analogue output setting Format 4 20mA Minimum Range 0 Maximum Range 100 For a read flow of 500 litres the analogue output is ReadValue 500 x 20 4 42 16 4 12mA 1000 Maximumkange Additionally exists the option 27 MACRO PUMP that it is not directly settable by the user for any of the analogue outputs On the contrary this option is automatically set for the program to the Analogue Output 1 in case of the user enables the Fixed Pump 4 and it will be automatically set for the Analogue Output 2 when the user enables the Fixed Pump 5 For both outputs the format configuration will always be 0 to 10V where 0 means the pump is OFF and 10V means the pump is ON 188 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 20 7 Subgroup 25 1 25 1 Setpoints G25 1 1 CONTROL MODE Screen 1 CONTROL MODE 1 Description Control mode Range 0 1 See Function for additional information Default value 1 Set on run NO Function allows selecting the control mode according to the following configuration options 0 9 MANUAL This control mode is thought for commissionings and tests It is not thought for a continuous operation since protections are disabled In
15. Figure 10 10 Parameters structure from subgroup G10 to group G11 54 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G12 Auto Reset 612 111 AUTO RESET N NzNo Y Yes Gi2 3 3R STR DEL 5s lt 050 NO AUTO RESET 612 5 5 F1 AUTO RST 0 1 ALL THE FLTS G12 6 6 F2 AUTO RST 0 2 11 VINLOSS 3 13 HI V IN 612 7 7 AUTO RST 0 4 14 LW V IN 5 18 IMB V OUT G12 8 8 F4 AUTO RST 0 6 19 IMB I OUT 7 20 GROUND FLT 8221 ILIM T O 9 22 LIM T O 10 27 DL SMTH 11240 EXT 12 41 COMMS TRIP 13 42 AIN1 LOSS 14243 AIN2 LOSS 15247 COMMS 16 49 SPD LIMIT 17265 LOW PRESSURE 18 66 HI PRESSURE 19 67 LOW WATER 20231 SCR L1 21 32 SCR L2 22 33 SCR L3 23 68 CAVIT UNDERL 24 69 FLOW SWITCH 25 10 IRRIGATOR F G13 Fault History G13 1 1F0 NO FAULT G13 2 2 NO FAULT G13 3 3 FO NO FAULT 613 4 4 F0 NO FAULT 613 5 5 F0 FAULT G13 6 6 FO NO FAULT G13 7 7 CLEAR FAULTS N G14 Multi references 614 17 1 MREF 1 10 0 250 0 250 14 2 12 MREF 2 20 0 G14 3 3 MREF 3 30 0 614 41 4 MREF 4 40 0 G14 5 5 MREF 5 50 0 G14 6 16 MREF 6 60 0 614 7 17 MREF 7 70 0 SD70ITGOO63AI Figure 10 11 Parameters structure from group G12 to group G14 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 55 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G15 Inch Speeds 615 1 1 INCH1 0 00 G15 2 2 INCH2 0 00 615 3 3 INCH3 0 00 G16 Skip F
16. in parameter G25 1 5 Local setpoint 1 for PID for additional information G25 1 10 LOCAL SETPOINT 6 FOR PID Screen 10 SETPT6z0 0Bar Extended info LOCAL SETPOINT 6 Description Local setpoint 6 for PID Range 0 3276 Engineering Units Default value 0 0 Set on run YES Function allows setting the value of the local setpoint 6 for PID It is possible to operate with the following units 96 1 5 m s l min m3 min m3 h m s m min m h Bar kPa Psi m C F K It depends on the units of the sensor used See Function in parameter G25 1 5 gt Local setpoint 1 for PID for additional information G25 1 11 LOCAL SETPOINT 7 FOR PID Screen 11 SETPT7 0 0Bar Extended info LOCAL SETPOINT 7 Description Local setpoint 7 for PID Range 0 3276 Engineering Units Default value 0 0Bar Set on run YES 192 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function It allows setting the value of the local setpoint 7 for PID It is possible to operate with the following units 96 1 5 m s l min m3 min m3 h m s m min m h Bar kPa Psi m C F K It depends on the units of the sensor used See Function in parameter G25 1 5 Local setpoint 1 for PID for additional information G25 1 12 LOCAL SETPOINT 8 FOR PID Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 12 SETPT8 0 0Bar LOCAL SETPOINT 8 Local
17. 510 1 gt Minimum speed lima 1 G102 gt Maximum speed limit 1 510 3 gt Minimum speed limi 2 Gita gt Maximum speed limit 2 TIME SDTOITCCOD23A I Figure 10 41 Speed applied when maximum and minimum speed limits are performing MAXIMUM SPEED LIMIT 1 G10 1 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note SPEED REFERENCE 310 2 or 510 4 310 1 or 310 3 G10 2 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 2 MAX1 SP 100 SPEED MAX LIMIT1 Maximum speed limit 1 210 17 96 to 250 100 YES It allows setting the maximum speed limit 1 that the drive can apply to the motor It is set in of motor rated speed Commands to operate out of these limits are restricted to those limits See figure 10 41 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 143 SDRIVE 700 G10 3 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note Note G10 4 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note Note G10 5 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run POWER ELECTRONICS MINIMUM SPEED LIMIT 2 3 MIN2 SP 100 SPEED MIN LIMIT2 Minimum speed limit 2 250 to G10 4 100 YES allows setting the minimum speed limit 2 that the drive can apply to the motor It is set in of motor rated speed Selection of min
18. DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 129 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Function allows defining one of the limits to activate comparator 1 in window mode Output of comparator 1 will be activated when source signal of comparator 1 selected in G9 1 1 is within the limit 1 set in G9 1 5 and the limit 2 and additionally ON delay time set in G9 1 6 has elapsed If after the ON condition is given this one disappears before elapsing ON delay time the output of the comparator will be not activated See figures 10 39 and 10 40 Note This parameter is only displayed if comparator 1 is set to window mode parameter G9 1 2 gt Type selection for comparator 1 set to 1 Window G9 1 5 LIMIT 1 FOR COMPARATOR 1 IN WINDOW MODE Screen 5 LIM 1 C1 0 Extended info C1 WINDOW LIMIT1 Description Limit 1 of the comparator 1 in window mode Range 250 to 250 Default value 0 Set run YES Function allows defining one of the limits to activate comparator 1 in window mode Output of comparator 1 will be activated when source signal of comparator 1 selected in G9 1 1 is within the limit 1 and the limit 2 set in G9 1 4 and additionally ON delay time set in G9 1 6 has elapsed If after the ON condition is given this one disappears before elapsing ON delay time the output of the comparator will be not activated See figures 10 39 and 10 40 Note This parameter is only displayed if comparator 1
19. No Flow switch can generate a stopping by PAUSE or by FAULT if the other conditions above mentioned are fulfilled On the contrary when the motor speed is lower than the speed set in this parameter the No Flow switch can generate that the drive goes in sleep mode whenever the other needed conditions to activate the sleep mode are fulfilled Therefore when the drive speed is lower than the speed set in this parameter the equipment will check the setting of the parameter G25 4 10 gt To enable No Flow input to sleep the drive If this parameter has been set to Y then the equipment will go to sleep if the other conditions to sleep are fulfilled DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 221 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 6 18 BYPASS TIME FOR NO FLOW SWITCH Screen 18 NO FLbyp 0 0s Extended info NO FLO BYPAS DLY Description Bypass time for No Flow switch Range 0 0 to 999s Default value 0 05 Set on run YES Function It allows setting the bypass time for the No Flow switch During this time No Flow input is ignored This time has only sense elapsed from the starting of the drive whenever the pipe filling process is not activated If the filling option is has been activated then the drive will check the setting of the parameter G25 6 16 gt To enable No Flow switch during pipe filling process before If this parameter is set to Y then the option of No
20. SDRIVE Series VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE variable speed drive User Manual f POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE variable speed drive User Manual Edition April 2007 SD70MTO1AI Rev A 80 700 00 POWER ELECTRONICS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 SAFETY SYMBOLS Always follow safety instructions to prevent accidents and potential hazards from occurring N WARNING This symbol means improper operation may results in serious personal injury or death be given because dangerous voltage may be present Maintenance Identifies shock hazards under certain conditions Particular attention should CAUTION operation should be done by qualified personnel Identifies potential hazards under certain conditions Read the message and follow the instructions carefully be given because dangerous voltage may be present 7 Identifies shock hazards under certain conditions Particular attention should Edition of April 2007 This publication could present technical imprecision or misprints The information here included will be periodically modified and updated and all those modifications will be incorporated in later editions To consult the most updated information of this product you might access through our website www power electronics com where the latest version of this manual can be downloaded Revisions Date Revision Description 10 04 2007 A Software updating 2 to Softwa
21. Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 15 ULD CUR UNDERLOAD CURREN Underload current 0 2 to 1 50 In This value depends on the drive capacity YES It allows setting a value for underload current below which the first detection condition to activate the protection is fulfilled This parameter operates together with parameters G11 16 gt Underload speed and G11 17 gt Delay time to activate underload protection See Function in parameter 4311 14 To enable underload protection to obtain information about the setting of underload parameters G11 16 UNDERLOAD SPEED Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 16 ULD SPD 100 UNDERLOAD SPEED Underload speed 0 0 to 250 100 YES It allows setting a value for underload speed above which the second detection condition to activate the protection is fulfilled This parameter operates together with parameters G11 15 gt Underload current and G11 17 gt Delay time to activate underload protection See Function in parameter 4311 14 To enable underload protection to obtain information about the setting of underload parameters G11 17 DELAY TIME TO ACTIVATE UNDERLOAD PROTECTION Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 17 ULD DELY 10s UNDERLOAD DELAY Delay time to activate underload protection
22. 0 999s 10s YES It allows setting a delay time to activate the underload protection The drive will wait for this time before activating the protection and then will stop This parameter operates together with parameters G11 15 gt Underload current and G11 16 gt Underload speed See Function in parameter G11 14 gt To enable underload protection to obtain information about the setting of underload parameters 152 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 12 Group 12 G12 Auto Reset G12 1 AUTO RESET Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 1 AUTO RESET N To enable or disable auto reset function N Y See Function for additional information N YES allows enabling or disabling auto reset function When this function is active the drive is reset automatically after occurring a fault it will be reset all of the faults programmed in parameters G12 5 23 Selection of fault 1 to be reset to G12 8 gt Selection of fault 4 to be reset Options N 3 NO Auto reset function is disabled Y YES Auto reset function is enabled CAUTION Auto reset function can cause unexpected automatic startings Before activating this function ensure the installation fulfils the needed requirements to be configured in this way to prevent property damages or personnel injuries G12 2 NUMBER OF AUTO RESET ATTEMPTS Sc
23. 1 selection Terminals 1 and 2 start stop command NO status Terminals 1 and 6 up speed command NO status Terminals 1 and 7 down speed command NC status X1 CONNECTOR X2 CONNECTOR 24V Usr DI 3 Common Terminal 24Vdc NO Contact 05 Start Stop 8 Common 012 15 Reference 2 6 NC Contact os Contact cc amp Common 2 015 gt Speed Up 5 Contact 9 DI6 3 Speed Down 5 02 No Fault Motor PTC Input 5 In case of trip relay will change over SD70DTCOO04AI Figure 12 2 Start Stop commands by terminals and speed reference by motorized potentiometer Note Use screened cables for the controls and connect the screen to the ground 246 COMMONLY USED CONFIGURATIONS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 12 4 Start Stop Commands by Terminals and Seven Speed References Selectable by Digital Inputs 12 4 1 Parameters Configuration arameter Name Description G1 Options Menu 4 LANG ENGLISH 1 4 Language selection ENGLISH PROG STANDAR 1 7 Program activation STANDAR G2 Motor Nameplate 1 MTR CURR 00 00A G2 1 Motor rated current Set according to motor nameplate MTR VOLT 400V 2 2 Motor rated voltage V Set according to motor nameplate 3 PWR 00 0kW 62 3 Motor rated power __kW Set according to motor nameplate 4 MTR RPM 1485 62 4 Motor rom rpm Set according to motor nameplate 5 MTR PFA 0 85 62 5 Cosine
24. 20 Self cool motor gt 40 Force cooled motor gt 100 G3 References 1 REF1SPD PMOT G3 1 Speed reference source 1 Motorized potentiometer with or without reference 64 Inputs 4 1 Digital Inputs 1 CNTROL MODE1 2 G4 1 1 Main Control Mode 2 REMOTE Drive control is done through control terminals 4 MOTORIZED POT It assigns the function of up and down speed reference to two of the digital inputs 015 Up NO Contact and DI6 Down NC Contact Reference is memorized 5 gt ERASAB POT As per above mode without memorizing the reference 5 DIGITL IN 1 05 04 15 I Multi function Digital Input 1 05 gt Start Stop Allows the start stop command to be given by a configuration switch G5 Inputs Acceleration and Deceleration Ramps Bump Aot reference Wcfaato Tor 1 0 s Modify these ramps to tune operation If the ramp is 7 PMT ACL1 1 0 6 ae increased the speed reference response will be faster If the ramp motorized potentiometer is decreased the speed reference response will be slower 3 0 s Modify these ramps to tune operation If the ramp is 8 PMT DCL1 3 0 s G5 8 Br i 080188 increased the speed reference response will be faster If the ramp motorized potentiometer is decreased the speed reference response will be slower 12 3 2 Connections Drawing 7 MTR COOL 40 G2 7 Motor cooling at zero speed G4 14 Digital Inputs configuration 4 DIGIT MODE
25. 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G11 10 PTC MOTOR OPTION Screen 10 PTC EXT N Description To enable PTC motor option Range N See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run YES Function It allows user to enable or disable the PTC motor option A PTC sensor can be connected directly to the drive to detect high motor temperature terminals 8 and 9 on control board If PTC value is higher or equal than 1K7 a fault will be generated in the drive F40 EXT PTC and it will not be reset until resistance value decreases to 260Q On the other hand if this value decreases below 100Q a fault will be generated too and it will not be reset until resistance value is higher or equal than 160Q Options N 3 NO PTC motor option is disabled Y 3 YES PTC motor option is enabled G11 11 PUMP OVERLOAD LEVEL Screen 11 PUMP OV 20 0A Extended info PUMP OVERLOAD LV Description Pump overload level Range 0 0 3200A Default value 20 0A Set on run YES Function It allows setting the current value that determines the overload level of the pump The overload protection is a combination of this parameter together with parameters G11 12 gt Filter for pump overload and G11 13 gt Trip delay time because of pump overload When the output current of the drive is higher than the current set in this parameter during the time adjusted in parameter G11 13 the drive turns off its output generatin
26. C of the equipment Range 0 255 Default value YES Function It allows setting the field C of the IP address assigned to the equipment in the local network of the user This address must be provided by the network administrator of the own user See Function in parameter G20 4 1 gt IP address for additional information G20 4 4 IP ADDRESS D Screen 4 PARAM D 143 Description IP address D of the equipment Range 0 255 Default value 143 Set on run YES DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 179 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Function allows setting the field of the IP address assigned to the equipment in the local network of the user This address must be provided by the network administrator of the own user See Function in parameter G20 4 1 gt IP address for additional information G20 4 5 SUBNET MASK ADDRESS A Screen 5 SUBNET A 255 Description Subnet Mask address A Range 0 255 Default value 255 Set on run YES Function It allows setting the field A of the Subnet Mask address of the local network of the user This address must be provided by the network administrator of the own user The format of the Subnet Mask address is the following one A B C D Therefore the setting of this address is realized by introducing a value in each parameter that configure the complete address this is by assigning a value to each one of th
27. DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 87 SDRIVE 700 88 POWER ELECTRONICS G4 3 15 ZERO BAND FILTER FOR ANALOGUE INPUT 2 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 152 2 BAND OFF AIN2 ZERO BAND Zero band filter for the Analogue Input 2 OFF 0 0 9 9 OFF YES Setting a value in this parameter we obtain a filtering of the Analogue Input 2 signal eliminating a possible electrical noise associated to the signal that impedes reading a zero value when it must be read The aim of this parameter is supplying a pre defined zero area for controls by analogue inputs especially for speed control It eliminates small errors in the reference voltage near to zero reference point See figure 10 21 The function of zero band filter is not applied to the reference signals through digital inputs since these settings are absolute zero DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 4 4 Subgroup 4 4 4 4 Pulse Input This input is used for the flow limitation algorithm See subgroup 25 10 Flow Limitation Algorithm For using this input you must have a flow meter with a pulse digital output of pulsewidth greater than 5015 04 41 SENSOR UNITS OF PULSE INPUT Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 1 Sensr U I m Sensor units of pulse input 96 1 6 m s I m m3 m m3 h m s m m m h l m YES It al
28. Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 3 MREF 3 30 0 Multi reference 3 250 to 250 30 0 YES It allows user to set the value of multi reference 3 This value is set in of motor rated speed For additional information see chapter 10 14 G14 MULTI REFERENCES and figure 10 43 G14 4 MULTI REFERENCE 4 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 4 MREF 4 40 0 Multi reference 4 250 to 250 40 0 YES It allows user to set the value of multi reference 4 This value is set in of motor rated speed For additional information see chapter 10 14 G14 MULTI REFERENCES and figure 10 43 G14 5 MULTI REFERENCE 5 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 5 MREF 5 50 0 Multi reference 5 250 to 250 50 0 YES It allows user to set the value of multi reference 5 This value is set in of motor rated speed For additional information see chapter 10 14 G14 MULTI REFERENCES and figure 10 43 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 163 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G14 6 MULTI REFERENCE 6 Screen 6 MREF 6 60 0 Extended info Description Multi reference 6 Range 250 to 250 Default value 60 0 Set on run SI Function It allows user to set the value of multi reference 6 This value is set in of motor rated speed For additional information see chapter
29. Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 Multi function Digital 6 configuration or by means of the output function of one of the comparators option 10 gt REFERENCE 2 in parameter G9 1 9 gt Selection of output function for comparator 1 to G9 3 9 gt Selection of output function for comparator 3 22 gt STOP 2 Relay is activated if stop mode 2 G7 2 is being used Stop mode 2 is selected through one of the digital inputs option 19 gt STOP 2 in parameter G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration or by means of the output function of one of the comparators option 03 3 STOP 2 in parameter G9 1 9 gt Selection of output function for comparator 1 to G9 3 9 Selection of output function for comparator 3 23 SP LIMIT 2 Relay is activated if the alternative speed limits G10 3 gt Minimum speed limit 2 and G10 4 gt Maximum speed limit 2 have been selected through one of the digital inputs option 20 gt SPEED LIMIT 2 in parameter G4 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration or by means of the output function of one of the comparators option 03 gt STOP 2 in parameter G9 1 9 Selection of output function for comparator 1 to G9 3 9 gt Selection of output function for comparator 3
30. Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 2 COMP 3 TYPE 0 Selection of comparator 3 type 0 1 See Function for additional information 0 YES It allows selecting the operation mode of the comparator 3 Operation modes are 03 Normal Comparator 3 will be activated when the ON condition is given setting realized in G9 3 3 gt Activation value of comparator in normal mode and will be deactivated when the OFF condition is given setting realized in G9 3 7 gt Deactivation value of comparator in normal mode 1 gt Window Comparator 3 will be activated when signal is within the limit 1 setting realized in G9 3 5 gt Limit 1 for comparator in window mode and limit 2 setting realized in G9 3 4 gt Limit 2 for comparator in window mode and additionally limit 2 is higher than limit 1 If limit 2 is lower than limit 1 logical function of comparator output will be inverted See figure 10 37 to observe the behaviour of the comparator output for each operation mode G9 3 3 ACTIVATION VALUE OF COMPARATOR 3 IN NORMAL MODE Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run 3 SP C3 ON 100 C3 ACTIVAT LEVEL Activation value of comparator 3 in normal mode 250 to 250 100 YES DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 139 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Function It allows setting the activation value of the comparator 3 output Out
31. Setpoint Ramp G25 7 1 1 PRESSU SOU PID 6G25 7 21 2 FILL SP 70 0 OFF 0 0 40 1 to 250 325 1 313 FILL P 2 0Bar G25 7 4 4 FILL 15 G25 7 5 5 SPT RAMP 1 0Bar 25 6 Setpoint Compensation due to Pressure Loss lt 00 2276 Engineer Unis OFF 0 1 9999min lt A 0 01 326 Engineer Units 0 0 3276 Engineer Units 525 9 Fixed Pumps Control G25 9 1 1 ENABLE PUMP1zN lt NzNo Y Yes G25 8 2 2 ENABLE PUMP2 N 325 3 3 1 3 ENABLE PUMP3 N 625 9 4 4 ENABLE PUMP4 N G25 9 5 5 ENABLE PUMPS N 507010068 Figure 10 16 Parameters structure from subgroup S25 6 G25 to subgroup S25 9 G25 60 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 11 5 5 aw RR CYCLE DUTY SHARE 7777 G259 117 JPon P 0 0Bar lt f 0 0 3276 Engineer Units G25 9 8 8 JPon DLY 20s f 010 6500s 625 9 9 19 JPof P 0 0Bar 0 0 3276 Engineer Units 625 9 10 1 10 PRp BYP 300s G25 9 11 11 PRp OLY OFF OFF 0 0 1 6000m 25 10 Flow Limitation Algorithm G25 10 1 1 FLOW SEL PULSE 3 PULSE 5 825 11 Registers Read Only 625 11 111 1 04 0 625 11 313 3 04 0 E G25 11 4 4 P4z Dd 0 c Em G25 11 5 5 P52 0d 0 c G25 11 6 T
32. This option is not directly programmable by user for any of the analogue outputs This option is automatically set for Analogue Input 1 when the user enables the fixed pump 4 in parameter G25 9 4 gt To enable fixed pump associated to Analogue Output 1 and it will be automatically set to Analogue Input 2 when the user enables the fixed pump 5 in parameter G25 9 5 gt To enable fixed pump associated to Analogue Output 5 For both outputs the configuration will always be from 0 to 10V where indicates that pump 15 disconnected and 10V indicates that pump is connected DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 119 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 68 22 FORMAT SELECTION FOR ANALOGUE OUTPUT 1 Screen 2 FORMT 1 4 20mA Description Format selection for the Analogue Output 1 Range 0 10V 10V 0 20mA 4 20mA Default value 4 20mA Set on run NO Function It allows configuring the Analogue Output 1 in one of four possible formats according to the system requirements GB 2 2 gt Format selection for analogue output 1 d 2 6823 Low lection of anal put 1 68 28 G8 2 9 2 ow range selection of analogue outpu G6 2 4 gt High range selection of analogue output 1 58 2 7 gt Format selection for analogue output 2 GB 2 8 Low range selection of analogue output 2 68 29 gt High range selection of analogue output 2 10 10V OV 5 10V G8 2 2 4 12mA 20 G8 2 7 10 20
33. gt b ty l FIXED PUMP X ON TIME gt b ty li 25 3 2 gt Start speed of fixed pumps 325 3 3 Minimum PID error to start the fixed pumps 325 3 4 Delay time to start fixed pump 1 25 3 5 gt Delay time to start fixed pump 2 25 3 6 gt Delay time to start fixed pump 3 G25 3 7 gt Delay time to start fixed pump 4 G25 3 8 gt Delay time to start fixed pump 5 25 5 1 gt Speed bypass al the starting of fixed pumps G25 5 2 lt gt Time of speed bypass after starting fixed pumps SD7OITCCOO27BI Figure 10 48 Starting of the fixed pumps according to the start speed the PID error and the delay time for each pump 200 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G25 3 4 DELAY TIME TO START FIXED PUMP 1 RELAY 1 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 4 1 ON 10s FIX PMP1 STR DLY Delay time to start the fixed pump 1 Relay 1 OFF 0 6000s 10s YES allows setting a delay time to start the fixed pump associated to the Relay 1 At the moment of starting the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the drive speed parameter G25 3 2 gt Start speed for the fixed pumps and the PID error G25 3 3 gt Minimum PID error to start the fixed pumps If time is too short overpressure can be generated in the system On the contrary if time is too long under pressure can be generated Se
34. if time is too long under pressure can be generated See figures 10 47 and 10 48 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 201 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 3 7 DELAY TIME TO START FIXED PUMP 4 1 Screen 7 FP T4 ON 10s Extended info FIX PMP4 STR DLY Description Delay time to start the fixed pump 4 Analogue Output 1 Range OFF 0 6000s Default value 10s Set on run YES Function It allows setting a delay time to start the fixed pump associated to the Analogue Output 1 At the moment of starting the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the drive speed parameter G25 3 2 gt Start speed for the fixed pumps and the PID error G25 3 3 gt Minimum PID error to start the fixed pumps Note If time is too short overpressure can be generated in the system On the contrary if time is too long under pressure can be generated See figures 10 47 and 10 48 G25 3 8 DELAY TIME TO START FIXED PUMP 5 2 Screen 8 FP T5 ON 10s Extended info FIX PMP5 STR DLY Description Delay time to start the fixed pump 5 Analogue Output 2 Range OFF 0 6000s Default value 10s Set on run YES Function It allows setting a delay time to start the fixed pump associated to the Analogue Output 2 At the moment of starting the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the drive speed parameter G25 3 2 gt Start speed for the fixed pumps and the PID error G25 3 3 gt
35. of the motor Ensure the correct motor parameters are entered before giving the first start command to the drive N WARNING It is absolutely necessary that the installer guaranties the correct observance of the law and the regulations that are in force in those countries or areas where this device is going to be installed INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION 15 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 3 POWER RANGE 3 1 Power Range at 400Vac Operation Temperature 50 Operation Temperature 402C CODE HEAVY DUTY HEAVY DUTY Power kW 150 Power kW 120 eevee d Hated ae 5070006 5x x xx 5X 5070006 5xxxx XX a 5070018 5x x xx SD70048 5x x xx SD70060 5x x xx 58 5070075 5x x xx 113 113 i cc 38 08 01 05 01 01 1681 15 50701505 150 75 225 18 90 225 50701705 170 90 25 23 10 25 5070275 5x x xx 5070460 5 40 20 60 55 35 60 7 SD707205xxxx 70 40 1080 90 500 108 SD712605xxxx 1260 70 18900 155 90 1800 SD71580 5x x xx 1580 900 2370 1975 1100 2370 5071800 5x xx 1800 1000 2100 2250 1200 2100 5072200 5 2200 1200 3300 2150 1500 3300 Table 3 1 Table of power and current data at 400V NOTES Rated power for standard A C motors of 4 pole 1500rpm For h
36. parameters of the group To modify numeric parameters Simultaneously pushed will ascend the user through the varying options Simultaneously pushed will descend the user through the varying options allows upward movement through the parameters groups and allows navigation for different parameters within a parameter group It also allows the increase of parameters value allows downward movement through the parameters groups and allows navigation for different parameters within a parameter group It also allows the decrease of parameters value POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 When pushed for 2 seconds approx it allows navigation between the programming line and visualisation lines available to the user It also offers the possibility of escaping back to the previous sub group or group To start the drive from the keypad when the control has been set as local control check drive configuration To stop the drive from the keypad when the control has been set as local control In the case of tripping this key can be used to reset the drive if local STOP RESET control is enabled In the following figure you can see a programming example where you can observe the operation explained previously Programming Line 49 0 G Cmon gt 1 PARTIAL LOCK 2 TOTAL LOCK 74 v PASSWORD OFF 0000 1327 9999
37. the drive will start until reaching the reference value introduced whenever the start command is activated Note If stopping the motor when reference is below a predefined speed is required this parameter must be set to Y Additionally you must set the correct values in G10 1 gt Minimum speed limit 1 or G10 3 gt Minimum speed limit 2 G7 9 DELAY TIME BETWEEN STOP AND NEXT START Screen 9 OFFdly OFF Extended info DELAY AFTER STOP Description Delay time to start after stopping the drive Range OFF 0 000 10 0005 Default value OFF Set on run YES Function allows setting a delay time between the moment the drive has stopped and the next starting At the moment of the drive is stopped it begins to count the time set in this parameter Several situations can occur 1 Drive receives the start command after elapsing the minimum time set in this parameter In this case the drive will not count any delay time more at the moment of the starting whenever any delay time is not set in parameter G7 6 3 Start delay time 2 Drive receives the start command before elapsing the minimum time set in this parameter In this case if any delay time at the starting has not been set in G7 6 the drive will start immediately after elapsing the minimum time set here If a start delay time has been set in G7 6 the drive will begin to count this time from the moment of receiving the start command If the start delay time
38. the protections of the drive and the motor will be disabled It is not recommended select this option since the drive could try to reset internal trips causing serious damage to the drive itself G12 7 SELECTION OF FAULT 3 TO BE RESET Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 7 F3 AUTO RST 0 Selection of fault 3 to be reset 0 25 0 YES If auto reset function is enabled G12 1 gt AUTO RESET option Y the drive will consider the fault programmed here as resettable automatically Fault 3 to be reset 15 selected according to the options explained in section Function of parameter G12 5 Selection of fault 1 to be reset CAUTION the moment of selecting faults can be reset you should pay special attention to option 1 gt ALL THE In this case the protections of the drive and the motor will be disabled It is not recommended select this option since the drive could try to reset internal trips causing serious damage to the drive itself G12 8 SELECTION OF FAULT 4 TO BE RESET Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 8 F4 AUTO RST 0 Selection of fault 4 to be reset 0 25 0 Sl If auto reset function is enabled G12 1 gt AUTO RESET option Y the drive will consider the fault programmed here as resettable automatically Fault 4 to be reset is selected according to the options explained in section Function
39. 0Bar 8 SPD LO2 0 uon 9 SPD HI2 uon PD LO RNG AIN PD HIG RNG AIN NJ 100 14 AIN2 LOSS N 152 2 BAND OFF AIN2 ZERO BAN 1 Sensr U I m 2 Pls s 100 l s LIQU AMOUNT PULS 3 M Rng 1000 1 5 TI LOW MAX RANG 1 ACCE 1 3 0 s INITIAL ACCEL 2 DECEL 1 3 0 5 INITIAL DECEL 3 ACCE 2 1 0 s uon 4 DECEL uon ECOND ACCEL ECOND DECEL 2 1 0 5 5 BRK ACC OFF BREAKPOINT ACL 6 BRK D EC OFF BREAKPOINT DCL 7 PMT ACL1 1 0 5 M 8 PMT D 9PMTA CL1 3 0 5 OTO POT DEC CL2 1 0 s 10 PMT DCL2 3 0 s OTO POT DEC 11 PMOT BRK OFF OTO POT BRKPOI 12 SP FLT 0 250s MOOT SPD FILTE NJ OTO POT INC1 E OTO POT INC2 NJ 22 FACTORY SETTINGS SETTING 1 N OFF N Bar mA 4mA 0 0Bar 20 10 0Bar 090 100 N OFF G4 Inputs 4 4 Pulse Input 1001 6 10001 5 G5 Acceleration and Deceleration Ramps 3 0 8 3 0 8 1 096 8 1 096 8 OFF OFF 1 096 8 3 0 8 1 096 8 3 0 8 OFF 0 250s 256 CONFIGURATION REGISTER G4 Inputs 54 3 Analogue Input 2 POWER ELECTRONICS SETTING 2 POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 PARAMETERS FACTORY SETTINGS SETTING 1 SETTING 2 G6 PID Control 1 SEL REF MREF MREF 2 PID LOC 100 PID LOCAL SETPOI 100 3 SEL 12 Al2 4 GAIN Kp 8 0 PID PROPORTIONAL 8 0 5 INTEGRAL 0 05 PID INTEGRAL 0 0s 6 DIFFEREN 0 0
40. 100 G3 References G3 1 1 REF1 SPD LOCAL G3 2 2 REF2 SPDzLOCAL G3 3 3 LOCAL SP 100 250 to 250 SD70ITGOO54AI Figure 10 2 Parameters structure from group G1 to group G3 46 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS G4 Inputs mo 54 1 Digital Inputs G4 1 1 1 CNTROL MODE1 1 6G4 1 2 2 CNTROL MODE2 2 64 1 3 3 RESET 64 1 4 4 DIGIT MODE 1 64 1 5 5 DIGITL IN 1206 04 1 6 6 DIGITL 2 00 64 1 7 7 DIGITL IN 3 00 64 1 8 9 5 00 G4 1 10 10 DIGITL IN 6217 G4 1 8 8 DIGITL IN 4 00 1 LOCAL 2 REMOTE 3 SERIAL COMMS 23 WIRES 1 ALL PROGRAMMABLE 2 MREF 2 WIRES 3 MREF 3 WIRES 4 MOTORIZED POT S ERASAB QO NO USE 01 5 02 STOP1 03 5 2 04 STOP1 RESET 05 5 5 06 START RST STOP O7 RESET 08 5 1 09 START INCH 10 INV SPEED 11 RESERVE 12 RESERVE 13 INV INCHS 14 ACCIDEC 2 15 REFERENCE 2 16 17 CONTROL 2 18 START STP RST 19 STOP 2 20 SPEED LIMIT 2 21 DC BRAKE 22 5 MODE 2 23 CURRENT LIMI2 50 START STP 91 FLOW PULSE 52 PUMP1 FLT 53 FIX PUMP2 FLT 54 FIX PUMPS FLT 55 FIX PUMP4 FLT 26 FIA PUMPS FLT 57 lt PROTstart 58 PRESS FLT 59 10 WATER FLT 60 LO PRESS FLT 61 FLOW SWITCH 62 IRRIGAT TRIP 63 SETPONT 1 64 SETPONT 2 65 5 3 66 REF
41. 4 1 gt Delay time before activating sleep mode 325 4 2 Sleep speed for local setpoint 1 NOTE For this example we have taken as stop condition of the drive pump sleep mode activation a speed value concretely the sleep speed associated to the local setpoint 1 But the stop condition can be any one of the remain speeds associated to each one of the PID local setpoints in case of the stop condition is the speed signal or can also be the flow detection the flow level or the output current level SD70ITCCOO34AI Figure 10 49 Sleep Mode deactivation DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 203 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 4 2 SLEEP SPEED FOR LOCAL SETPOINT 1 Screen 2 SLPsp1 40 0 Extended info Description Sleep speed assigned to local setpoint 1 Range 0 0 to 250 Default value 40 0 Set on run YES Function allows setting the value of the sleep speed 1 below which the drive will go to sleep whenever local setpoint 1 is selected It is set in of motor speed See figure 10 49 G25 4 3 SLEEP SPEED FOR LOCAL SETPOINT 2 Screen 3 SLPsp2 40 0 Extended info Description Sleep speed assigned to local setpoint 2 Range 0 0 to 250 Default value 40 0 Set on run YES Function allows setting the value of the sleep speed 2 below which the drive will go to sleep whenever local setpoint 2 is selected It is set in of motor speed See figure 10 49 G25 4 4 SLEEP SPEED FOR LOCAL
42. 67 OVR STAR Manual starting without protections for testing starting NO 69 PRESSUR SWITC Detection of the pressure existing in the system to be used with the Priming pump NO G4 1 6 MULTI FUNCTION DIGITAL INPUT 2 CONFIGURATION Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 6 DIGITL IN 2 00 Multi function Digital Input 2 configuration 00 69 00 It allows user to configure the Digital Input 2 for its individual use See Function in parameter G4 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration for additional information about the configuration options G4 1 7 MULTI FUNCTION DIGITAL INPUT 3 CONFIGURATION Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 7 DIGITL IN 3 00 Multi function Digital Input 3 configuration 00 69 00 It allows user to configure the Digital Input 3 for its individual use See Function in parameter G4 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration for additional information about the configuration options DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 19 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G4 1 8 MULTI FUNCTION DIGITAL INPUT 4 CONFIGURATION Screen 8 DIGITL IN 4 00 Description Multi function Digital Input 4 configuration Range 00 69 Default value 00 Set on run NO Function It allows user to configure the Digital Input 4 for its individual use See Function in parameter G4 1 5 Mul
43. 911 99 43 99 8 Power Electronics Asia HQ Co Room 305 SK Hub Primo Building 953 1 Dokok dong Gangnam gu SEOUL 135 270 KOREA Tel 82 2 3462 4656 Fax 82 2 3462 4657 Power Electronics Guangzhou Room 3608 IVEX CITIC Plaza Building 233 TianHe North Road 510613 Guangzhou Guangdong P H CHINA Tel 4 86 20 87 520 092 Fax 86 20 38 773 559 22 POWER ELECTRONICS www power electronics com
44. CONTROL Screen 4 GAIN 8 0 Extended info PID PROPORTIONAL Description Proportional gain of PID control Range 0 1 to 20 Default value 8 0 Set on run YES Function allows setting the proportional gain of PID regulator Note Usually default value is enough for a good control If a higher control response is required increase this value An increase of this value can introduce a higher instability to the system 98 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G6 5 INTEGRATION TIME OF PID CONTROL Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 5 INTEGRAL 0 0s PID INTEGRAL Integral time of PID control 0 0 1000s 0 05 YES It allows setting the integration time of PID control Usually default value is enough for a good control If this value is increased system accuracy is improved but its resoonse can become slower G6 6 DERIVATION TIME OF PID CONTROL Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 6 DIFFEREN 0 0s PID DIFFERENTIAL Derivation time of PID control 0 0 250 0 05 YES It allows setting the derivation time of PID control Usually default value is enough for a good control If this value is increased then the system response is increased but accuracy can decrease G6 7 PID OUTPUT INVERSION Screen Description Range Default value Set on run
45. Cosine Phi Set according to motor nameplate 6 MTR FRQ 50Hz 2 6 Motor frequency Hz Set according to motor nameplate Use the following values as a reference Submersible pumps gt 20 00 7 MTR COOL 40 62 7 Motor cooling at zero speed Self cool motor gt 40 Force cooled motor gt 100 G3 References 1REF1SPD LOCAL G3 1 Speed reference source 1 LOCAL Reference will be introduced by keypad and is set in G3 3 Local Speed Reference 2 2 SPD LOCAL G3 2 Speed reference source 2 gt Reference will be introduced by Analogue Input 1 3 LOCAL SPD 100 63 3 Local Speed Reference 100 244 COMMONLY USED CONFIGURATIONS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Parameter Name Description Value G4 Inputs 54 1 Digital Inputs 1 CNTROL MODE 1 2 G4 1 1 Main Control Mode 2 REMOTE Drive control is done through control terminals 4 DIGIT I MODE 1 64 14 Digital Inputs configuration 1 gt ALL PROGRAMMABLE all digital inputs be individually selection configured by the user 5 DIGITL IN 1 05 64 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 05 gt Start Stop Allows the start stop command to be given by a configuration switch 64 1 6 Multi function Digital Input 2 15 gt Reference 2 It allows selecting the alternative speed 6 DIGITL IN 2 15 configuration reference programmed in G3 2 12 2 2 Connections drawing Terminals 1 and 2 start stop command NO status Terminals 1 and 3 al
46. Description Selection of the control source for the Relay 3 Range 00 31 Default value 05 Set on run NO Function allows configuring the operation of the Relay 3 See parameter G8 1 1 gt Selection of Relay 1 control source to obtain information about the configuration options 116 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G8 1 10 ON DELAY TIME FOR RELAY 3 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 10 T R3 ON 0 0s R3 ACTIVAT DELAY ON delay time for the Relay 3 0 0 9995 0 05 YES allows user to set a delay time before activating the Relay 3 If during this time the activation condition disappears the relay will be not activated G8 1 11 OFF DELAY TIME FOR RELAY 3 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 11 T R2 OFF 0 0s R3 DEACTIV DELAY OFF delay time for the Relay 3 0 0 999s 0 0s YES It allows user to set a delay time before deactivating the Relay 3 If during this time the deactivation condition disappears the relay will be not deactivated this is the relay will follow activated G8 1 12 RELAY 3 INVERSION Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 12 INVERT REL3 N Logic inversion of the Relay 3 N Y See Function for additional information N NO It allows user to invert the logic of the Relay 3 Relay 3 has one no
47. E Dinssee 391 3980 1 FAULT 548 shows the faults of the drive In the upper line are displayed the conditions at trip moment 50701 0021 Figure 11 1 Fault displaying Programming Line 11 1 Description of Faults List Output current has reached a dangerous level Its value is above 220 of the drive rated current Protection is F1 LIM FLT activated instantaneously DC Bus voltage has reached a dangerous level 850Vdc Hardware Protection Drive will turn off the output to F2 V LIM FLT ihe motor EUER Internal protection within the appropriate IGBT semiconductor has acted F12 IMB V IN Input voltage imbalance greater than 10 of average input power supply of SD700 for a time higher than 100ms Average supply voltage has exceeded the value set in G11 6 HIGH VOLT for greater than the time set in G11 7 F13 HI V IN HIGH V TO Average supply voltage is lower than the value set in G11 4 LOW VOLT for greater than the time set in G11 5 F14 LW V IN LOW V F15 CURL Vdc Unstable bus voltage There is a DC Bus voltage ripple higher than 100Vdc for more than 1 1sec F16 HI Vdc DC Bus voltage has exceeded critical operating level 850Vdc Software Protection F17 LW Vdc DC Bus voltage is lower than critical operating level 350Vdc FAULT MESSAGES DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS 237 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Current imbalance of more than 25 of the ave
48. Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 1 T DC BRAKE OFF DC CURRENT LEVEL Time for DC brake activation OFF 0 0 9 9s OFF YES It allows user to set the time during which DC brake will be activated G17 2 CURRENT APPLIED TO THE BRAKE Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 2 DC CURR 0 DC CURRENT LEVEL Current applied to the brake 0 100 096 YES It allows setting the current value applied to the brake A proper current value must be set to brake the load inertia correctly If this value is too low the load will not be stopped in time On the other hand if the value is too high the power components of the drive will be stressed G17 3 VOLTAGE APPLIED TO THE BRAKE Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 3 DC VOLTS 0 0 DC BR VOLT LEVEL Voltage applied to the brake 0 0 25 0 0 YES It allows setting the level of DC voltage applied to the brake A proper voltage value must be set to brake the load inertia correctly If this value is too low the load will not be stopped in time On the other hand if the value is too high the power components of the drive will be stressed G17 4 NON CONDENSING HEATING CURRENT Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run 4 HEATING OFF Non condensing heating current OFF 0 0 30 OFF YES DESCRIPTION OF
49. F68 CAVIT UNDERL Note The pauses are not faults consequently the do not generate a fault code and they will not be stored in the fault history Faults of Pumps Program That means the drive or installation faults that have been configured from the pump program In case of any of these conditions occur the motor controlled by the drive will stop followed by the fixed pumps and the display will show the corresponding fault message These fault will be treated in the same way than the general faults some of them are High Pressure Fault It can be provoked through a digital which has been configured in this mode or by comparison of the received data of an analogue input This information will be compared with the setting realized in parameters G25 6 11 gt Minimum speed for minimum pressure fault to G25 6 13 gt Maximum pressure level The display will show 66 PRESSURE o Low Pressure Fault Pipe broken possibility The display will show F65 LOW PRESSURE o No Water Fault This is especially useful in the use of level proves at wells The display will show F67 LOW WATER o Short Starting Cycle Fault Produced when the drive tries to start before the established time between a start and a stop has expired For additional information see G25 6 20 gt Cycle time of the drive In this case the display will show F71 CYCLING o Irrigation Equipment Fault Produced by a digital
50. Frames 8 and 9 22 5 4 Dimensions of Frames 10 and 11 23 5 5 Dimensions of Frames 4 and 5 0 24 5 6 Dimensions of Frames 6 and 7 0 25 6 eee eee ieee eee ee ke 26 6d Power CONMECHONS usc 524558 528855 dtc peius 26 62 ConecollOlS sees 32 6 3 Control Terminals Description 422 34 7 DISPLAY UNIT AND CONTROL 35 71 Keypad Unit D Scrlpllori s e eoe e arce S ede esse due iov ae set clue 35 8 STATUS MESSAGES nne weed 38 91e JUsbof Status Messages ono ein er he Dedi d tad quads 38 9 2 Spo VVartilBg Messages am tess bond 52422501 20238 39 9 VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP Go 40 9 1 Parameters SV 1 Motor 40 9 2 Parameters SV 2 Drive Visualization 2 41 9 3 Parameters SV 3 External 000400 0010 41 9 4 Parameters 5 4 Internal
51. Function Note It allows setting the value of the proportional gain for the PID regulator according to the requirements of the installation The default value is usually proper for pump control application Nevertheless if it is necessary to have a higher control response then increase this value If this value is increased a higher instability can be introduced in the system G25 2 4 INTEGRAL TIME OF PID REGULATOR Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 4 PID It 5 0s INTEGRAL PID Integral time of PID regulator 0 1 1000s Max 5 08 YES allows setting the integral time of PID regulator according to the requirements of the installation The default value is usually proper for pump control application If this value is increased accuracy of the system is improved but system response can be slow down G25 2 5 DERIVATION TIME OF PID REGULATOR Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 5 PID Dt 0 0s DIFFERENTIAL PID Derivation time of PID regulator 0 0 250s 0 05 YES It allows setting the derivation time of PID regulator according to the requirements of the installation The default value is usually proper for pump control application Therefore we recommend do not modify this setting If this value is increased the system response is improved but system accuracy can be reduced slightly G25
52. G11 4 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note Note G11 5 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note G11 6 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note Note POWER ELECTRONICS LOW INPUT VOLTAGE LEVEL 4 LOW VOLT 360V LO INPUT VOLTAGE Minimum level of input voltage 323 425 360 YES It allows setting a minimum level of input voltage Drive will trip it turns off the output to the motor because of fault F14 LW V IN when average voltage measured at the input of the equipment is lower than the value set in this parameter during the time adjusted in G11 5 gt Trip time because of low input voltage Protection from low input voltage is a combination of this parameter and G11 5 gt Trip time because of low input voltage In case of the drive is powered with an input voltage of 690V the default value of this parameter will be 600V and the range will be 586 621V TRIP TIME BECAUSE OF LOW INPUT VOLTAGE 5 LOW V TO 5s LO INP VOL TIMEO Trip time because of low input voltage 0 0 60s OFF 60 1 55 YES It allows setting a time once elapsed it a trip because of low input voltage will be generated Drive will trip it turns off the output to the motor because of fault F14 LW V IN when average voltage measured at the input of the
53. G20 4 18 gt MAC address D G20 4 14 MAC ADDRESS B Screen 14 MAC B 34 Description MAC address B Range 0 255 Default value 34 Set on run YES Function It allows setting the field B of the MAC address This address is unique and exclusive and is associated to the LAN board drive It must be provided by Power Electronics See Function in parameter G20 4 13 gt MAC address for additional information G20 4 15 MAC ADDRESS C Screen 15 MAC C 56 Description MAC address C Range 0 255 Default value 56 Set on run YES Function It allows setting the field C of the MAC address This address is unique and exclusive and is associated to the LAN board drive It must be provided by Power Electronics See Function in parameter G20 4 13 gt address for additional information G20 4 16 MAC ADDRESS D Screen 16 MAC D 78 Description MAC address D Range 0 255 Default value 78 Set on run YES 182 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function It allows setting the field D of the MAC address This address is unique and exclusive and is associated to the LAN board drive It must be provided by Power Electronics See Function in parameter G20 4 13 gt address for additional information G20 4 17 MAC ADDRESS E Screen 17 MAC 90 Description MAC address E Range 0 255 Default value 90
54. OFF G20 Serial Communication Controls 20 3 Modbus 1COMMS ADDR 10 COMM ADDRESS 10 2 BAUDS 4800 4800 3 PARITY NONE NONE G20 Serial Communication Controls 20 4 Modbus TCP 1 PARAM A 192 192 2 IP PARAM B 168 168 PARAM C 1 1 4 IP PARAM D 143 143 5 SUBNET A 255 259 6 SUBNET B 255 255 7 SUBNET 255 259 8 SUBNET D 0 0 9 GATEWAY 0 0 10 GATEWAY 0 0 11 GATEWAY 0 0 12 GATEWAY 0 0 13 MAC A 12 12 14 MAC B 34 34 15 MAC C 56 96 16 MAC D 78 78 17 MAC E 90 90 18 MAC F 171 171 262 CONFIGURATION REGISTER POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 PARAMETERS FACTORY SETTINGS SETTING 1 SETTING 2 G25 Pump Control 25 1 Setpoints 1 CONTROL MODE 1 1 2 MAN SPD REF LOC LOC 3 MAN SPEED 0 0 MANUAL SPEED 40 09 4 ALT MAN S R LOCAL LOCAL 5 SETPT1 0 0Bar LOCAL SETPOINT 1 0 0Bar 6 SETPT2 0 0Bar LOCAL SETPOINT 2 0 0Bar 7 SETPT3 0 0Bar LOCAL SETPOINT 3 0 0Bar 8 SETPT4 0 0Bar LOCAL SETPOINT 4 0 0Bar 9 SETPT5 0 0Bar LOCAL SETPOINT 5 0 0Bar 10 SETPT6 0 0Bar LOCAL SETPOINT 6 0 0Bar 11 SETPT7 0 0Bar LOCAL SETPOINT 7 0 0Bar 12 SETPT8 0 0Bar LOCAL SETPOINT 8 0 0Bar 13 AutOFF OFF OFF _ G25 Pump Control 525 2 PID Setting 1 PID SETP LOCAL LOCAL 2 PID 12 Al2 3 PID Kc 1 0 PROPORTIONAL PID 1 0 4 PID It 5 0s INTEGRAL PID 5 0s 5 PID Dt 0 0s DIFFERENTIAL PID 0 0s 6 PID ERR xx x 7 ERR xx xxkPa 8 PID INVERT N N G25 Pump Control 5 25 3 Start Conditions 1 LP Pon 0 0 AWAKENING LEVE 0 0 2
55. Output Relay 3 The relay is configured with the option 00 gt ALWAYS OFF and free configuration is allowed for it Y 3 YES To enable the fixed pump associated to the Output Relay 3 The relay is configured with the option 28 gt PUMP CNTRL and free configuration is not allowed for it G25 9 4 TO ENABLE FIXED PUMP ASSOCIATED TO ANALOGUE OUTPUT 1 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 4 ENABLE PUMP4 N To enable the fixed pump associated to the Analogue Output 1 pump 4 N Y See Function for additional information N YES allows setting enabling or disabling the fixed pump associated to the Analogue Output 1 If this parameter is set to Y when activating pump control in parameter G1 7 gt Program activation option PUMP and configuring one digital input parameter G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 gt Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration with option 55 gt FIX PUMP4 FLT the Analogue Output 1 is configured with option 27 9 MACRO PUMP to control fixed pumps If the pump associated to this analogue output is not required we recommend you disable it from this parameter In this way the analogue output can be configured for other uses N 3 NO To disable the fixed pump associated to the Analogue Output 1 This analogue output is configured with the option 00 NONE and free configuration is allowed for it
56. PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 14 gt CURR LIMIT Limit of motor current adjusted G10 5 gt Current limit has been reached 15 gt VOLT LIMIT DC Bus voltage limit has been reached 740V 16 9 TORQ LIMIT Torque limit adjusted in G10 7 has been reached 17 COMPARATOR When the comparator 1 output is active relay is activated See group G9 COMPARATORS 18 COMPARATOR2 When the comparator 2 output is active relay is activated See group G9 COMPARATORS 19 COMPARATORS3 When the comparator 3 output is active relay is activated See group G9 COMPARATORS 20 gt ACC DEC 2 Relay is activated if the alternative acceleration deceleration ramps are being used These alternative ramps are set in G5 3 gt Acceleration ramp 2 and G5 4 Deceleration ramp 2 and are selected through one of the digital inputs option 14 ACC DEC 2 in parameter G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration or by means of the output function of one of the comparators option 09 ACC DEC 2 in parameter G9 1 9 gt Selection of output function for comparator 1 G9 3 9 gt Selection of output function for comparator 3 21 REFERENCE 2 Relay is activated if reference 2 03 2 Reference source 2 for speed has been selected through one of the digital inputs option 15 gt REFERENCE 2 in parameter G4 1 5
57. PARAMETERS The different parameters of the SD700 are displayed in the alohanumeric LCD These parameters are organized in groups G1 to G25 To access to the parameters or sub groups which are in a lower level press the key When you have accessed the desired parameter this parameter will be shown as either a numerical value or a list of possible options Programming Line SDRIVE x gus FAULT La 2 To display all groups and sub groups needed to set the drive 50701 0020 Figure 10 1 Detail of Programming Line DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 45 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS See the information below for the whole parameter list and possible options of configuration G1 Options Menu G1 1 1 LOCK PARMTRS 0 0 1 PARTIAL LOCK 2 TOTAL LOCK G12 2PASSWORD_ OFF G1 4 4 LANG ESPANOL ENGLISH ESPANOL DEUTSCH 1 5 5 INITIALISE 0 c3 O NO INIT 1 USR PRMTR 2 MTR 3 ALL PRMTR 61 6 6 SHORT Menu NO NO YES G1 7 7 PROG STANDARD lt gt STANDARD PUMP 51 10 Eloader 6G1 10 1 UPLOAD N c3 Y Yes 51 10 2 DOWNLOAD N c YzYes 61 11 11 FAN CTRL FIXE FIXE TEMP Motor Nameplate Data G2 1 1 MTR CUR 00 00A 82 2 2 MTR VOLT 400V 220 999V G2 3 3 MTR PWR 00 0kW G2 4 4 MTR RPM 1485 G2 6 6 MTR FRQ 50Hz 62 1 17 MTR COOLN 40 OFF 20
58. PAUSE 0 0 0 0s 0 0s Om 5 2 2 G25 Pump Control 25 7 Pipe Filling Setpoint Ramp PID 70 2 0 15m 1 0Bar s CONFIGURATION REGISTER 265 SDRIVE 700 SETTING 2 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS PARAMETERS FACTORY SETTINGS SETTING 1 SETTING 2 G25 Pump Control 525 8 Setpoint Compensation due to Pressure Loss 1 COMP 1 0 0Bar SETPOINT 0 0Bar 2 COMP 2 0 0Bar SETPOINT COMPEN2 0 0Bar 3 COMP 3 0 0Bar SETPOINT COMPEN3 0 0Bar 4 COMP 4 0 0Bar SETPOINT COMPE N4 0 0Bar 5 COMP 5 0 0Bar SETPOINT 5 0 0Bar M G25 Pump Control 25 9 Fixed Pumps Control 1 ENABLE PUMP 1 3 N 2 ENABLE PUMP2 N N 3 ENABLE PUMP3 N N 4 ENABLE PUMP4 N N 5 ENABLE PUMP5 N N 6 FP ALTER MOD 0 0 7 Pon P 0 0Bar 0 0Bar 8 Pon DLY 20s 20s 9 Pof P 0 0Bar 0 0Bar 10 PRp BYP 300s PRIM PUM BYP DLY 300s 11 PRp DLY OFF PRIM PUM FLTdly OFF G25 Pump Control 25 10 Flow Limitation Algorithm 1 FLOW SEL PULSE PULSE 2 MAX FLOW 1000 I s 1000 I s 3 OFFSET 10 0 4 FLO RES 100 FLOW RESET LEVEL 100 5 DECrat 2 0 5 FLOW DECEL RATE 2 0 s 6 UNIT FLOW s 15 G25 Pump Control 25 11 Registers Read only 1 1 0d 0m TIME RESTORE N N 266 CONFIGURATION REGISTER POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 CONFIGURATION REGISTER 267 lt gt POWER ELECTRONICS www power electronics com 24 Hours Technical Assistance 365 days a year HEAD OFFICE C Leonardo da Vinci 24 2
59. PID control error Range Default value Set Function shows the difference between the reference or setpoint value of PID regulator source of which is set in G6 1 gt Source selection for introducing reference signal and the feedback signal value of the process source of which is set in G6 3 gt Selection of feedback signal source This parameter is read only 100 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 7 Group 7 G7 Start Stop Mode Configuration G7 1 STOP MODE 1 Screen 1 STOP 1 RAMP Description Stop mode 1 Range RAMP SPIN See Function for additional information Default value RAMP Set on run YES Function allows selecting the main stop mode of drive The selected option must be the appropriate one for each application Selection options RAMP Drive will stop by applying a frequency ramp to stop the motor this is drive applies a zero speed reference and decelerates down to that speed according to the pattern set in G5 2 3 Deceleration ramp 1 SPIN Drive will turn off the output voltage to the motor and this one will stop by inertia Stopping time is determined by system inertia This stop option is recommended for applications with big inertias mills fans crushers etc with the purpose of avoiding possible motor regeneration to the drive Note Stop mode 1 or 2 parameter G7 2 can be selected through a digital
60. Phi __ Set according to motor nameplate 6 MTR FRQ 50Hz 62 6 Motor frequency Hz Set according to motor nameplate Use the following values as a reference Submersible pumps gt 20 00 7 MTR COOL 40 62 7 Motor cooling at zero speed Selfscagl motor 4006 Force cooled motor gt 100 G3 References SPD MREF G3 1 Speed reference source 1 MREF Multiple speed references activated by digital inputs G4 Inputs 54 1 Digital Inputs CNTROL MODE1 2 64 1 1 Main Control Mode 2 REMOTE Drive control is done through control terminals s 3 gt MREF 3 WIRES Automatically programs digital inputs 4 5 4 DIGIT MODE 3 2 ts connguralion and 6 as multiple speed references for up to 7 different values The selection dp others digital inputs remain user configurable 5 DIGITL IN 1 05 64 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 05 gt Start Stop Allows the start stop command to be given by a configuration switch G14 Multi references g z 1 MREF 1 10 0 61441 Multi reference 1 10 0 Allows setting the setpoint 1 value for the drive It should be set according to the application requirements 2 MREF 2 20 0 614 2 Multi reference 2 20 0 Allows setting the setpoint 2 value for the drive It should be set according to the application requirements 7 3 MREF 3 30 0 G14 3 Multi reference 3 30 0 Allows setting the setpoint 3 value for the drive It should be set according to
61. SETPOINT 3 Screen 4 SLPsp2 40 0 Extended info DRV SLEEP SPEED3 Description Sleep speed assigned to local setpoint 3 Range 0 0 to 250 Default value 40 0 Set on run YES Function allows setting the value of the sleep speed 3 below which the drive will go to sleep whenever local setpoint 3 is selected It is set in of motor speed See figure 10 49 G25 4 5 SLEEP SPEED FOR LOCAL SETPOINT 4 Screen 5 SLPsp2 40 0 Extended info Description Sleep speed assigned to local setpoint 4 Range 0 0 to 250 Default value 40 0 Set on run YES Function allows setting the value of the sleep speed 4 below which the drive will go to sleep whenever local setpoint 4 is selected It is set in of motor speed See figure 10 49 204 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS G25 4 6 SLEEP SPEED FOR LOCAL SETPOINT 5 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 6 SLPsp5 40 0 DRV SLEEP SPEED5 Sleep speed assigned to local setpoint 5 0 0 to 250 40 0 YES allows setting the value of the sleep speed 5 below which the drive will go to sleep whenever local setpoint 5 is selected It is set in of motor speed See figure 10 49 G25 4 7 SLEEP SPEED FOR LOCAL SETPOINT 6 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 7 SLPsp2 40 0 DRV SLEEP SPEED6 Sleep speed assigned to local setpoint 6 0 0
62. See figure 10 42 G12 4 RESET TIME FOR COUNTER OF AUTO RESET ATTEMPTS Screen 4 RS COUNT 15min Extended info AUTORESET TIMOUT Description Time to reset the counter of auto reset attempts Range 1 60min Default value 15min Set on run YES 154 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function allows setting the time once elapsed it the counter of auto reset attempts will be reset to zero Two situations are possible a Reset time of the counter elapses before the drive realizes the attempts number of auto reset adjusted in parameter G12 2 In this case the counter will be reset to zero b Drive realizes the attempts number of auto reset without achieving to start before the reset time of the attempts counter elapses In this case the fault is remained and the time value at which the last faulty attempt of auto reset occurred is remained by the reset timer of the attempts counter See figure 10 42 G12 5 SELECTION OF FAULT 1 TO BE RESET Screen 5 F1 AUTO RST 0 Description Selection of fault 1 to be reset Range 0 25 See Function for additional information Default value 0 Set on run YES Function If auto reset function is enabled G12 1 gt AUTO RESET option Y the drive will consider the fault programmed here as resettable automatically Fault 1 to be reset is selected according to the following options 0 gt 0 NO AUTO RESET There is no fault programm
63. Set on run YES Function It allows setting the field E of the MAC address This address is unique and exclusive and is associated to the LAN board drive It must be provided by Power Electronics See Function in parameter G20 4 13 gt address for additional information G20 4 18 MAC ADDRESS F Screen 18 MAC F z 171 Description MAC address F Range 0 255 Default value 121 Set on run YES Function It allows setting the field F of the MAC address This address is unique and exclusive and is associated to the LAN board drive It must be provided by Power Electronics See Function in parameter G20 4 13 gt address for additional information DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 183 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 20 Group 25 G25 Pump Control This parameters group will be available if parameter G1 7 Program activation is set to option PUMP 10 20 1 Pumps Program General Description The objective of this functionality is to achieve a comprehensive control of the pumping systems using variable speed drives of SDRIVE 700 series using in that cases the minimum peripherical devices as possible The program comprises all that options which allows controlling the process correctly avoiding the use of those external auxiliary devices such as timers relays PLC etc This program has been thought to control the drive and additionally to control up to 5 au
64. The Jockey pump is running PRIM Priming pump is connected FINP Fault occurred because the pressure switch is open Additionally the reference in PID mode as followed by feedback as is shown The status of the three first fixed pumps is shown according to the next information Status Description 0 Pump in a fault status input which controls the signal is active Note See digital configuration in Pump Control mode G1 7 and G4 1 4 parameters are linked to this shows the status for the two last pumps according to the above mentioned information Engineering It shows the present value read by the analogue input or by pulse input where sensor is Flow 0 01 5 units connected VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP GO 43 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Screen Units Description In the visualization lines of the display it is possible to select this option In this way the following messages are going to be shown according to the current program status Status Drive is regulating in PID mode The drive is at protected manual mode Drive is in manual mode not protective mode HI PRESSURE PAUS Drive 5 stopped pause due to high pressure according to the read data in the analogue input A fault due to high pressure has occurred according to the read data in the analogue input or in the digital input NO FLOW PAUSE The drive has stopped Pa
65. To remove this fixed pump configuration and release the relay for another different use it is necessary to o To disable the control of the pump in the corresponding parameter G25 9 1 G25 9 2 G25 9 3 G25 9 4 and G25 9 5 respectively 10 20 6 Outputs Configuration Regarding to the outputs it is useful to take into account some considerations which will help for a correct configuration of the system Digital outputs There are some configuration options for the outputs that are only available if the pump program is operative but they cannot be used in the standard program 28 gt PUMP CNTRL 29 gt JOCKEY PUMP and 30 gt PRIMING PUMP The needed information has been detailed in the corresponding group G8 1 Digital Outputs Analogue outputs The options available in the standard program can also be used for the pump program and additionally the option 20 CURRENT FLOW that can be configured to provide the read flow at any of the analogue output formats o Example 1 for configuring the analogue output as read flow In case the flowmeter data configured in G4 4 are Units litres Pulses second 100l s Maximum Range 1000 litres Analogue output setting Format 0 10V Minimum Range 0 Maximum Range 100 For a read flow of 500 litres the analogue output will be Readvalue 10V 500 10 MaximumRange 1000 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING 5 187 80 700
66. a pre defined zero area for controls by analogue inputs especially for speed control It eliminates small errors in the reference voltage near to zero reference point The function of zero band filter is not applied to the reference signals through digital inputs since these settings are absolute zero SPEED 5429 gt Speed for Ihe maximum range of analogue input 1 Pei 64 38 Speed for the maximum range of analogue input 2 4 28 gt Speed for the minimum range of analogue input 1 10 INPUTS 2003 54 28 gt Speed for the minimum range of analogue input 2 G4 280rG438 f SD7OITCCODOSA I Figure 10 21 Analogue input of reference with zero band filter DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 4 3 Subgroup 4 3 54 3 Analogue Input 2 54 31 TO ENABLE SENSOR OF ANALOGUE INPUT 2 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 1 SENSOR 2 N It enables the sensor of the Analogue Input 2 N Y See Function for additional information N NO It allows user to use the Analogue Input 2 and to access to the needed parameters for configuring the sensor See G4 3 2 gt Selection of sensor 2 units up to G4 3 7 Maximum range of sensor 2 N 3 NO The analogue input will remain scaled in default units 96 Y YES The analogue input and any variables relating to the analogue input will be configured the engineering units
67. allows starting when closed and stopping when open 2 wires start stop NO 06 gt START RST STOP allows starting when closed and stopping when open 2 wires start stop Activation of this input also acts as a fault reset NO 07 RESET Reset signal by push button NC DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 08 gt START INCH1 Start command and inch speed 1 programmed in G15 1 gt Inch speed 1 taken as reference NO 09 gt START INCH2 Start command and inch speed 2 programmed G15 2 5 Inch speed 2 taken as reference NO Note If two inputs configured with options 08 gt START INCH and 09 START INCH2 are activated simultaneously combination of Start Inch speed 3 is obtained Inch speed 3 is programmed in parameter G15 3 Inch speed 3 10 gt INV SPEED causes a deceleration of the motor until motor is stopped and inverts the rotation direction NO Note Rotation inversion must be enabled in parameter G10 9 gt To enable speed inversion 11 RESERVE Reserved for future use 12 9 RESERVE Reserved for future use 13 3 INV INCHS It inverts the inch speed reference set in G15 1 gt Inch speed 1 G15 2 gt Inch speed 2 G15 3 gt Inch speed 3 NO Note Rotation inversion must be enabled in parameter G10 9 gt To enable speed inversion 14 ACC DEC 2
68. by acting over motor deceleration 170 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 18 Group 19 G19 Fine Tuning 10 18 1 Subgroup 19 1 19 1 IGBT Control G19 1 1 SELECTION OF CONTROL TYPE Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 1 TYPE CRTL V Hz Selection of control type V Hz PEVE See Function for additional information OFF NO It allows selecting the drive control type Configuration options are V Hz Scalar control mode Drive carries out the control by applying a voltage frequency ramp to the motor PEVE Compensation of stator voltage drop Torque delivery is improved at specific moments when motor overload is present G19 1 2 COMMUTATION FREQUENCY Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 2 FRQ 4000 Commutation frequency 4000 8000Hz 4000 2 YES allows modifying the commutation frequency of the output stage to the motor This allows reducing the noise of the own motor G19 1 3 PEWAVE CONTROL Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 3 PEWAVE Y Pewave control N Y See Function for additional information Y YES It allows user to select Pewave control This control mode improves motor noise tone N gt NO Pewave control deactivated Y YES Pewave control activated Commutation frequency G19 1 2 is slightly modified
69. different ramps previously set ramps 1 and 2 of reference decrease The ramp change is set in parameter G5 11 gt Speed for ramp change with motorized potentiometer If G5 11 is set to OFF any ramp change will not be done In this case the drive will search the reference speed by only applying the ramp 1 for reference decrease of motorized potentiometer set in this parameter Setting is realized in deceleration units decrease in 96 of speed per second See figure 10 24 G5 9 RAMP 2 OF REFERENCE INCREASE FOR MOTORIZED POTENTIOMETER Screen 9 MPT INC2 1 0 s Extended info Description Ramp 2 of reference increase for motorized potentiometer function Range 0 01 650 s Default value 1 0 s Set on run YES Function allows setting the ramp 2 of reference increase for motorized potentiometer function This function is configured in G4 1 4 gt Selection of digital inputs configuration with the option 4 MOTORIZED or 5 gt ERASAB POT Additionally it is necessary to set G3 1 gt Reference source 1 of speed G3 2 gt Reference source 2 of speed with the option PMOT depending on the selected source is 1 or 2 With this function user can introduce the speed reference by means of two push buttons connected to the digital inputs DI5 up or increase the speed reference and DI6 down or decrease the speed reference While we press Up push button we can increase the speed by a
70. elapsed If parameter G5 5 Speed for acceleration ramp change is set to a specific value drive will search the reference speed by following the acceleration pattern set in parameter G5 1 gt Acceleration ramp 1 and once reached the change speed drive will continue the search of the reference speed by applying the alternative acceleration pattern set in this parameter See parameter G5 1 gt Acceleration ramp 1 for additional information See figures 10 22 and 10 23 G5 4 DECELERATION RAMP 2 Screen 4 DECEL2 1 0 s Extended info SECOND DECELE Description Deceleration ramp 2 Range 0 01 650 s Default value 1 0 s Set on run YES Function It allows user to set the alternative deceleration ramp according to the requirements of each process The setting is in deceleration units decrease in of speed per second For example an alternative deceleration ramp of 10 s means that the drive decreases 15 speed by 10 of motor rated speed per each second elapsed If parameter 35 6 gt Speed for deceleration ramp change is set to a specific value drive will search the reference speed by following the deceleration pattern set in parameter 05 2 3 Deceleration ramp 1 and once reached the change speed drive will continue the search of the reference speed by applying the alternative deceleration set in this parameter See parameter G5 2 gt Deceleration ramp 2 for additional information See figures 10
71. elapses before this minimum time the drive will wait for this minimum time is elapsed to start If the minimum time elapses before the start delay time the drive will wait for the start delay time is elapsed to start In short the drive will wait for the time set in this parameter at least before starting 108 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 SPEED RUN COMMAND STOP i t ti amp amp ti COMMAND s E ce ti tb b tl G7 6 gt Start delay time 7 9 gt Delay time between stop and next start SD70ITCCOOS3BI Figure 10 28 Drive starting and stopping according to the parameters G7 6 and G7 9 G7 10 RUN AFTER OCCURING POWER LOSS Screen 10 RUN AFTR VFL Y Description Run after occurring power loss Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value Y Set on run YES Function It allows setting the equipment to start automatically when input power is lost and restored immediately power supply loss or instant power supply loss Configuration options N 3 NO Drive will not start after recovering input power even if the start command is activated User must deactivated the start command and activate again See figure 10 29 Y YES Drive will start automatically when input power is restored after power loss occurring whenever the start command follows activated See figure 10 30 Note If Start Stop control is realized from the key
72. equipment is lower than the value set in G11 4 gt Low input voltage level during the time adjusted in this parameter Protection from low input voltage is a combination of parameter G11 4 Low input voltage level and this one HIGH INPUT VOLTAGE LEVEL 6 HIGH VOLT 440V HI INPUT VOLTAGE Maximum level of input voltage 418 550V 440V YES It allows setting a maximum level of input voltage Drive will trip it turns off the output to the motor because of fault F13 HI V IN when average voltage measured at the input of the equipment is higher than the value set in this parameter during the time adjusted in G11 7 gt Trip time because of high input voltage Protection from high input voltage is a combination of this parameter G11 7 gt Trip time because of high input voltage In case of the drive is powered with an input voltage of 690V the default value of this parameter will be 740V and the range will be 726 759V DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G11 7 TRIP TIME BECAUSE OF HIGH INPUT VOLTAGE Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 7 HI V TO 5s HI INP VOL TIMEO Trip time because of high input voltage 0 0 60s OFF 60 1 55 YES lt allows setting a time once elapsed it a trip because of high input voltage will be generated Drive will trip it turns off the output to the motor bec
73. in sleep mode It operates when the drive speed is below the speed set in G25 6 17 Minimum stop speed by No Flow detection above which No Flow input only can operate as protection PAUSE FAULT Options N 3 NO No Flow input disabled Y gt YES No Flow input enabled When this input is activated and after delay time set G25 4 1 Delay time before activating sleep mode has elapsed the drive goes in sleep mode See figure 10 49 G25 4 11 FLOW LEVEL TO SLEEP THE DRIVE Screen 11 Fsi L 0 01 s Extended info FLOW SLEEP LEVEL Description Flow level to sleep the drive Range OFF 0 0 a 3276uds Default value 0 01 5 Set run YES Function allows setting the flow level to activate the sleep mode The flow will be monitored and when it is below the level set in this parameter delay time to activate sleep mode will start elapsing Once elapsed this delay time the drive will go in sleep mode So it allows setting the value of the flow read through pulse input or analogue input below which a situation of no demand will be detected This situation will send the drive to sleep When this parameter is set to OFF it will be disabled The source of flow reading is set in parameter G25 10 1 gt Flow reading source See figure 10 49 G25 4 12 OUTPUT CURRENT LEVEL TO SLEEP THE DRIVE Screen 12 SLEEP xxxA Extended info CURR SLEEP LEVEL Description Level of output current
74. input by configuring a digital input with options 02 gt STOP1 or 04 STOP1 RESET for stop mode 1 or with options 19 gt STOP 2 or 03 gt STOP2 RESET for stop mode 2 in parameter G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration or by configuring the output function of one of the comparators options 02 gt STOP 1 and 03 gt STOP 2 in parameter G9 1 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 1 G9 2 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 2 or G9 3 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 3 or automatically by setting a changing speed G7 3 gt Changing speed for stop mode See figures 10 25 and 10 27 G7 2 STOP MODE 2 Screen 2 STOP 2 SPIN Description Stop mode 2 Range RAMP SPIN Default value SPIN Set on run YES DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 101 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Function allows selecting the alternative stop mode of drive The selected option must be the appropriate one for each application See parameter G7 1 gt Stop mode 1 to obtain information about selection options Note Stop mode 1 or 2 parameter G7 2 can be selected through a digital input by configuring a digital input with options 02 gt STOP1 or 04 gt STOP1 RESET for stop mode 1 or with options 19 gt STOP 2 or 03 gt STOP2 RESET for stop mode 2 in pa
75. input voltage and input fuses F37 PHSE L3 LOSS Input phase L3 5 not connected correctly or there is no voltage in it External trip device has operated Check the external trip switch if exists F40 EXT Check motor temperature reset the fault the motor must be return to cooling capacity at operating a normal temperature Fault in sensor connection Check sensor wiring F41 COMMS TRIP Trip generated by a computer through serial Disconnect the 50700 from the communication communication network and verify if the fault is generated again Analogue input cable has been come loose or Verify the wiring and the device which provides the F42 AIN1 LOSS disconnected terminals 10 and 11 analogue signal F43 FABAINZLOSS Analogue input cable has been come loose or Verify the wiring and the device which provides the 055 Analogue inp 712 13 analogue signal F44 CAL FLT 50700 fault Verify drive select Request technical assistance Deceleration ramps parameters 55 2 1 Verify that the time set in parameter G11 2 STOP G5 4 DECEL2 are too slow h f SD700 is NM 7 limiting voltage due to to stop the system after setting deceleration from the motor F46 EEPROM FLT Integrated circuit fault Request technical assistance F45 STOP T O ramps and checking the system performance 240 FAULT MESSAGES DESCRIPTI
76. inputs 1 and 2 20 Reserved Reserved for future use 21 gt MAX SCALE We will get a maximum value forcing the comparator in order to obtain the needed status always activated or deactivated 22 ABSOLUT SPEED Comparison signal is motor speed without sign absolute value G9 1 2 TYPE SELECTION FOR COMPARATOR 1 Screen 2 COMP 1 0 Description Selection of comparator 1 type Range 0 1 See Function for additional information Default value 0 Set on run YES Function It allows selecting the operation mode of the comparator 1 Operation modes are 03 Normal Comparator 1 will be activated when the ON condition is given setting realized in G9 1 3 gt Activation value of comparator 1 in normal mode and will be deactivated when the OFF condition is given setting realized in G9 1 7 gt Deactivation value of comparator 1 in normal mode 1 gt Window Comparator 1 will be activated when signal is within the limit 1 setting realized in G9 1 5 gt Limit 1 for comparator 1 in window mode and limit 2 setting realized in G9 1 4 gt Limit 2 for comparator 1 in window mode and additionally limit 2 is higher than limit 1 If limit 2 is lower than limit 1 logical function of comparator output will be inverted In the following figure we can observe easily the behaviour of the comparator output for each operation mode 128 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIV
77. is set to window mode parameter G9 1 2 gt Type selection for comparator 1 set 1 Window G9 1 6 ON DELAY TIME FOR COMPARATOR 1 Screen 6 T C1 ON 0 0s Extended info C1 ACTIVAT DELAY Description ON delay time to activate comparator 1 Range 0 0 999s Default value 0 0s Set on run YES Function It allows setting a timer to activate the output of the comparator 1 When the activation condition of the output signal of comparator 1 is given in normal or window mode the timer delays the activation of this signal for the time set in this parameter If after the ON condition is given this one disappears before elapsing ON delay time the output of the comparator will be not activated See figures 10 38 10 39 and 10 40 130 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G9 1 7 DEACTIVATION VALUE OF COMPARATOR 1 IN NORMAL MODE Screen 7 SP C1 OF 0 Extended info C1 DEACTIV LEVEL Description Deactivation value of comparator 1 in normal mode Range 250 to 250 Default value 0 Set on run YES Function It allows setting the deactivation value of the comparator 1 output Output of comparator 1 will be deactivated when source signal of comparator 1 selected in G9 1 1 is lower than the value set in this parameter and additionally OFF delay time set in G9 1 8 has elapsed If after the OFF condition is given this one disappears before elapsing OFF delay time the output o
78. occurred Increase the derivation time parameter G6 5 until achieving a small impulse without occurring oscillation Usually derivation time does not exceed 25 of integration time G6 1 SOURCE SELECTION FOR INTRODUCING REFERENCE SIGNAL Screen 1 SEL REF MREF Description Selection of introduction source for PID regulator setpoint Range NONE Alt Al2 RESERV MREF LOCAL locPID See Function for additional information Default value MREF Set on run NO Function allows user to select the source for introducing the setpoint of PID regulator Selection options NONE Source disabled Alt Setpoint of PID regulator is introduced by Analogue Input 1 Al2 Setpoint of PID regulator is introduced by Analogue Input 2 RESERV Reserved for future use MREF Setpoint of PID regulator is introduced by means of digital inputs configured as multi references see parameter G4 1 4 gt Selection of digital inputs configuration and G3 1 gt Reference source 1 of speed or G3 2 Reference source 2 of speed LOCAL gt Setpoint of PID regulator is introduced by keypad Value adjusted in G3 3 gt Local speed reference locPID Setpoint of PID regulator is introduced by keypad Value adjusted in G6 2 PID local reference It allows having two speed references set from keypad since G3 3 gt Local speed reference is not modified when this parameter is adjusted DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMIN
79. of the selectable configuration modes assign specific functions to some digital inputs together except for the option 1 ALL PROGRAMMABLE that allows us to configure them individually Description of the configuration modes 0 gt 3 WIRES It allows controlling the functions of Start Stop and Reset through the terminals of multi function digital inputs Digital inputs will be configured like this 01 gt START DI2 04 gt STOP1 RESET NC DI3 03 gt STOP2 RESET NC 15 REFERENCE 2 NO DI5 10 gt INV SPEED NC DI6 17 CONTROL 2 NO Push buttons are connected to the terminals of the digital inputs 1 2 and 3 In this mode all of the digital inputs are used therefore we cannot add other functionality to this configuration 13 ALL PROGRAMMABLE It allows user to configure each digital input individually The functions assignment to the inputs is realized in parameters G4 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration 72 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 2 MREF 2 WIRES Two of the six digital inputs DI5 and DI6 are configured to select the settings of multiple references getting up to 4 references set before These ones can be speed references or PID references See group G14 MULTI REFERENCES The four remaining inputs DI1 to DI4 can be programmed individua
80. on a random basis to improve the noise tone generated by the motor DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 171 80 700 POWERELECTRONICS 10 18 2 Subgroup 19 2 519 2 Motor Load G19 2 1 MINIMUM FLUX Screen 1 MIN FLUX 100 Extended info Description Minimum flux level Range 40 150 Default value 100 Set on run NO Function allows setting the minimum flux level used by the motor during low load conditions With this dynamic system of flux optimization noise and power losses are reduced thanks to the automatic adaptation of the flux level during low load conditions It is used in applications where load changes slowly pumps fans In these applications the minimum value is introduced The more dynamic is the system behaviour the more you must increase the minimum flux level In applications that require dynamic behaviour for example servos and cranes you must set this parameter to default value 100 Note If too low value is used can produce instability and current peaks To avoid this increase this parameter value The algorithm is disabled when this parameter is set to 100 G19 2 2 INITIAL VOLTAGE Screen 2 V BOOST 0 0 Extended info BOOST VOLTAGE Description Initial voltage Range 0 0 100 Default value 0 0 Set on run YES Function allows setting the initial voltage level to apply to the motor at the moment of starting Using this function it is po
81. or by configuring the output function of one of the comparators options 02 gt STOP 1 and 03 gt STOP 2 in parameter G9 1 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 1 G9 2 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 2 or G9 3 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 3 or automatically by setting a changing speed G7 3 gt Changing speed for stop mode DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 103 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G7 4 START MODE Screen 4 START RAMP Description Start mode definition Range RAMP SPIN See Function for additional information Default value RAMP Set on run YES Function It allows selecting the main start mode of the motor Selection options RAMP Drive will start by applying a frequency ramp to the motor until reaching the speed or setpoint value See figures 10 26 and 10 27 SPIN In this mode drive searches the motor shaft speed and the output frequency of the drive is set to match with the actual motor speed From this point the motor is accelerated up to the reference speed This allows starting loads that are already rotating without braking the motor when the drive receives a start command by accelerating progressively up to reference speed See figure 10 26 If starting a load that are already rotating is required for example a fan in a conventional way several problems can appear due to the motor power supply sta
82. ov G8 2 2 10 SD7OITCCOO13AI Figure 10 34 Example 2 Analogue Output 1 with format 10V 124 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Example 3 We want to configure Analogue Output 2 as 4 to 20mA output This analogue value represents the current of the motor the rated current of which is 20A with a consumption range from OA to 50A Set mode of Analogue Output 2 in G8 2 6 to 02 gt CURRENT MOTOR motor current Select format for Analogue Output 2 in G8 2 7 to 4 20mA Set minimum and maximum values high range and low range of the Analogue Output 2 scale in parameters G8 2 8 for low range and G8 2 9 for high range G8 2 8 gt 0 G8 2 9 gt 250 since 50A is 250 of motor rated current 20A Taar Laan Motor current Tinto Rngmax Rngmin Where Maximum current of Analogue Output 2 m Minimum current of Analogue Output 2 Hngmax Maximum current of the motor Rngmin Minimum current of the motor lint o Output current when motor current is OA Replacing the values 20 4 20 4 4 2 10 4mA 50 0 With this setting Analogue Output 2 will supply 10 4mA when motor current is 20 G8 2 8 G8 2 9 0 20A 2509 GB 2 7 gt Format selection for analogue output 2 OA 12 5 25 37 5 50 68 2 8 3 Low range selection of analogue output 2 n GB 2 9 High range selection of analogue outp
83. reference of the pump will start decreasing using the ramp set G25 10 5 gt Deceleration ramp during algorithm The speed reference will decrease until the present flow is lower than the value set in this parameter minus the margin set in G25 10 3 G25 10 2 G25 10 3 In this moment the speed will remain constant until the present flow is lower than the flow set in G25 10 4 gt Flow percentage to reset algorithm From this moment on the PID regulator will take up the control again and the drive will start to regulate normally Default units of measurement which are displayed depend on the selected engineering units See parameters G4 2 2 gt Selection of sensor 1 units and G4 3 2 Selection of sensor 2 units DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 2393 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 10 3 OFFSET PERCENTAGE OVER MAXIMUM FLOW Screen 3 OFFSET 0 Extended info Description Offset percentage over maximum flow Range 0 to 250 Default value 0 Set run YES Function It allows setting the offset margin over the maximum allowed flow to activate the flow limitation algorithm It is set in of the value set in parameter G25 10 2 gt Maximum allowed flow G25 10 4 FLOW PERCENTAGE TO RESET ALGORITHM Screen 4 FLO RES 100 Extended info FLOW RESET LEVEL Description Flow percentage to reset algorithm Range 0 0 to 100 Default value 100 Set on run YES Function al
84. setpoint 8 for PID 0 3276 Engineering Units 0 0Bar YES It allows setting the value of the local setpoint 8 for PID It is possible to operate with the following units 96 1 5 m s l min m3 min m3 h m s m min m h Bar kPa Psi m C F K It depends on the units of the sensor used See Function in parameter G25 1 5 Local setpoint 1 for PID for additional information G25 1 13 TIME FOR AUTOMATIC STOP Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 13 T AUtOFF OFF AUTO OFF DELAY Setting of a time for automatic stop OFF 0 1 99 91 OFF YES allows setting a time after elapsing it the drive will stop automatically Once this time is set this one starts elapsing immediately At the moment of drive is stopped once elapsed the time for automatic stop parameter value become OFF and the status of pump program will change to COMPLETED If you want to the drive to stop automatically again you must adjust the stop time again There are two visualization parameters related to this parameter SV5 22 T AutoOFF OFF it is directly parameter G25 1 13 translated to the visualization group SV5 SV5 23 gt TIME OFF OFF that shows the remaining time in minutes for automatic stop of the system DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 193 SDRIVE 700 10 20 8 POWER ELECTRONICS Subgroup 25 2 25 2 PID Setting G25 2 1 PI
85. setting the value of the local setpoint 3 for PID It is possible to operate with the following units 96 1 5 m s l min m3 min m3 h m s m min m h Bar kPa Psi m C F K It depends on the units of the sensor used See Function in parameter G25 1 5 gt Local setpoint 1 for PID for additional information DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 191 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 1 8 LOCAL SETPOINT 4 FOR PID Screen 8 SETPT4 0 0Bar Extended info Description Local setpoint 4 for PID Range 0 3276 Engineering Units Default value 0 Set run YES Function allows setting the value of the local setpoint 4 for PID It is possible to operate with the following units 96 1 5 m s l min m min 1 m3 h m s m min m h Bar kPa Psi m C F K It depends on the units of the sensor used See Function in parameter G25 1 5 gt Local setpoint 1 for PID for additional information G25 1 9 LOCAL SETPOINT 5 FOR PID Screen 9 SETPT5 0 0Bar Extended info LOCAL SETPOINT 5 Description Local setpoint 5 for PID Range 0 3276 Engineering Units Default value 0 0 Set on run YES Function allows setting the value of the local setpoint 5 for PID It is possible to operate with the following units 96 1 5 m s l min m3 min m3 h m s m min m h Bar kPa Psi m C F K It depends on the units of the sensor used See Function
86. the orders that drive it Start Stop Reset The configuration options of the alternative control mode are the same than the main control mode therefore see Function in parameter G4 1 1 gt Main control mode to obtain additional information Control mode 2 alternative will be activated through digital inputs For that one of them should be configured parameters G4 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration with the option 17 9 CONTROL 2 When the input configured for that is activated the alternative control mode will be activated disabling the main control mode DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 71 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G4 1 3 RESET FROM KEYPAD Screen 3 RESET MODE Y Description Reset from keypad Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value Set on run YES Function It enables or disables the possibility of resetting a fault from the keypad unit LOCAL Options N 3 NO Reset from keypad unit is not possible Y YES It is possible to reset the equipment by reset key from the keypad unit G4 1 4 SELECTION OF DIGITAL INPUTS CONFIGURATION Screen 4 DIGIT I MODE 1 Description Selection of digital inputs configuration Range 0 5 See Function for additional information Default value 1 Set on run NO Function It determines the configuration mode of digital inputs All
87. the drive at manual speed Set the drive speed to the minimum functional speed minimum flow in case of pumps or to the minimum operation level of your application Make a note of the output current and the motor speed Set the cavitation speed to the speed that you have made a note before Set the cavitation current to 696 less than the current that you have made a note before Set the desired activation time for example 10s Check the system and if it is necessary set the parameters for an optimum response again G25 6 3 RESPONSE FROM CAVITATION Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 3 CAV MODE FAULT Response of the drive from cavitation situation PAUSE FAULT See Function for additional information FAULT YES It allows selecting the response of the drive from cavitation situation PAUSE It will generate that the drive stops and next fixed pumps CAVITATION PAUSE will be displayed Once elapsed the delay time after pause the drive will start FAULT It will generate a fault and next fixed pumps will be stopped In this case the visualization will be F68 CAVIT UNDERL DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 217 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 6 4 CAVITATION CURRENT Screen 4 CAV CURR 0 0A Extended info CAVITATION CURRE Description Cavitation current Range 0 2 to 1 50 In Default value Value that depends on the drive capaci
88. the drive will start when Start Inch speed 1 command is received This is also valid for Inch speed 2 and 3 50700 is working according to inch speed 2 command Start Inch speed 2 Inch speed 2 mode is active 50700 is working according to inch speed 3 command Start Inch speed 3 Inch speed 3 22 mode is active 0 2 Listof Warning Messages Description MOL Motor overload is produced when the present current is higher than the motor rated current Motor current is higher than the rated current value This message will appear if the output current is higher than 125 of the nominal current Current limitation Current limit algorithm has been activated Torque limitation Torque limit algorithm has been activated T A high DC Link voltage level has been detected and the voltage limit control VLT Voltage limitation algorithm has been activated to protect the drive Asymmetric current Asymmetry in output currents of the drive has been detected DOC Drive over current Output voltage imbalance Asymmetry in output voltage of the drive has been detected Input voltage imbalance Asymmetry in input voltage of the drive has been detected Input voltage of the equipment is reaching a dangerous level The value is above the set value protections settings UNV Low input voltage Input voltage of the equipment 15 reaching a dangerous level The value is below the set value protections settin
89. this control mode display shows OVERRIDE MANUAL With this option it is necessary to operate from the keypad but the speed reference can be introduced by using an analogue input or by keypad 13 PUMP The drive will start in pump control mode Selection of automatic operation in regulation mode it allows to control flow pressure G25 1 2 SOURCE SELECTION FOR SPEED REFERENCE IN MANUAL MODE Screen 2 MAN SPD REF LOCAL Description Selection of the source for the main speed reference in manual mode Range LOCAL Alt Al2 See Function for additional information Default value LOCAL Set on run NO Function It allows selecting the source for the speed reference when manual mode is activated by means of the activation of one digital input configured as MANUAL PROTECTED or as OVERRIDE MANUAL parameters G4 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration option 57 MAN PROTstart and 67 OVR STAR respectively Configuration options are the following ones LOCAL Speed reference is introduced from keypad Alt Speed reference is introduced by means of Analogue Output 1 Al2 Speed reference is introduced by means of Analogue Output 2 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 189 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 1 3 VALUE OF SPEED REFERENCE FOR LOCAL SOURCE IN MANUAL MODE Screen 3 MAN SPEED 0 0 Extended info Description V
90. this parameter is set to OFF stop mode change will not be realized See figures 10 25 and 10 27 Note This parameter has only effect when stop mode 1 or 2 depending on the mode selection is set to RAMP 102 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS VOLTAGE VOLTAGE APPLIED AT REF SPEED G7 1 RAMP Voltage applied at speed of G7 3 672 lt 0 th t MOTOR amp SPEED REFERENCE a a S wm men SPEED 67 1 RAMP G7 2 SPIN IAE 2 N 4 0 l 2 SDRIVE 700 671 gt Stop mode 1 G7 2 gt Stop mode 2 57 3 gt Changing speed for stop mode The grade depends on the load since the motor stops by inertia The grade is more extended when the load is lower The grade is less extended when the load is higher TIME 7 008 Figure 10 25 Change from stop mode by RAMP to stop mode by SPIN Note Stop mode 1 or 2 parameter G7 2 can be selected through a digital input by configuring a digital input with options 02 gt STOP1 or 04 STOP1 RESET for stop mode 1 or with options 19 gt STOP 2 or 03 gt STOP2 RESET for stop mode 2 in parameter G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration
91. to 250 40 0 YES allows setting the value of the sleep speed 6 below which the drive will go to sleep whenever local setpoint 6 is selected It is set in of motor speed See figure 10 49 G25 4 8 SLEEP SPEED FOR LOCAL SETPOINT 7 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 8 SLPsp7 40 0 Sleep speed assigned to local setpoint 7 0 0 to 250 40 0 YES It allows setting the value of the sleep speed 7 below which the drive will go to sleep whenever local setpoint 7 is selected It is set in of motor speed See figure 10 49 G25 4 9 SLEEP SPEED FOR LOCAL SETPOINT 8 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 9 SLPsp8 40 0 DRV SLEEP SPEED8 Sleep speed assigned to local setpoint 8 0 0 to 250 40 0 YES allows setting the value of the sleep speed 8 below which the drive will go to sleep whenever local setpoint 8 is selected It is set in of motor speed See figure 10 49 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS SDRIVE 700 205 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 4 10 TO ENABLE NO FLOW INPUT TO SLEEP THE DRIVE Screen 10 FLsw ENA N Description To enable the No Flow input to sleep the drive Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run YES Function It allows enabling or disabling the No Flow input with the purpose that the drive goes
92. to sleep the drive Range OFF 0 a 1229A Default value Set on run YES 206 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function It allows setting the output current level to activate the sleep mode Output current will be monitored and when it is below the level set in this parameter delay time to activate sleep mode will start elapsing Once elapsed this delay time the drive will go in sleep mode So it allows setting the output current level below which a situation of no demand will be detected This situation will send the drive to sleep When this parameter is set to OFF it will be disabled See figure 10 49 Note The drive can go to sleep in all of the conditions simultaneously Any fulfilled condition will begin the delay time to activate sleep mode or will keep it active in case of the condition that began it disappears G25 4 13 MAXIMUM PID ERROR TO STOP THE FIXED PUMPS Screen 13 FP erOFF 0 0 Extended info FPUMP STOP ERROR Description Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps Range OFF 0 to 100 Default value 0 0 Set on run Sl Function It allows setting the PID error below which the fixed pumps will be stopped Any error value more negative than the value set in this parameter will stop a fixed pump This one is an optional condition that can be considered or not according to the setting If this parameter is set to 0 0 this condition will not be cons
93. to the Analogue Output 2 At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the drive speed parameter G25 4 19 to G25 4 26 stop speeds assigned to each local setpoint depending on the selected local setpoint and the PID error G25 4 13 gt Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps Note If time is too short overpressure can be generated in the system On the contrary if time is too long under pressure can be generated See figure 10 50 G25 4 19 STOP SPEED 1 FOR ONE FIXED PUMP Screen 19 SPD10f 70 0 Extended info Description Stop speed for one fixed pump associated to the local setpoint 1 Range 0 0 to 250 Default value 70 0 Set on run YES 210 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function It allows setting the speed value below which the drive must remain for stopping a fixed pump whenever the operating setpoint is the local setpoint 1 set in parameter G25 1 5 gt Local setpoint 1 for PID If you want the speed condition is not considered at the moment of stopping fixed pumps you must set this parameter to a value that is always above the drive speed In this way this condition is always fulfilled and therefore it is not already a condition At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the stop delay time for each fixed pump parameter G25 4 14 to G25 4 18 depending on the what fixed
94. units See parameters G4 2 2 gt Selection of sensor 1 units and G4 3 2 Selection of sensor 2 units G25 8 3 COMPENSATION PRESSURE AT THE STARTING OF 3 FIXED PUMPS Screen 3 COMP 3 0 0 Extended info SETPOINT COMPEN3 Description Compensation pressure at the starting of three fixed pumps Range 0 0 3276 Engineering Units Default value 0 0Bar Set on run YES Function It allows compensating the pressure loss in the pipe by increasing the setpoint automatically when three fixed pumps are connected Note Default units of measurement which are displayed depend on the selected engineering units See parameters G4 2 2 gt Selection of sensor 1 units and G4 3 2 gt Selection of sensor 2 units 226 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G25 8 4 COMPENSATION PRESSURE AT THE STARTING OF 4 FIXED PUMPS Screen 4 COMP 4 0 0 Extended info Description Compensation pressure at the starting of four fixed pumps Range 0 0 3276 Engineering Units Default value 0 0Bar Set on run YES Function It allows compensating the pressure loss in the pipe by increasing the setpoint automatically when four fixed pumps are connected Note Default units of measurement which are displayed depend on the selected engineering units See parameters G4 2 2 gt Selection of sensor 1 units and G4 3 2 Selection of sensor 2 units G25 8 5 COMPENSATION PRESSURE AT THE STA
95. xx 1712 1607 786 747 509 460 1602 1208 5 2305 815 340 1667 50707205 172 1667 1132 1097 460 SD7O0DTDOO03CE Figure 5 4 Dimensions of Frame 6 SD7O0DTDOOOACE Figure 5 5 Dimensions of Frame 7 DIMENSIONS 21 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 5 3 Dimensions of Frames 8 and 9 REFERENCE REFERENCE DMMNSONS s50 690v Hi wi w2 1 pe vi ve v4 259 5070840 5 5070550 6 1712 1667 1482 1447 528 460 1619 1209 2475 815 LLSD709255xx xx 5070660 x xx 1712 1667 1482 1447 528 460 1619 1209 2475 815 SD710305xx x SD707506xxxx 1712 1667 2352 747 38 528 460 1619 1209 2475 815 SD711505xx x 5070840 6 1712 1667 2352 747 38 528 460 1619 1209 2475 3 528 6071260 5x x xx 8070950 6x xxx 17 38 5 460 169 1200 MI5 M5 5074405 m ier 2 TT 38 460 1809 1 245 85 SD70DTDOO12BE SD70DTD00013BE Figure 5 7 Dimensions of Frame 9 22 DIMENSIONS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 5 4 Dimensions of Frames 10 and 11 REFERENCE REFERENCE 2 2 550 680 mi wi w2 pz va vs va WEIGHT 5071680 Sx xx 8071140 112 167 302 1007 38 58 40 68 108 ars 85 08 S071
96. 0 Input resistance value in voltage mode 15 20 Input resistance value in current mode is 2500 AM Common for Analogue Input 1 Al2 Voltage or current programmable Analogue Input 2 or mA See description Common for Analogue Input 2 ANALOGUE 14 AO1 Voltage or current programmable Analogue Output 1 V or mA Configurable for 0 10 10Vdc 0 20mA or 4 20mA AO Common for Analogue Output 1 02 Voltage or current programmable Analogue Output 2 V or mA Configurable for 0 10Vdc 10Vdc 0 20mA or 4 20mA AQ2 Common for Analogue Output 2 18 10V POT 10Vdc power supply for analogue inputs Input power for maximum 2 potentiometers R gt 1kQ 19 GND USR Common for analogue inputs OVdc 20 on 16 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS gt gt o TT a TT 0 gt 24 USR User power supply Allows for the supply to an external sensor Maximum 24Vdc 150 21 RS485 A RS485 serial communication interface for Modbus 22 RS485 B RS Common for RS485 RS232 serial communication signals ommon RS232 Rx SERIAL COMMUNICATION 24 RS232 serial communication interface for Modbus 25 RS232 Tx Digital Output 1 Programmable change over relay NO NC Potential free Maximum 250Vac 8A 30Vdc 8A Digital Output 2 Programmable change over relay NO NC Potential free Maximum 250Vac 8
97. 00 69 2 5 5 LIM 1 C2 0 69 2 6 6T C2 0 05 69 27 17 SP C2 0 G9 2 8 8 T C2 OF 0 0s 6G9 2 8 9 SEL FUNT C2 00 59 3 Comparator 3 G9 3 1 1 COMP 3 SEL 00 G9 3 2 2 COMP 3 TYPE 0 G9 3 3 3 SP C3 ON 100 6934 4 2 3 100 G9 3 9 9 SEL FUNT C3 00 G9 2 2 2 COMP 2 TYPE 0 G9 2 3 3 SP C2 100 c3 00 01 lt 5 MOTOR 02 01 MOTOR 32VOLTAGE MOTOR 04 POWER MOTOR 05 TORQUE MOTOR 06 MOTOR 07 MOTOR OS FREQUENCY MOTOR 08 14 VOLTAGE 10 BUS 11 DRIVE TEMP 12 SPEED REF T3 Reserved 14 REFERENCE 15 FEEDBACK 16 PID ERROR 17 ANLG INPUT 1 18 AMLG INPUT 2 19 INPUT 1 2 20 Reserved 21 SCALE 22 5 SPEED 3 0 Normal 1 Window 250 to 250 ZA 250 to 250 2900 to 250 2 0 0 9995 250 to 2509 c 0 0 99995 01 5 STOP 02 5 1 03 5 2 4 RESET Q5 START INCH1 5 INCH OF START INCH3 OB INV SPEED QB8zACC DEC 10 REFERENCE 2 11 SPEED LIMIT 2 250 to 250 250 to 250 250 to 250 0 0 9995 250 to 250 c 0 0 20995 01 5 STOP 02 STOP 1 03 5 2 04 RESET O5 START INCH1 06 5 INCH O7 START INCH3 08 SPEED 9 DEC 2 T REFERENCE 2 11 SPEED LIMIT 2 SD70OITGOO61AI Figure 10 9 Parameters structure fro
98. 10 14 G14 MULTI REFERENCES and figure 10 43 G14 7 MULTI REFERENCE 7 Screen 7 MREF 7 70 0 Extended info Description Multi reference 7 Range 250 to 250 Default value 470 096 Set on run YES Function It allows user to set the value of multi reference 7 This value is set in of motor rated speed For additional information see chapter 10 14 G14 MULTI REFERENCES and figure 10 43 164 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 15 Group 15 G15 Inch Speeds This group of parameters allows setting the value of three possible inch speeds of the motor Inch speed selection can be realized through a comparator output or by means of a digital configured for this purpose one input for inch speed 1 and other one for inch speed 2 For inch speed 3 a combination of two previous inputs is required To select an inch speed through a comparator output you must set the output function of the comparator 1 2 or 3 to option 05 gt START INCH1 06 gt START INCH2 or 07 gt START INCHS for comparator 1 2 or 3 in parameter G9 1 9 G9 2 9 or G9 3 9 respectively In case of selecting an inch speed through digital input you must select option 08 gt START INCH for inch speed 1 or 09 gt START INCH for inch speed 2 in one of the parameters G4 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration Inch sp
99. 184 In case of the pump program is active the drive will function in three different ways depending on the activated protections Faults of the Drive Standard Program Here we can find those trips of the drive or trips of the installation that have been configured in the standard program of the drive In case of any of these conditions occur the motor controlled by the drive will stop followed by the fixed pumps and the display will show the corresponding fault message Pause of the Pumps Program Certain protections can be configured to stop the drive temporary without tripping by fault For all of them there is only one time to start after the pause and this time will start once the cause which provoked the pause disappears The protections which can be set in this way are DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 o High Pressure Configurable at Pause mode or at Fault mode If it is set as Pause the displayed message will be PRESSURE PAUS but if this is set to Fault the message will be F66 PRESSURE o No Flow Configurable at Pause mode or at Fault mode If it is set as Pause the displayed message will be NO PLOW PAUSE but if this is set to Fault the message will be F69 FLOW SWITCH o Cavitation Configurable at Pause mode or at Fault mode If it is set as Pause the displayed message will be CAVITATION PAUSE but if this is set to Fault the message will be
100. 2 67 MAN OVR STAR 69 PRESSUR SWITCH SD70ITGOOS5Al Figure 10 3 Parameters structure of subgroup 54 1 G4 SDRIVE 700 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 47 80 700 ELECTRONICS 164 54 24 4 1 40 oe KIS DII Ee ee ooze 642919 SPD HI1 100 E 0 643 515 Smi2 40 0Bar E 4 2 5 to 3200 Engineer Units G4 3 9 9 SPD HI2 100 G4314 14 AINZ2LOSS N N No Y Yes gt SD70ITGOOS6AI Figure 10 4 Parameters structure from subgroup S4 2 G4 to subgroup 54 3 G4 48 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G5 Accel and Decel Ramps T D TE roan G5 12 12 SP FLT20 250s 0 01 650 sec 0 01 650 sec 0 01 65056 sec 0 01 650 sec G6 PID Control G6 1 1 SEL REF MREF Alt Al2 RESERV MREF LOCAL G6 2 2 PID LOC 100 50 096 to 400 G6 3 3 SEL FBK Al2 G6 4 4 GAIN Kp 8 0 G6 5 5 INTEGRAL 0 0s G6 6 6 DIFFEREN 0 0s G6 7 INVERT PID N c Y Yes SD70ITGOO57AI Figure 10 5 Parameters structure from subgroup S4 4 G4 to group G7 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 49 80 700 ELECTRONICS 87 Start Stop Mode Conf
101. 2 6 ERROR OF PID REGULATOR Screen Description Range Default time Set on run Function 6 PID ERR xx x Error of PID regulator 0 to 100 It displays the difference between the value of PID setpoint source of which is set in G25 2 1 gt PID setpoint source and the value of the feedback signal of the process source of which is set in G25 2 2 PID feedback source in percentage This parameter is read only DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 195 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 2 7 ERROR OF PID REGULATOR IN ENGINEERING UNITS Screen 7 ERR xx xxkPa Description Error of PID regulator in engineering units Range 0 0 to 3276 Engineering Units Default value Set on run Function It displays the difference between the value of PID setpoint source of which is set in G25 2 1 gt PID setpoint source and the value of the feedback signal of the process source of which is set in G25 2 2 PID feedback source in engineering units Bar kPa m3 s etc This parameter is read only G25 2 8 PID OUTPUT INVERSION Screen 8 PID INVERT N Description Inversion of the PID regulator output Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run Sl Function It is possible to get an inverse operation of the drive output in PID mode N 3 NO PID output inversion disabled In this case the PID regulator response if the feedback decreases is an increasin
102. 2 STOP IMEOUT STOPPING OFF 3 GND ILIMIT 10 GND CURR MAX LEV 10 4 LOW VOLT 360V LO INPUT VOLTAGE 360V 5 LOW V TO 5s LO INP VOL TIMEO 55 6 HIGH VOLT 440V HIINPUT VOLTAGE 440V 7 HIV 55 HIINP VOL TIMEO 5 08 8 Dlasy VO 1 0s 1 08 CONFIGURATION REGISTER 259 SDRIVE 700 PARAMETERS 9 LOW V BHV 0 10 PTC EXT N 11 PUMP OV 20 0A UMP OVERLOAD L 12 PMovl FIL OFF PMP OVL FILTER 13 DLY OFF MP OVERLOAD DL lt lt 14 UNDERLOAD N 15ULDCUR A UNDERLOAD CURREN 16 ULD SPD 100 NDERLOAD SPEE 17 ULD DELY 10s NDERLOAD DELA 1 AUTORESET N 2 ATTEMP NUMBR 1 AX ATTEMPT NUM STR DEL 5s ME BEFORE RESE 4RS COUNT 15Min AUTORESET TIMOU 4 5 F1 AUTO RST 0 6 F2 AUTO RST 0 7 F3 AUTO RST 0 8 AUTO RST 0 1 0 NO FAULT LAST FAULT FXX 2 FO NO FAULT FIFTH FAULT FXX 3 F0 NO FAULT OURTH FAULT FX 4 F0 NO FAULT HIRD FAULT FXX 5 FO NO FAULT ECOND FAULT FX 6 FO NO FAULT FIRST FAULT FXX gt lt uo gt lt 7 CLEAR FAULTS N 1 1 10 0 ULTI REFERENCE 2 MREF 2 20 0 ULTI REFERENCE 3 MREF 3 30 0 ULTI REFERENCE 4 4 40 0 ULTI REFERENCE 5 MREF 5 50 0 ULTI REFERENCE A UJ NJ FACTORY SETTINGS SETTING 1 0 N 20 0A OFF OFF _A 100 10s G12 Auto Reset 5s 15min G13 Fault History G14 Multi references 10 0 20 0 30 0 40 0
103. 22 and 10 23 G5 5 SPEED FOR ACCELERATION RAMP CHANGE Screen 5 BRK ACC OFF Extended info BREAKPOINT ACL Description Speed for acceleration ramp change Range OFF 0 to 250 Default value OFF Set on run YES DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 91 SDRIVE 700 92 Function Note POWER ELECTRONICS It allows using the alternative acceleration ramp parameter G5 3 When drive is accelerating and the speed set in this parameter is reached drive will start to apply the alternative acceleration ramp from that moment on If this parameter is set to OFF default value drive will only apply the acceleration ramp 1 parameter G5 1 The alternative acceleration ramp can be selected independently of drive speed This selection can be realized through digital inputs by configuring one of them with the option 14 gt ACC DEC 2 or by using the output functions of comparators for example if the magnitude of the comparator is the drive rated current when the drive output current exceeds a defined level calculated as 96 of In a ramp change occurs See figures 10 22 and 10 23 G5 6 SPEED FOR DECELERATION RAMP CHANGE Screen 6 BRK DEC OFF Extended info BREAKPOINT DCL Description Speed for deceleration ramp change Range OFF 0 to 250 Default value OFF Set on run YES Function It allows using the alternative deceleration ramp parameter G5 4 When the drive is decelerating and the speed set in this paramet
104. 25 4 23 3 Stop speed 5 for one fixed pump 325 4 16 gt Delay time to stop fixed pump 3 325 4 24 gt Stop speed 6 for one fixed pump 25 4 17 gt Delay time to stop fixed pump 4 325 4 25 gt Stop speed 7 for one fixed pump 525 4 18 gt Delay time to stop fixed pump 5 25 4 26 gt Stop speed 8 for one fixed pump 525 4 19 gt Stop speed 1 for one fixed pump 525 5 3 gt Speed bypass at the stopping of fixed pumps 25 4 20 gt Stop speed 2 for fixed pump 325 5 4 gt Time of speed bypass after stopping fixed pumps SD70ITCCOO29BI Figure 10 50 Stopping of the fixed pumps according to the stop speed associated to each local setpoint for PID the PID error and the delay time for each pump 208 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G25 4 14 DELAY TIME TO STOP FIXED PUMP 1 RELAY 1 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 14 FP T1 OF 10s FPUMP1 STP DELAY Delay time to stop the fixed pump 1 Relay 1 0 6000s 10s YES It allows setting the delay time to stop the fixed pump associated to the Relay 1 At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the drive speed parameter G25 4 19 to G25 4 26 stop speeds assigned to each local setpoint depending on the selected local setpoint and the PID error G25 4 13 gt Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps If time is too short over
105. 25 SPD7of 70 0 FPUMP STP SPEED7 70 0 26 SPD80f 70 0 FPUMP STP SPEED8 70 0 27 PIDISL 0 0 PID INVE SLEEP 0 0 28 SLEEP Y Y 264 CONFIGURATION REGISTER POWER ELECTRONICS PARAMETERS 1BY SPon 70 0 YPASS ON SPEED 2 BY T ON 10s YPASS ON DELAY 3 BY SPof 90 0 YPASS OFF SPEED 4 BY T OFF 5s YPASS OFF DELA i lt 1 PAUSE DEL 20s ELAY AFTER PAU wn 2 CAVITATION N 3 CAV MODE FAULT 4CAVCURR A AVITATION CURR 5 CAV SPED 100 AVITATION SPEE 6 CAV DELAY 10s CAVIT FLT DELAY rri 7 ENABLE LO PRE N 9 LO PRE 5 0Bar O PRESSURE LEV 10 Lop DLY 10 0s O PRESS FLT DLY 11 Lop Msp 0 0 O PRESS MIN SPE 12 MODE PAUSE 13 1 100 PRESS LEVE 14 Hipr DLY 0 05 HI PRESS FLT DLY IT r 15 FLO SWm PAUSE 16 NO FLO FILL N 17 NO FLsp 0 0 O FLOW MIN SPE 18 NO FLbyp 0 0s 0 FLO BYPAS DL 19 NO FLdly 0 0s NO FLOW FLT DLY 20 CYCLE 0 YCLE RESET DEL 21 CYCLE CNT 5 AX CYCLES ALLOW lt lt 1 PRESSU 500 2 FILL SP 70 0 PIPE FILLING SPD 3 FILL P 2 0Bar FILL END PRESS 4 FILL TIM 15m PFILL END DELAY D 5 SPT RAMP 1 0Bar 5 FACTORY SETTINGS SETTING 1 G25 Pump Control 5 25 5 Speed Bypass 70 0 10s 90 95 G25 Pump Control 5 25 6 Protection 20s N FAULT __ 100 108 N 5 10 05 0 0 PAUSE 100Bar 0 0s
106. 3 SEE j G5 6 60 heey as ete 55 2 3 Deceleration ramp 1 G5 3 gt Acceleration ramp 2 en 55 4 Deceleration ramp 2 55 5 gt Speed for accel ramp change G5 1 TIME s 70 005 Figure 10 23 Application example of and alternative acceleration deceleration ramps G5 7 RAMP 1 OF REFERENCE INCREASE FOR MOTORIZED POTENTIOMETER Screen 7 MPT INC1 1 0 s Extended info Description Ramp 1 of reference increase for motorized potentiometer function Range 0 01 650 s Default value 1 096 8 Set on run YES Function allows setting the ramp 1 of reference increase for motorized potentiometer function This function is configured in G4 1 4 gt Selection of digital inputs configuration with the option 4 gt MOTORIZED or 5 3 ERASAB POT Additionally it is necessary to set G3 1 gt Reference source 1 of speed G3 2 gt Reference source 2 of speed with the option PMOT depending on the selected source is 1 or 2 With this function user can introduce the speed reference by means of two push buttons connected to the digital inputs DI5 up or increase the speed reference and DI6 down or decrease the speed reference While we press Up push button we can increase the speed by applying up to two different ramps previously set ramps 1 and 2 of reference increase The ramp change is
107. 4 11 42 VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP GO POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 9 6 Parameters SV 8 Pump Control Unis Description R 0 0Bar 0 0 Engineering It shows the PID reference value left hand and the sensor value which is sent by the units feedback signal right hand It shows the drive status during the pump control operation according to the following table Description Status Description REGL Drive is regulating in PID mode PMAN The drive is at protected manual mode OMAN Drive is in manual mode not protective mode Drive is stopped pause due to high pressure according to HIPP the read data in the analogue input HIPR A fault due to high pressure has occurred according to the read data in the analogue input or in the digital input The drive has stopped Pause status due to No Flow FLOD detection NFLO The drive has tripped Fault status due to No Flow detection CAVS The drive has stopped Pause status due to Cavitation The drive has tripped Fault status due to Cavitation LOPR The drive has tripped due to low pressure fault pees digital inputs configured as No Water Man 40 0 40 07 The drive has tripped due to a fault in the irrigation equipment which has been detected in the digital input configured in that option The drive is forcing the speed after starting or stopping some of the fixed pumps function is active stopped JOCK
108. 5 DIMENSIONS 5 1 Dimensions of Frames 3 4 and 5 Eee 380 5004 550 690 wi w2 o2 vi ve vs va eee ee ee ae eee ee IND ee 5070075 Sow 5010062 Goo Nes TS 3005 200 WO 38 TMB 5070090 5x x xx SD70080 6x x xx SD70115 x x fogs tees 5070150 5 SD701056xxxx 1245 1206 320 251 4385 881 5275 3535 100 45070170 Sx xxx 1245 1206 320 1 251 685 2 881 5075 35351 1 10 50702105 SD701306xxxx 1712 1607 431 396 528 460 14035 12405 815 180 50702505 SD701506xxxx 1712 1607 431 396 528 460 14035 12405 815 180 5070275 5 SD701706xxxx 1712 1667 431 396 528 460 14035 12405 815 180 SD7O0DTDOO01CE 50700 00023 Figure 5 2 Dimensions of Frame 4 50700 0002 Figure 5 3 Dimensions of Frame 5 20 DIMENSIONS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 5 2 Dimensions of Frames 6 and 7 REFERENCE REFERENCE 2 2 eee eo en ee 5070330 5 80702106 1712 167 78 MT SS 40 182 1485 2805 85 30 5070370 5xxxx 50702806 172 167 6 MT 99 460 182 1285 2805 15 936 LLSD704605xx xx 5070320 x
109. 5 PID DIFFERENTIAL 0 0s 7 INVERT PID N N 8 ERR PID 0 0 0 0 MEE 7 Start Stop Mode Configuration 15 1 RAMP RAMP 2 STOP 2 SPIN 3 BRK STP 2 OFF STP2 UNDER SPEED OFF 4 START RAMP RAMP 5 START 2 RAMP RAMP 6 START DLY OFF DELAY TO START OFF 7 STOP DLY OFF DELAY TO STOP OFF 8 STP MIN SP N N 9 OFFRet OFF DELAY AFTER STOP OFF 10 RUN AFTR VFL z Y Y 11 SPNstr B OFF SPIN START TUNE OFF G8 Outputs 8 1 Output Relays 1 SEL RELAY 1 02 02 2 T R1 ON 0 0s R1 ACTIVAT DELAY 0 0s 3T R1 OFF 0 0s DEACTIV DELAY 0 0s INVERT R1 N N 5 SEL RELAY 2 03 03 6 T R2 ON 0 0s R2 ACTIVAT DELAY 0 0s 7 T R2 OFF 0 0s R2 DEACTIV DELAY 0 0s 8 INVERT R2 N N 9 SEL RELAY 3 05 05 10 T R3 ON 0 0s R3 ACTIVAT DELAY 0 0s CONFIGURATION REGISTER 257 80 700 ELECTRONICS PARAMETERS FACTORY SETTINGS SETTING 1 SETTING 2 11 T OFF 0 0s R3 DEACTIV DELAY 0 0s 12 INVERT R3 N N G8 Outputs 8 2 Analogue Outputs 1 ANLG OUT 1 01 01 2 FORMT 1 4 20 mA mA 3 MIN1 RNG 0 MIN RANG ANAOUTI 0 4 MAX1 RNG 100 MAX RANG ANAOUT1 100 5 FILTER 1 OFF FILTER ANAOUTPU1 OFF 6 ANLG OUT 2 02 02 7 FORMT 2 4 20 mA 4 20mA 8 MIN2 RNG 0 MIN RANG ANAOUT2 0 9 2 RNG 100 MAX RANG ANAOUT2 100 10 FILTER 2 OFF FILTER ANAOUTPU2 OFF G9 Comparators 59 1 Comparator 1 1 COMP 1SEL 00 00 2 COMP 1 TYPE 0 0 3 SP ON 100 C1 ACTIVAT LEVEL 100 4 LIM 2 C1 100 WINDOW LIMIT2 100
110. 6 Parque Tecnol gico 46980 Paterna Valencia Tel 34 96 136 65 57 Fax 34 96 131 82 01 SPANISH BRANCHES ARAGON Y LA RIOJA CATALUNA CENTRO LEVANTE NORTE SUR CANARIAS C Madre Rafols 2 Edificio Aida 9 Ofic 4 50004 ZARAGOZA Tel 34 976 282 016 Fax 34 976 435 862 Avda de la Ferrer a 86 88 08110 MONTCADA I REIXAC BARCELONA 34 93 575 33 22 Fax 34 93 564 47 52 C Terrasa 13 Bajo 25005 LLEIDA Tel 34 96 136 65 57 Fax 973 725 952 Avda Rey Juan Carlos I 84 2 15 28916 LEGANES MADRID Tel 34 91 688 36 OO Fax 34 91 687 53 84 Leonardo da Vinci 24 26 Parque Tecnol gico Paterna 46980 PATERNA VALENCIA Tel 34 96 136 65 57 Fax 34 96 131 82 O1 Avda Alcora 162 12006 CASTELL N Tel 34 96 136 65 57 Fax 34 96 131 82 01 Pol Residencial Santa Avda Venecia 17 30319 CARTAGENA MURCIA Tel 34 968 53 51 94 Fax 34 968 126 623 Parq Tecnol gico Vizcaya Edificio 103 Planta 1 48170 ZAMUDIO BILBAO Tel 34 96 136 65 57 Fax 34 944 31 79 08 C Averroes 6 Edificio Eurosevilla 41020 SEVILLA Tel 34 95 426 01 43 Fax 34 95 451 57 73 C Valle Incl n 9 35200 TELDE LAS PALMAS Tel 34 96 136 65 57 Fax 34 92 869 29 52 INTERNATIONAL BRANCHES GERMANY KOREA CHINA Power Electronics Deutschland GmbH Conradtystrasse 41 D 902441 N RNBERG Tel 49 911 99 43 99 O Fax 49
111. 6 1 DELAY TIME AFTER PROTECTION PAUSE Screen 1 PAUSE DEL 20s Extended info DELAY AFTER PAUS Description Delay time after protection pause Range 0 999s Default value 20s Set on run YES Function It allows setting a value of delay time before the drive starts after stopping by protection pause This delay time starts elapsing once the cause that produced the pause disappears For example we suppose that a pause had been produced due to an over pressure situation Once the over pressure condition disappears the delay time set in this parameter starts elapsing and when it is elapsed the drive will start again This delay time will be applied to all of the pauses High pressure analogue feedback if option PAUSE is selected in parameter G25 6 12 gt Response from over pressure Cavitation if option PAUSE is selected in parameter G25 6 3 gt Response from cavitation No Flow Switch if option PAUSE is selected in parameter G25 6 15 gt Response from No Flow situation Note In case of Cavitation when the equipment goes into pause the drive is stopped and therefore it is not possible to continue monitoring values Once the cavitation condition disappears the delay time set in this parameter will start elapsing and when this time is elapsed the drive will start again G25 6 2 TO ENABLE CAVITATION PROTECTION Screen 2 CAVITATION N Description To enable pr
112. 800 5xxxx 58071270 1712 1687 2402 100r 38 58 40 68 108205 85 1667 3402 087 8 58 40 68 1200 205 851 0 572200 5 3071500 1712 1667 4452 1447 38 528 460 1619 1209 2475 815 MEME INN 5071800 6 1712 1667 452 1447 38 5 460 189 1209 205 85 SD7O0DTD0014BE Figure 5 8 Dimensions of Frame 10 50700 00015 Figure 5 9 Dimensions of Frame 11 DIMENSIONS 23 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 5 5 Dimensions of Frames 4 and 5 00 DIMENSIONS 2 Oon eee ee Y2 LAE SD7015050x xx 1124 11005 320 285 245 4385 7785 5275 2605 45070170 50 1124 41005 320 285 245 4385 7785 5275 12051 1 394 6070276 50 xxx 1124 396 394 500 50700700016 Figure 5 10 Dimensions of Frame 4 00 5070 00 9 Figure 5 11 Dimensions of Frame 5 00 24 DIMENSIONS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 5 6 Dimensions of Frames 6 and 7 00 2 77 77 00 IMEECHEEINNIHE HEIN HNINNCNNCNEION SD710DTDOO10AE ii gt L LI gt 5 1 Se 50700 00011 Figure 5 13 Dimensions of Frame 7 00 DIMENSIONS 25 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 6 CONNECTION TERMINALS 6 1 Power Connections 6 1 1 Fra
113. A 30Vdc 8A Relay3 C DIGITAL OUTPUTS Digital Output 3 Programmable change over relay NO NC Potential free Maximum 250Vac 8A 30Vdc 8A CONNECTION TERMINALS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 7 DISPLAY UNIT AND CONTROL KEYPAD 7 1 Keypad Unit Description The display of the SD700 is removable for remote installation as the illustration shows There are three leds on the display which indicate the drive operational status one LCD screen with 4 lines of 16 characters each and keys for control and parameter setting STATUS LEDs To show the operation status of the drive LCD DISPLAY With lines of Status 1 358 Visualization and Control of the 304 303 Tosa dri 81 MENU OPTIONS nve CONTROL KEYPAD EGR zm Keys for parameter setting and commisioning of the drive Figure 7 1 Display Unit and Keypad 7 1 1 LEDs for Status Indication Leds offer an easy method of identifying if the SD700 is powered up if the drive is supplying output voltage or if the drive has tripped Led ON Yellow colour When it is lit indicates equipment is powered up Led RUN Green colour When it is lit indicates the motor is powered by the SD700 Led FAULT Red colour When it is blinking indicates the equipment is in fault status soRIVE 1 388 398 33 3 4 MENUORLIGNSSS Figure 7 2 Status Visualization DISPLAY UNIT AND CONTROL KEYPA
114. AC C 56 G20 4 16 16 0578 620 4 17 117 E 90 G20 4 18 18 MAC 171 G25 Pump Control 25 1 Setpoints G25 1 1 1 CONTROL MODE 1 G25 1 2 2 MAN SPD REF LOCAL 325 1 313 MAN SPEED 0 0 G25 1 4 4 ALT MAN 5 R LOCAL 50701 0065 Figure 10 13 Parameters structure from group G20 to subgroup S25 1 G25 SDRIVE 700 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 5 80 700 ELECTRONICS a mom mms om C esmansa 525 2 PID Setting G25 2 1 1 PID SETP LOCAL e OFF 0 1 99 9 G25 2 21 2 PID FBK Al2 G25 2 3 3 PID Ke 1 0 625 241 4 PID 5 05 0 1 1000s Max G25 2 5 5 PID Dt 0 0s 3100 2508 625 2 616 PID ERR x xx G25 2 7 T ERR xx xxkPa 40 010 3276 Engineer Units 625 2 8 18 PID INVERT NzNo S 3i i 625 3 414 FP T1 ON 10s 2 G25 3 6 6 FP ON 10s G25 3 7 17 FP 105 G25 3 8 8 FP T5 ON 10s 525 4 Stop Conditions 325 4 3 13 SLPsp2 40 0 OFF 0 1 9998 40 0 to 250 Yo SD70ITGOO68AI Figure 10 14 Parameters structure from subgroup S25 1 G25 to subgroup S25 4 G25 58 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700
115. AGES DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS 243 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 12 COMMONLY USED CONFIGURATIONS 12 1 Start Stop Commands and Speed Reference by Keypad 12 1 1 Parameters Configuration arameter LANG ENGLISH 1 4 Language selection ENGLISH PROG 5 1 7 Program activation STANDAR G2 Motor Nameplate MTR CURR 00 00A MTR VOLT 400V PWR 00 0kW MTR RPM 1485 Hz Set according to motor nameplate Use the following values as a reference Submersible pumps gt 20 10 7 MTR COOL 40 62 7 Motor cooling at zero speed Self cool molor 40 Force cooled motor gt 100 G3 References 1 5 10 63 1 Speed reference source 1 LOCAL gt Reference will be determined by keypad and 16 set in G3 3 Speed Reference 3 LOCAL SPD 100 1G3 3 LocalSpeed Reference 100 G4 Inputs 4 1 Digital Inputs gt LOCAL Drive control is done by keypad gt YES Enables reset by keypad 12 2 Start Stop Commands by Terminals and Speed Reference by Analogue Input 12 2 1 Parameters Configuration arameter LANG ENGLISH 1 4 Language selection PROG STANDAR 1 7 Program activation 2 1 Motor rated current 2 2 Motor rated voltage ER Hz N UJ MTR PWR 00 0kW 2 3 Motor rated power kW Set according to motor nameplate MTR RPM 1485 2 4 Motor rpm rom Set according to motor nameplate 0 85 2 5
116. CH SPEED 3 Description Inch speed 3 Range 250 to 250 Default value 0 00 Set on run YES Function It allows user to set a value as inch speed 3 For more information see chapter 10 15 G15 INCH SPEEDS and figure 10 44 166 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 16 Group 16 G16 Skip Frequencies G16 1 SKIP FREQUENCY 1 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 1 SKIP 1 0 0 Skip frequency 1 250 to 250 0 0 YES It allows user to set the first skip frequency With this user achieves an operation area not selectable this is where reference speeds cannot be adjusted to avoid resonance frequencies The drive will only take these reference values when is changing speed during acceleration and deceleration but it will not operation at these speed values One this value is set the bandwidth adjusted G16 3 gt Skip bandwidth will be based on it forming a frequency range that the drive will avoid See example and figure 10 45 in parameter G16 3 gt Skip bandwidth G16 2 SKIP FREQUENCY 2 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 2 SKIP 2 0 0 Skip frequency 2 250 to 250 0 0 YES It allows user to set the second skip frequency With this user achieves an operation area not selectable this is where reference speeds cannot be adjusted to avoid resonance f
117. D 35 SDRIVE 700 36 POWER ELECTRONICS 7 12 Alphanumeric LCD Display SD700 display has a LCD screen of four lines with sixteen characters each 16x4 Each line has different functions Status Line It is the top line is always present and shows the 50700 status STR Start STP Stop etc It also shows the output current and the motor speed Status Line Visualization Line It is not configurable by the user Visualization Line Programming Line Visualization Line 1 It is the second LM ACIE line of the screen It is always present arret A and allows the selection of variables from i the visualization menu is configurable by the user Visualization Line 2 It is the third line of the screen It is always present and allows the selection of variables from the visualization menu is configurable by the user Programming Line It is the fourth line 5070 0008 1 It is used to display and or set different parameters within the SD700 Figure 7 3 Detail of Display Lines 7 1 3 Control Keys Function keys have multiple uses and can be operated individually or in combination with other keys D DISPLAY UNIT AND CONTROL KEYPAD It allows access to different parameters groups and sub groups it displays code explanations and allows adjustment of parameter values in combination with other keys If a group has no sub groups it allows direct access to the
118. D SETPOINT SOURCE Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 1 PID SETP LOCAL Selection of the source for PID setpoint LOCAL 12 See Function for additional information LOCAL YES It allows selecting the source to introduce the PID setpoint Selection options LOCAL PID setpoint is introduced from keypad Alt PID setpoint is introduced by means of Analogue Input 1 Al2 PID setpoint is introduced by means of Analogue Input 2 G25 2 2 PID FEEDBACK SOURCE Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 2 PID 12 Selection of the source for PID feedback signal 12 PULSE See Function for additional information Al2 YES lt allows selecting the source to introduce PID feedback signal Selection options Alt Feedback signal is introduced through Analogue Input 1 Al2 Feedback signal is introduced through Analogue Input 2 PULSE Feedback signal is introduced through configurable Multi function Digital Inout programmed for this purpose parameter G4 1 5 to G4 1 10 See Subgroup 54 4 Pulse Input for additional information G25 2 3 PROPORTIONAL GAIN OF PID REGULATOR Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run 3 PID Kc 1 0 PROPORTIONAL PID Proportional gain of PID regulator 0 1 20 1 0 YES 194 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700
119. DRIVE 700 SAFETY Before operating the drive read this manual thoroughly to gain and understanding of the unit If any doubt exists then please contact POWER ELECTRONICS 902 40 20 70 34 96 136 65 57 or your nearest agent Wear safety glasses when operating the drive with power applied and the front cover is removed Handle the drive with care according to its weight Install the drive according to the instructions within this manual Do not place heavy objects on the drive Ensure that the mounting orientation is correct Do not drop the drive or subject it to impact The SDRIVE 700 drives contain static sensitive printed circuits boards Use static safety procedures when handling these boards Avoid installing the drive in conditions that differ from those described in the Technical Characteristics section CONNECTION PRECAUTIONS To ensure correct operation of the drive it is recommended to use a SCREENED CABLE for the control wiring For EMERGENCY STOP make sure supply circuitry is open Do not disconnect motor cables if input power supply remains connected The internal circuits of the SDRIVE 700 series will be damaged if the incoming power is connected and applied to output terminals U V W It is not recommended to use a 3 wire cable for long distances Due to increased leakage capacitance between conductors over current protective feature may not operate correctly Do not use power factor correction capacito
120. Default value Set on run Function UPLOAD N Save parameters from the drive to the display unit N Y N NO When this parameter is set to Y the parameters copy to the display starts automatically saving the drive configuration It exists one sub screen that shows the load process UPLOADING 100 When the load process is finished this sub screen disappears and UPLOAD N is displayed again G1 10 2 SAVE PARAMETERS FROM DISPLAY TO DRIVE Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function DOWNLOAD N Save parameters from the display unit to the drive N Y N NO When this parameter is set to Y the copy of the parameters stored into the display to the drive starts automatically modifying and programming the parameters of this new drive It exists one sub screen that shows he unload process DOWNLOADING 100 When the unload process is finished this sub screen disappears and DOWNLOADEN is displayed again G1 11 DRIVE FAN CONTROL MODE Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 11 FAN CTRL FIXE Control mode of the drive fan FIXE TEMP See Function for additional information FIXE YES It allows selecting the operation mode for drive fans Description of the options FIXE The fans of the drive are connected with the start command and they are disconnected after 3 minutes once the drive is stopped TEMP gt
121. E 254 CONFIGURATION REGISTER POWER ELECTRONICS PARAMETERS 1 MTR CUR 00 00A MOTOR CURRENT 2 MTR VOLT 400V MOTOR VOLTAGE 3 MTR PWR 00 0kW MOTOR POWE 8 4 RPM 1485 MOTOR SPEED rpm 5 MTR PFA 0 85 POWER FACTO 6 MTR FRQ 50Hz MOTOR FREQUENCY 7 MTR COOL 40 MOTOR COOLING 1 REF1SPD LOCAL 2 REF2 SPD LOCAL 3 LOCAL SPD 100 LOCAL SPEED 1 CNTROL MODE1 1 2 CNTROL MODE 2 2 3 RESET MODE Y 4 DIGIT MODE 1 5 DIGITL IN 1 06 6 DIGITL IN 2 00 7 DIGITL IN 3 00 8 DIGITL IN 4 00 9 DIGITL IN 5 00 10 DIGITL IN 6 17 1 SENSOR 1 2 SENSOR 1 1 5 3 FORMAT V 4 INmin1 0V LOW RANGE 5 Smil 0 01 s SENS1 LOW RANGE 6 INmax1 10V 7 5 1 410 01 6 8 SPD LO1 0 SPD LO RNG AIN1 9 SPD 1 100 SPD HIG RNG AIN1 SDRIVE 700 FACTORY SETTINGS SETTING 1 SETTING 2 G2 Motor Nameplate Data 00 00A 400V 00 0kW 1485 0 85 50Hz 40 G3 References LOCAL LOCAL 100 G4 Inputs 54 1 Digital Inputs 1 2 Y 1 06 00 00 00 00 17 G4 Inputs 4 2 Analogue Input 1 N 15 V 0V 40 018 10V 10 0l s 0 100 CONFIGURATION REGISTER 255 SDRIVE 700 PARAMETERS 14 AIN1 LOSS N 15 1_Z BAND OFF AIN1 ZERO BAND 1SENSOR 2 SENSOR 22 2 3 AIN2 4 INmin2 4mA AIN2 LOW RANG 5 Smi2 0 0Bar wn ENS2 LOW RANG 6 INmax2 20mA IN2 HIGH RANGE 7 Sma2 10
122. E SPEED 07 3 RUN COMMAND STOP COMMAND TIME gt gt gt G7 1 gt Stop mode 1 G7 2 gt Stop mode 2 57 3 gt Changing speed for stop mode 27 4 gt Start mode 37 6 gt Start delay time 6 1 and tio ls G7 7 gt Stop delay time 1 1 and t3 t2 G7 9 gt Delay time between stop and next start Ia 7 SD70ITCCOO10BI Figure 10 27 Parameters representation of group G7 G7 8 MINIMUM STOP SPEED Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 8 STP MINSP N Minimum stop speed N Y See Function for additional information N YES allows user the possibility of stopping the motor if the speed reference is below the lower speed limit Options N gt NO If the drive is decelerating motor will reach the minimum speed defined as lower speed limit set in G10 1 gt Minimum speed limit 1 or 10 3 gt Minimum speed limit 2 even if speed reference is below these settings For example if G10 1 gt Minimum speed limit 1 is set to 430 0096 and the speed reference is 20 00 then drive will operate at 30 00 and below that value DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 107 80 700 POWERELECTRONICS Y YES If the drive is decelerating and the reference is below the lower speed limit then drive will stop by spin While reference is below this limit drive will be ready Once reference exceeds the lower speed limit
123. E 700 4 COMPARISON SIGNAL ON Condition OFF Condition COMPARATOR OUTPUT NORMAL MODE WINDOW MODE WINDOW MODE Limit 2 gt Limit 1 Limit 2 lt Limit 1 La COMPAR SIGNAL a COMPAR SIGNAL Lim 2 Lim 1 Lim 1 Lim 2 COMPAR OUTPUT COMPAR OUTPUT ON OFF 0015 Figure 10 37 Operation modes of the comparators G9 1 3 ACTIVATION VALUE OF COMPARATOR 1 INNORMAL MODE Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 3 SP C1 ON 100 C1 ACTIVAT LEVEL Activation value of comparator 1 in normal mode 250 to 250 100 YES It allows setting the activation value of the comparator 1 output Output of comparator 1 will be activated when source signal of comparator 1 selected in G9 1 1 is higher than the value set in this parameter and additionally ON delay time set in G9 1 6 has elapsed If after the ON condition is given this one disappears before elapsing ON delay time the output of the comparator will be not activated See figure 10 38 This parameter is only displayed if comparator 1 is set to normal mode parameter G9 1 2 gt Type selection for comparator 1 set 0 Normal G9 1 4 LIMIT 2 FOR COMPARATOR 1 IN WINDOW MODE Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run 4 LIM 2 C1 100 C1 WINDOW LIMIT2 Limit 2 of the comparator 1 in window mode 250 to 250 100 YES
124. E FOR RELAY 1 Screen 3 T R1 OFF 0 0s Extended info R1 DEACTIV DELAY Description OFF delay time for the Relay 1 Range 0 0 999s Default value 0 0s Set on run YES Function It allows user to set a delay time before deactivating the Relay 1 If during this time the deactivation condition disappears the relay will be not deactivated this is the relay will follow activated 114 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G8 1 4 RELAY 1 INVERSION Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 4 INVERT REL1 N Logic inversion of the Relay 1 N Y See Function for additional information N NO It allows user to invert the logic of the Relay 1 Relay 1 has one normally open contact terminals 26 27 and another normally closed contact terminals 27 28 N 3 NO No inversion Y YES Inversion of relay logical function X2 CONNECTOR Contact RELAY 1 6 NC Contact S NO Contact Common RELAY 2 3 NC Contact 5 NO Contact Common RELAY 3 NC Contact SD70DTCOD008AI Figure 10 31 X2 connector Connections for the outputs relays G8 1 5 SELECTION OF RELAY 2 CONTROL SOURCE Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 5 SEL RELAY 2 03 Selection of the control source for the Relay 2 00 31 03 allows configuring the operation of the Relay 2 See parameter G8 1 1 gt Selection o
125. F RELAY 1 CONTROL SOURCE Screen 1 SEL RELAY 1 02 Description Selection of the control source for the Relay 1 Range 00 31 See Function for additional information Default value 02 Set on run NO Function allows configuring the operation for Relay 1 according to the following options 00 gt ALWAYS OFF Output is not active 01 3 ALWAYS When the drive is powered the output relay is activated 02 FAULTS There is no fault in the drive When a fault occurs the relay will be activated 03 gt GENERAL FAULT Drive fault or low input voltage will activate the relay 04 gt START Relay is active when the drive has received the start command 05 gt RUN The relay will be energized after the drive is started 06 READY Drive is ready for start no fault and no warning 07 gt ZERO SPEED Drive is running at zero speed 08 SET SPEED Speed has reached the value set as reference 09 gt SP DIRECTION The relay is activated when the speed direction is negative 10 gt RESERVE Reserved for future use 11 9 SP REF DIRECT The relay is activated when the speed reference direction is negative 12 9 RESERVE Reserved for future use 133 SP LIMIT Maximum or minimum speed limit 1 main limits has been reached or maximum or minimum speed limit 2 alternative limits has been reached depending on the selected limits All of these limits are set in group G10 LIMITS 112 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING
126. FP SpON 90 0 FIX PMP STAR SP FP ErON 10 0 IX PMP STAR ER 4 T1 105 FIX PMP1STR DLY 10s T2 0 105 FIX PMP2 STR DLY 10s 6 T3 ON 10s FIX PMP3 STR DLY 10s 7 FP T4 105 FIX PMP4 STR DLY 10s T5 105 FIX PMP5 STR DLY 10s 90 0 JJ 10 0 CONFIGURATION REGISTER 263 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS PARAMETERS FACTORY SETTINGS SETTING 1 SETTING 2 G25 Pump Control 25 4 Stop Conditions 11 T SLP 20s DRIVE SLEEP DELY 20s 2 SLPsp1 40 0 DRV SLEEP SPEED1 40 0 3 SLPsp2 40 0 DRV SLEEP SPEED2 40 0 4 51 5 3 40 0 DRV SLEEP SPEED3 40 0 551 5 4 40 0 DRV SLEEP SPEED4 40 0 6 SLPsp5 40 0 DRV SLEEP SPEED5 40 0 7 SLPsp6 40 0 DRV SLEEP SPEED6 40 0 8 SLPsp7 40 0 DRV SLEEP SPEED7 40 0 9 SLPsp8 40 0 DRV SLEEP SPEED8 40 0 10 FLsw ENA N N 11 51 L 0 01 s FLOW SLEEP LEVEL 0 01 5 12 151 CURR SLEEP LEVEL 13 FP erOFF 0 0 FPUMP STOP ERROR 40 09 14 FP T1 OF 10s FPUMP1 STP DELAY 10s 15 FP T2 OF 10s FPUMP2 STP DELAY 10s 16 FP OF 10s FPUMP3 STP DELAY 10s 17 FP T4 OF 10s FPUMP4 STP DELAY 10s 18 FP T5 OF 10s FPUMP5 STP DELAY 10s 19 SPD 1lof 70 0 FPUMP STP SPEED1 70 0 20 SPD20f 70 0 FPUMP STP SPEED2 70 0 21 SPD30f 70 0 FPUMP STP SPEED3 70 0 22 SPD4of 70 0 FPUMP STP SPEED4 70 0 23 SPD50f 70 0 FPUMP STP SPEED5 70 0 24 SPD60f 70 0 FPUMP STP SPEED6 70 0
127. Flow during the pipe filling process is active In this case the bypass time will be counted although pipe filling process is active On the contrary if this parameter is set to N then the option of No Flow during the pipe filling process is not activated In this case the bypass time will start elapsing after pipe filling process finishes G25 6 19 TRIP DELAY TIME BECAUSE OF FLOW Screen 19 NO FLdly 0 0s Extended info NO FLOW FLT DLY Description Trip delay time because of No Flow detection Range 0 0 to 999s Default value 0 0s Set on run YES Function It allows setting the delay time from the No Flow switch is opened to the drive stops In case of the bypass delay time G25 6 18 is also configured both delay times will be considered G25 6 20 CYCLE TIME OF THE DRIVE Screen 20 CYCLE 0 Extended info CYCLE RESET DELY Description Cycle time of the drive Range OFF 0 to 999m Default value Om Set on run YES Function allows setting the time that must elapse from the drive stops to starts again for the cycle counter G25 6 21 is reset This protection is thought from situations where the drive has problems to keep the pressure and for example it goes in sleep mode to wake up immediately a faulty check valve incorrect setting of the parameters or problems with measurement sensor This function also will operate together with cavitation protection avoiding that the drive pu
128. Function 7 INVERT PID N Inversion of PID regulator output N Y See Function for additional information N NO allows inverting the output of PID regulator Options N gt NO Inversion disabled PID regulator responds in normal mode When the feedback signal value is above the reference signal value speed will be decreased If the feedback signal is below the reference signal speed will be increased In short PID regulator responds with a speed increase from a feedback signal drop This one is the normal setting when PID regulator is used for example in a constant pressure control application A pressure drop feedback due to a higher demand requires a speed increase of the pump to maintain the pressure DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 99 80 700 ELECTRONICS Y YES Inversion enabled PID regulator responds in inverse mode When the feedback signal value is above the reference signal value speed will be increased If the feedback signal is below the reference signal speed will be decreased This means that PID regulator response from a feedback signal drop is a decrease of the output speed This is the typical response required when for example PID regulator is used for temperature control A temperature decrease feedback due to a lower demand requires that fan speed decreases to maintain the temperature G6 8 PID CONTROL ERROR Screen 8 ERR PID 0 096 Description
129. G PARAMETERS 97 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G6 2 PID LOCAL REFERENCE Screen 2 PID LOC 100 Extended info PID LOCAL SETPOI Description Local reference for PID regulator Range 0 0 to 400 Default value 100 Set on run YES Function Setpoint value of PID regulator is set in this parameter when option locPID is selected in parameter G6 1 Source selection for introducing reference signal The value of parameter G3 3 gt Local speed reference is not modified when setpoint value of PID regulator is set here Parameter G3 3 together with this one offer the possibility of having two references or setpoints adjusted from keypad for PID regulator Note This parameter will only be available if G6 1 gt Source selection for introducing reference signal is set to locPID G6 3 SELECTION OF FEEDBACK SIGNAL SOURCE Screen 3 SEL 12 Description Selection of feedback signal source for PID regulator Range NONE Alt Al2 RESERV See Function for additional information Default value Set on run NO Function It allows selecting the source through which the feedback signal will be introduced to close the control loop Selection options are the following ones NONE The PID function is not active Alt Feedback signal introduced through the Analogue Input 1 Al2 Feedback signal introduced through the Analogue Input 2 RESERV Reserve G6 4 PROPORTIONAL GAIN OF PID
130. G1 5 INITIALISE and Parameters setting is not recognised connect the input power again If the fault persists request technical assistance Disconnect and connect again SD700 input power If the same fault appears initialize all of the F29 DSP FLT parameters parameter G1 5 INITIALISE and Parameters setting is incoherent connect the input power again If the fault persists request technical assistance 0 WATCHDOG Input power fault Reset the fault If the fault persists request technical assistance 000 power 000 0000 power 0000 F31 SCR L1 A conduction fault has been produced in the Try to reset the fault Disconnect and re connect F32SCRL2 corresponding thyristor The thyristor is OFF when again the input power If the fault persists request F33 SCRL3 It should be on technical assistance Check if there is an object blocking ventilation Blocked or poor ventilation Improve the cooling 24 IGBT TEMP Heat sink and cooling fan fault on the 80700 Check if the heat sink and the cooling fan are operating correctly Ambient temperature is higher than 50 C Check the cooling and thermal conditions Request technical assistance F35 PHSE L1 LOSS Input phase L1 5 not connected correctly or there is no voltage on it Input phase L2 is not connected correctly or there Verify the wiring of the input power supply of the is no voltage in it drive Check
131. G10 1 to G10 4 for the time set in G11 1 SP LIM F50 PSU FAULT Internal power supply is not supplying the correct voltage One voltage level has decreased to zero value for 100ms approx This fault is generated when the output current of the drive is higher than the current set in G11 11 PUMP OV during the time adjusted in G11 13 DLY Active only when operating in Pump Control mode Trip generated when the pressure level is lower than the minimum pressure level set in G25 6 7 LoPre F66 HI PRESSURE Active only when operating In Pump Control mode External trip produced when digital input configured in this option Hi Pressure Switch is closed External trip produced when Pump Program G25 is activated and one of the digital inputs has been set as 59 F65 LOW PRESSURE F67 LOW WATER LO WATER FLT Under these conditions if a contact is opened on this digital input this fault is generated indicating that the pump is working with no load When the motor current is lower than the cavitation current and the motor speed is higher or equal than the F68 CAVIT UNDERL cavitation speed during the time set for that purpose the fault or the pause is produced according to the setting realized This protection is to avoid that pump operates with no water detection is realized by under load The digital input configured as flow detection indicates flow absence according to the settings realized in the F69 FLO
132. G25 3 8 gt Delay time to start fixed pump 5 25 5 1 gt Speed bypass at the starting of fixed pumps 325 5 2 gt Time of speed bypass after starting fixed pumps SD7OITCCOO26BI Figure 10 47 Starting of the fixed pumps according to the starting speed and the delay time for each pump G25 3 3 MINIMUM PID ERROR TO START THE FIXED PUMPS Screen 3 FP ErON 10 0 Extended info FIX PMP STAR ERR Description Minimum PID error to start the fixed pumps Range OFF 0 to 200 Default value 10 0 Set on run YES DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 199 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Function It allows setting the PID error above of which the fixed pumps will start This one is an optional condition that can be considered or not depending on the setting If this parameter is set to 0 0 any value could start the fixed pumps This parameter allows user to consider the PID error 96 when the fixed pumps must be started At the moment of starting of the fixed pumps additionally it will also considered the drive speed parameter G25 3 2 gt Start speed for the fixed pumps and the start delay time for each fixed pump parameter G25 3 4 to G25 3 8 SPEED 40 G25 3 4 G25 3 8 REFERENCE he PEE Du pis _ 255 100 FEEDBACK TIME LI 1 4 L ti ti ls tj SPEED 62534 62538 A 62532 625 51 ti ls DRIVE PUMP ON TIME
133. IGITL IN 3 53 64 1 7 Multi function Digital Input 3 53 gt FIX PUMP2 FLT Detection of auxiliary pump 2 in fault configuration Status 8 DIGITL IN 4 54 64 18 Multi function Digital Input 4 54 FIX PUMP3 FLT Detection of auxiliary pump 3 in fault configuration Status 248 COMMONLY USED CONFIGURATIONS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Parameter Name Description Value 1 CONTROL 1 G25 1 1 Control mode 1 Pumps The drive will start in pump control mode G25 Pump Control 25 2 PID Setting 1 PID SETP LOCAL 25 2 1 PID reference source LOCAL Speed reference introduced by keypad 2 PID FBK Al2 25 2 2 PID feedback source G25 Pump Control 25 3 Start Conditions When demand decreases the drive can go in sleep mode 1 Lp 0 0 625 3 1 Wake up level of the drive It allows setting the wake up level for the drive This value is set as percentage of PID setpoint 2 FP SpON 90 0 625 3 2 Start speed for the fixed pumps 90 0 It sets the drive speed above which fixed pumps will start Set according to the installation 3 FP ErON 10 0 625 3 3 Minimum PID error to start fixed 10 0 This parameter allows user to consider the PID error 00 pumps at the moment of starting fixed pumps 4 T1 ON 10 0s 625 3 4 Delay time to start fixed pump 1 2 sets the delay time to start the fixed pump associated to T2 ON 10 0s G25 3 5 Delay time to start fixed pump 2
134. IME RESTORE N Y2Yes 5070170069 Figure 10 17 Parameters structure from subgroup 525 9 G25 to subgroup 525 11 G25 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 61 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 1 Group 1 51 Options Menu G1 1 PARAMETERS LOCK Screen 1 LOCK 5 0 Description Parameters lock Range 0 2 See Function for additional information Default value 0 Set on run NO Function It allows user to lock the parameters setting totally or partially The selected lock is executed by introducing a password in parameter G1 2 3 Access password The different selectable options are detailed below 0 3 NO Parameters lock is not active 1 PARTIAL LOCK When the partial lock of the parameters is activated we can only modify the value of the parameters G1 1 and G1 2 parameters used for lock and unlock function as well as the parameter G3 3 gt Local speed reference and G6 2 gt PID local reference whenever the option LOCAL or locPID is selected G6 1 Source selection for introducing reference signal The remainder of the parameters cannot be modified but can be visualized 2 TOTAL LOCK When the total lock of the parameters is activated we can only modify parameters G1 1 and G1 2 until the password is introduced again to unlock parameters 1 2 ACCESS PASSWORD Screen 2 PASSWORD OFF 2 PASSWORD OFF Description Access passwo
135. IPE FILLING SPD Description Speed for pipe filling process Range OFF 0 0 0 1 to 250 Default value 70 0 Set on run YES Function allows setting the reference speed during the pipe filling process G25 7 3 PRESSURE FOR THE END OF FILLING PROCESS Screen 3 FILL 2 0 Extended info PFILL END PRESSU Description Pressure level to finish the pipe filling process Range 0 0 3276 Engineering Units Default value 2 0 Set on run YES Function allows setting the pressure level that determines the end of the pipe filling process The sleep function of the drive is disabled during pipe filling process Once the filling function is finished the drive will go to the stage of setpoint ramp The pressure level set in this parameter together with the time set in parameter G25 7 4 gt Safety time for pipe filling process are the conditions to end the pipe filling process The condition that is fulfilled before pressure or time will force the end of the pipe filling process changing the equipment from FILL status to setpoint ramp RAMP Note Default units of measurement which are displayed depend on the selected engineering units See parameters G4 2 2 gt Selection of sensor 1 units and G4 3 2 Selection of sensor 2 units 224 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G25 7 4 SAFETY TIME FOR PIPE FILLING PROCESS Screen 4 FILL TIM 15m Extended inf
136. It activates the use of the alternative acceleration and deceleration ramps programmed in G5 3 gt Acceleration ramp 2 and G5 4 gt Deceleration ramp 2 NO 15 9 REFERENCE 2 It allows selecting the alternative speed reference programmed in G3 2 gt Reference source 2 of speed NO 16 gt RESERVE Reserved for future use 17 CONTROL 2 It activates the alternative control mode programmed in G4 1 2 gt Alternative control mode NO 18 9 START STP RST Like option 06 gt START RST STOP but Reset signal will be activated after the drive is stopped NO 19 gt STOP 2 Stop command in mode 2 from a push button with a normally closed contact NC according to the setting of the parameter G7 2 gt Stop mode 2 20 gt SPEED LIMIT 2 Change to the alternative speed limits programmed G10 3 gt Minimum speed limit 2 and G10 4 gt Maximum speed limit 2 NO 21 DC BRAKE It allows activating or deactivating dynamic brake unit NO DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 77 80 700 ELECTRONICS 22 START MODE 2 To select the alternative starting mode Ramp Spin adjusted in parameter G7 5 gt Start mode 2 NO 23 CURRENT To select the alternative current limit adjusted G10 7 gt Alternative current limit NO 24 EXTERN EMERGE To generate the fault F56 EMERGEN STOP NC 50 gt PMP START S
137. MESSAGES DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 11 3 3 Daily and periodic inspections Period Inspection Instrument of 5 alement Inspection 2 1 Inspection method Criterion Measurement ri N Are there dust particles Are the ambient temperature and the See Warnings conditions SR humidity within specification Are there any abnormal Module y Visual and audible There are no anomalies noises or oscillations Is the input power to the Measure the voltage between Digital nput power ucc multimeter main circuit correct terminals S and Tester Is the conductor Conductor corroded Visual Cable Is the sheathing of the y cable damaged sany damage vise o Visual check Temperature 30 to 50 Thermometer Hygrometer AH 0 3 Humidity below 95 Recorder condensing Disconnect the cables of the drive and measure the IGBT s module Check the resistance resistance value between Diodes module value between each one S T VDC VDC multimeter and Rectifier of the terminals and Analogue tester U VW VDC VDC with a tester gt 10 Have fluid leakages been observed Is the capacitor well Visual check Correct capacitor fastened Measure the capacitance with Is any dilation or a proper instrument retraction sign observed Measure the capacitance Instrument for measuring capacity No
138. Minimum PID error to start the fixed pumps Note If time is too short overpressure can be generated in the system On the contrary if time is too long under pressure can be generated See figures 10 47 and 10 48 202 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 20 10 Subgroup 25 4 25 4 Stop Conditions G25 4 1 DELAY TIME BEFORE ACTIVATING SLEEP MODE Screen 1 LP T SLP 20s Extended info DRIVE SLEEP DELY Description Delay time before activating sleep mode Range OFF 0 1 999s Default value 20s Set on run YES Function It allows setting a delay time to activate sleep mode This delay time 15 applicable to the following conditions sleep speed No Flow input flow measurement and sleep current If either of them is fulfilled the time to activate sleep mode will start elapsing Note Drive is configured to go to sleep according to the conditions of the installation as factory setting Nevertheless all of the parameters values described below must be checked properly according to each installation to guarantee a correct functionality If you do not want the equipment goes in sleep mode these parameters must be adjusted for that purpose FEEDBACK Engineer Units TIME gt t 5 t 95 MOTOR SPEED STEADY SPEED DM en b b G2541 1 Nc 625 42 t DRIVE PUMP Poe n TE OFF ty b 5 6 25
139. N OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Next we expound some examples about how analogue outputs must be configured Example 1 We want to configure Analogue Output 1 as 0 to 10V output for a sensor to measure the speed motor of 1440 rotating in inverse direction 1440 with a range from 3000rpm to 3000rpm Motor rated speed is 1500rpm Set mode of Analogue Output 1 in G8 2 1 to 01 gt SPEED MOTOR motor speed Select format for Analogue Output 1 in G8 2 2 to 0 10 Set minimum and maximum values high range and low range of the Analogue Output 1 scale in parameters G8 2 3 for low range and G8 2 4 for high range G8 2 3 gt 200 since 3000rpm is 200 of the motor rated speed 1500rpm G8 2 4 gt 200 since 3000rpm is 200 of the motor rated speed 1500rpm Vmax SS 7 Motor speed Vspao Rngmax Rngmin Where Maximum voltage of Analogue Output 1 V min Minimum voltage of Analogue Output 1 RnQmax Maximum speed of the motor Rngmin gt Minimum speed of the motor Velo Output voltage at zero speed of the motor Orpm Replacing values 2 6 3000 1 3000 With this setting the value of the Analogue Output 1 will be 2 6V when motor rotates in inverse direction at 1440rpm G8 2 3 G8 2 4 20096 1440rpm 20096 GB 2 2 gt Format selection for analogue output 1 3000rpm T 0 1500 3000rp
140. NAL TEMP 19 F19 IMB I OUT 54 gt 54 WATCHDOG TMR 20 gt F20 GROUND FLT 56 F56 EMERGEN STOP 21 F21 ILIM T O 57 57 PUMP OVERLOA 22 F22 TQ LIM T O 65 F65 LOW PRESSURE 25 F25 MTR O L 66 66 HI PRESSURE 27 gt F27 DLSMTH 67 F67 LOW WATER 28 F28 MICRO FLT 68 68 CAVITATION 29 29 DSP FLT 69 69 FLOW SWITCH 30 gt F30 WATCHDOG 70 gt 70 IRRIGATOR FL 31 F381 SCRL1 71 gt F71 CYCLING 32 F32 SCR L2 72 F72 IN PRES SW G13 3 REGISTER 2 OF FAULT HISTORY Screen 3 FO NO FAULT Extended info FOURTH FAULT FXX Description Register 2 of fault history Range Default value Set on run Function allows visualizing the information of the fault stored in register 2 of fault history To obtain information about data storage in the different registers and visualize the fault list see section Function in parameter G13 2 Register 1 of fault history G13 4 REGISTER 3 OF FAULT HISTORY Screen 4 FO NO FAULT Extended info Description Register 3 of fault history Range Default value 5 Set on run Function lt allows visualizing the information of the fault stored in register 3 of fault history To obtain information about data storage in the different registers and visualize the fault list see section Function in parameter G13 2 Register 1 of fault history DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 159 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G13 5 REGISTER 4 OF FAULT HI
141. ONS AND ACTIONS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 DISPLAY POSSIBLE CAUSE ACTIONS Communications cable has been come loose or Verify the wiring of communications system COMMS LO Master device has not sent valid data in the Verify the data and settings of the master device required frame or it has sent incorrect data F48 SPI COM Input power fault Reset the equipment and if the fault persists request technical assistance Speed reference is higher than the speed limit Check the reference source and the motor load F49 SPD LIMIT Motor speed is out of control or motor is Verify speed limits accelerating because of the load F50 PSU FAULT Damaged power supply Reset the equipment and if the fault persists request technical assistance Verify that the ambient conditions are proper for the equipment Be sure that there is nothing obstructing the cooling fans dust papers dirt etc and that these rotate correctly Fans of the equipment are operating wron Verify that fans are not obstructed T 9 M Check that fans are not dirty and rotate correctly F52 SOFT C TEMP Temperature limits for 50700 rectifier have been F51 SCR TEMP exceeded Wait for the temperature of the power supply decreases down to a value in normal conditions and restart it You can disconnect the equipment connect it again and restart the power supply again If the fault persists request technical assistance
142. PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 169 80 700 7 ELECTRONICS Function It allows setting the DC current value to avoid humidity or condensation forming inside the motor Note You must only modify this parameter if condensation or humidity problems inside the motor are present CAUTION Although the motor is not running there is dangerous voltage RUN led will be lit during this process Be careful to avoid property damage and personal injuries G17 5 USE OF EXTERNAL BRAKE Screen 5 DYN BRAK N Description Use of external brake Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run YES Function User must configure the drive if an external dynamic brake 15 going to be used Options N 3 NO Application does not require the use of external brake Y gt YES External brake is going to be installed G17 6 VOLTAGE FOR ACTIVATING REGENERATION CONTROL Screen 6 VDC BRAKE OFF Extended info VDC BRAKE START Description Voltage for activating the regeneration control Range 800 to 810 OFF 811 Default value OFF Set on run YES Function allows setting the DC Bus voltage level to activate voltage regeneration control When an external brake is used in some applications although braking resistors are not enough to dissipate energy returned to the drive at specific moments In this case the drive will use the regeneration control to limit DC bus voltage with the level value set here
143. Program activation Range STANDAR PUMP Default value STANDAR Set on run NO Function It allows selecting additional functionalities If option PUMP is selected the extended functionality for the pump control G25 PUMP CONTROL will be available The group G25 will be hidden if the pump program is not active Once selected the pump program a character will appear in the upper line of the display beside the drive status indicating constantly that the pump program is active The letter appears in 11 Spanish and the letter for English German The most of parameters relative to the pump control are located in group G25 except for those settings relative to inputs and outputs that can be found in groups G4 G7 Additionally there are some visualization screens included in visualization groups SV 5 and 5 8 EN WARNING The activation of pump program changes the inputs and outputs configuration of the equipment automatically See parameter G4 1 4 gt Selection of Digital Input configuration for additional information Output relays are also configured automatically see 58 1 Output Relays Make sure there is not a hazard of accidental starting to avoid property damage or personal injury 64 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 1 1 Subgroup 1 10 51 10 Eloader EEPROM loader G1 10 1 SAVE PARAMETERS FROM DRIVE TO DISPLAY Screen Description Range
144. Psp2 42 0 625 4 3 Sleep speed for local setpoint 2 drive will sleep whenever local setpoint 2 is selected Set according to the installation 44 0 It allows setting the sleep speed below which the 4 SLPsp3 44 0 625 4 4 Sleep speed for local setpoint 3 drive will sleep whenever local setpoint is selected Set according to the installation 46 0 It allows setting the sleep speed 4 below which the 5 SLPsp4 46 0 G25 4 5 Sleep speed for local setpoint 4 drive will sleep whenever local setpoint 4 is selected Set according to the installation 48 0 gt It allows setting the sleep speed 5 below which the 6 SLPsp 48 0 625 4 6 Sleep speed for local setpoint 5 drive will sleep whenever local setpoint 5 is selected Set according to the installation 50 0 gt It allows setting the sleep speed 6 below which the 7 SLPsp 50 0 625 4 7 Sleep speed for local setpoint 6 _ drive will sleep whenever local setpoint 6 is selected Set according to the installation 52 0 It allows setting the sleep speed 7 below which the 8 SLPsp 52 0 G25 4 8 Sleep speed for local setpoint 7 will sleep whenever local setpoint 7 is selected Set according to the installation 54 0 It allows setting the sleep speed 8 below which the 9 SLPsp8 54 0 G25 4 9 Sleep speed for local setpoint 8 drive will sleep whenever local setpoint 8 is selected Set according to the i
145. ROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 81 SDRIVE 700 82 G4 2 4 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function G4 2 5 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note Note G4 2 6 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function G4 2 7 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note Note POWER ELECTRONICS MINIMUM RANGE OF ANALOGUE INPUT 1 4 INmin1 0V AIN1 LOW RANGE Minimum range of the Analogue Input 1 10 to 10V 0 to 20mA 0 YES It allows setting the minimum voltage or current value for the Analogue Input 1 according to the characteristics of the sensor that is going to be connected MINIMUM RANGE OF SENSOR 1 5 1 0 01 6 SENS1 LOW RANGE Minimum range of sensor 1 3200 to G4 2 7 Engineering units 0 01 5 YES allows setting the minimum units value of the sensor connected to the Analogue Input 1 This value should also correspond to the minimum voltage or current level of the sensor set in G4 2 4 3 Minimum range of Analogue Input 1 The setting of this parameter should be checked if the sensor units are changed in parameter G4 2 2 gt Selection of sensor 1 units It is necessary to set this value to operate in open loop and closed loop This parameter will be only available if G4 2 1 gt To enable sensor of Analogue In
146. RTING OF 5 FIXED PUMPS Screen 5 COMP 5 0 0 Extended info SETPOINT 5 Description Compensation pressure at the starting of five fixed pumps Range 0 0 3276 Engineering Units Default value 0 0Bar Set on run YES Function It allows compensating the pressure loss in the pipe by increasing the setpoint automatically when five fixed pumps are connected Note Default units of measurement which are displayed depend on the selected engineering units See parameters G4 2 2 gt Selection of sensor 1 units and G4 3 2 Selection of sensor 2 units DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 227 80 700 POWERELECTRONICS 10 20 15 Subgroup 25 9 525 9 Fixed Pumps Control G25 9 1 TO ENABLE FIXED PUMP ASSOCIATED TO OUTPUT RELAY 1 Screen 1 ENABLE PUMP1 N Description To enable the fixed pump associated to the Output Relay 1 pump 1 Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run YES Function It allows setting enabling or disabling the fixed pump associated to the Output Relay 1 If this parameter is set to Y when activating pump control in parameter G1 7 gt Program activation option PUMP and configuring one digital input parameter G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 gt Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration with option 52 gt FIX PUMP1 FLT the Output Relay 1 is configured wit
147. Relay 1 control source G8 1 5 gt Selection of Relay 2 control source and G8 1 9 gt Selection of Relay control source User disable the sleep option of the drive but a PLC receives the warning of fulfilled sleep conditions through the output relay configured with the option 31 and stops the system See option 31 in parameter G8 1 1 Options N 3 NO Sleep mode disabled Y 3 YES Sleep mode enabled 214 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 20 11 Subgroup 25 5 25 5 Speed Bypass G25 5 1 SPEED BYPASS AT THE STARTING OF FIXED PUMPS Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 1 BY SPon 70 0 BYPASS ON SPEED Speed bypass at the starting of fixed pumps 0 0 to 250 0 YES allows setting a speed bypass value The drive speed will be forced to the value set in this parameter during the time set in parameter G25 5 2 gt Time of speed bypass after starting fixed pumps to avoid over pressure situations in the system at the starting of a fixed pump See figures 10 47 and 10 48 G25 5 2 TIME OF SPEED BYPASS AFTER STARTING FIXED PUMPS Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 2 BY T ON 10s BYPASS ON DELAY Time of speed bypass after starting fixed pumps OFF 0 999s 10s YES allows setting a value for the time of speed bypass During this time the d
148. SMOOT SPD FILTER Time constant for the filtering of soeed signal 0 000 60 05 0 2505 YES It provides with S Curve filter for the speed reference changes including Start Stop commands The S Curve filter limits acceleration and deceleration changes making soft It is especially useful in cranes and elevators If different value is not required set to default value A value different to 0 will affect to the system response OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 6 Group 6 G6 PID Control SDRIVE 700 is provided with a PID regulator that allows controlling automatically a process which depends on the physical variable according to the motor speed for example pressure flow height current temperature etc The functions of PID regulator will be set in the parameters of this group after enabling the PID regulator in parameters G3 1 gt Reference source 1 of speed or G3 2 gt Reference source 2 of speed option PID The PID regulator operates correctly with factory settings nevertheless if you want to optimize the setting you can follow the next steps Increase the proportional gain parameter G6 3 until the first oscillation is taken place then set it to 40 of the value in which the oscillation occurred Decrease the integration time parameter G6 4 until the first oscillation is taken place then set it to 150 of the value in which the oscillation
149. STORY Screen 5 FO NO FAULT Extended info SECOND FAULT FXX Description Register 4 of fault history Range Default value Set run Function lt allows visualizing the information of the fault stored in register 4 of fault history To obtain information about data storage in the different registers and visualize the fault list see section Function in parameter G13 2 Register 1 of fault history G13 6 REGISTER 5 OF FAULT HISTORY Screen 6 FO NO FAULT Extended info FIRST FAULT FXX Description Register 5 of fault history Range Default value s Set on run Function It allows visualizing the information of the fault stored in register 5 of fault history To obtain information about data storage in the different registers and visualize the fault list see section Function in parameter G13 2 Register 1 of fault history G13 7 ERASE FAULT HISTORY Screen 7 CLEAR FAULTS N Description To erase fault history register Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run YES Function allows user to erase the faults stored in registers of fault history Options N 3 NO Function disabled Y YES It erases fault history last five faults The screen returns to default value after all of the faults have been erased 160 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 14 Group 14 G14 Multi references This paramete
150. Selectable Digital InpUlS too E e teat es 247 12 5 Pressure Group Control with Auxiliary Pumps Start and Stop on Demand 248 12 6 Pressure Group Control with Eight Pressure References 251 13 CONFIGURATION REGISTER iioi 2 aviae ceo o asas oet 254 6 INDEX POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT Read this manual carefully to maximise the performance of this product and to ensure its safe use n this manual safety messages are classified as follows N WARNING Do not remove the cover while the power is applied or the unit is in operation Otherwise electric shock could occur Do not run the drive with the front cover removed Otherwise you may get an electric shock due to the high voltage terminals or exposure of charged capacitors Do not remove the cover except for periodic inspections or wiring even if the input power is not applied Otherwise you may access the charged circuits and get an electric shock Wiring and periodic inspections should be performed at least 10 minutes after disconnecting the input power and after checking the DC Link voltage is discharged with a meter below 30VDC Otherwise you may get an electric shock Operate the switches with dry hands Otherwise you may get an electric shock Do not use cables with damaged insulation Otherwise you may get an elec
151. TION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 20 16 Subgroup 25 10 25 10 Flow Limitation Algorithm G25 10 1 FLOW READING SOURCE Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 1 FLOW SEL PULSE Flow reading source PULSE Al2 See Function for additional information PULSE YES allows selecting the source to introduce the PID setpoint of the instantaneous flow Selection options PULSE Reference signal PID setpoint introduced by means of a pulse input connected to one Multi function Digital Input parameter G4 1 5 to G4 1 10 option 51 FLOW PULSE See Subgroup 54 4 Pulse Input for additional information Alt Reference signal PID setpoint introduced through Analogue Input 1 Al2 Reference signal PID setpoint introduced through Analogue Input 2 G25 10 2 MAXIMUM ALLOWED FLOW Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 2 10001 5 MAX ALLOWED FLOW Value of maximum allowed flow 0 0 3276 Engineering Units 10001 5 YES It allows setting the value of the maximum allowed flow When the present flow value is higher than the value set in this parameter plus the margin set in G25 10 3 gt Offset percentage over maximum flow G25 10 2 G25 10 3 the flow limitation algorithm will be activated showing the drive status FLOW In that moment the speed
152. TP Automatic starting of the system NO 51 gt FLOW PULSE Pulse input for the flowmeter NO 52 gt FIX PUMP1 FLT Auxiliary pump 1 fault NO 53 gt FIX PUMP2 FLT Auxiliary pump 2 fault NO 54 FIX PUMPS FLT Auxiliary pump 3 fault NO 55 2 FIX PUMP4 FLT Auxiliary pump 4 fault NO 56 gt FIX PUMP5 FLT Auxiliary pump 5 fault NO 57 MAN PROTstart Manual starting including those protections enabled by the user NO 58 gt HI PRESS FLT High Pressure trip NC 59 LO WATER FLT No Water trip NC 60 LO PRESS FLT To detect a low pressure situation NO 61 3 FLOW SWITCH To connect an external flow switch open closed NC 62 IRRIGAT TRIP To detect an external fault from the irrigation equipment NO 63 gt SETPONT PINI Low bit Configuration of the low medium and high bit respectively for multiple PID setpoints selection according to the following table 78 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 DIGITAL INPUTS PID SETPOINT Di z 65 64 63 0 G25 1 5 SETPT1 G25 1 6 2 They are NO contacts 64 SETPONT PIN2 Medium bit See option 63 above 65 gt SETPONT PIN3 High bit See option 63 above 66 MAN REF 2 To select the second source or the alternative source for the speed reference adjusted in G3 2 3 Selection for reference 2 NO
153. W SWITCH MM corresponding parameters See the protections set in G25 6 to obtain more detailed information F70 IRRIGATOR F The digital input configured as 62 IRRIGAT TRIP detects that an external fault in the irrigating equipment has been produced F71 CYCLING Conditions set in group G25 6 are not met regarding to the cycle time of the drive and the cycle counter The 50700 has started a number of times higher than the allowed number without relaxing the established time This fault is produced because of two causes 1 After starting the system the time set in G25 9 11 has been exceeded without the digital input configured as F72 PRES SW PRESSUR SWITC is activated 2 After the Priming pump has stopped and the drive pump has started the digital input configured as PRESSUR SWITC is opened during the time set in G25 9 10 238 FAULT MESSAGES DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 11 2 Procedure for Fault Solutions DISPLAY POSSIBLE CAUSE ACTIONS NO FAULT a l Motor output short circuit Wiring fault Check output cables and motor for possible wiring Circuit fault faults or short circuits Motor fault High voltage peak on the input F2 V LIM FLT High load regeneration Check conditions of input power supply Decrease deceleration ramps F11 LIM FLT Deceleration ramp too high parameters 55 2 DECEL1 and 5 4 DECEL2 F3 PDINT FLT See faults F1 and F2 See faults F1 an
154. When the output current of the drive is higher than the current set in parameter G11 11 during the time adjusted in this parameter the drive turns off its output generating the fault F57 PUMP OVERLOA We can set the value for a low pass filter to read the current in order to avoid oscillations by means of the parameter G11 12 G11 14 TO ENABLE UNDERLOAD PROTECTION Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 14 UNDERLOAD N To enable or disable the underload protection of the pump N Y See Function for additional information N YES It allows the possibility of protecting the pump from underload status N 3 NO Underload protection disabled Y gt YES Underload protection enabled To protect the pump from underload status it is necessary to realize the following settings a Setto Y this parameter b Seta value of underload current in parameter G11 15 below which the first detection condition will be fulfilled C Seta value of underload speed in parameter G11 16 above which the second detection condition will be fulfilled d Seta delay time for activation of underload protection in parameter G11 17 Once elapsed the last underload condition will be activated If three previous conditions are fulfilled the drive will stop the pump to protect it from underload status DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 151 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G11 15 UNDERLOAD CURRENT
155. Y YES To enable the fixed pump associated to the Analogue Output 1 This analogue output is configured with the option 27 gt MACRO PUMP and free configuration is not allowed for it DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 229 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 9 5 TO ENABLE FIXED PUMP ASSOCIATED TO ANALOGUE OUTPUT 2 Screen 5 ENABLE PUMP5 N Description To enable the fixed pump associated to the Analogue Output 2 pump 5 Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run YES Function allows setting enabling or disabling the fixed pump associated to the Analogue Output 2 If this parameter is set to Y when activating pump control in parameter G1 7 gt Program activation option PUMP and configuring one digital input parameter G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 gt Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration with option 56 gt FIX PUMPS FLT the Analogue Output 2 is configured with option 27 gt MACRO PUMP to control fixed pumps If the pump associated to this analogue output is not required we recommend you disable it from this parameter In this way the analogue output can be configured for other uses N 3 NO To disable the fixed pump associated to the Analogue Output 2 This analogue output is configured with the option 00 NONE and free configuration is allowed for it Y YES To enable the fixed pump associated t
156. alue of speed reference in manual mode when local source is selected Range 250 to 250 Default value 0 0 Set on run YES Function It allows setting the speed reference of the drive to operate in manual mode protected or not when LOCAL source has been selected in parameter G25 1 2 gt Source selection for speed reference in manual mode and or G25 1 4 gt Source selection for alternative speed reference in manual mode and whether the speed reference is the main reference or the alternative reference Therefore it is possible to select one analogue input as source for main speed reference in G25 1 2 3 Source selection for speed reference in manual mode option All or Al2 and the other hand to select the keypad as source for alternative speed reference in G25 1 4 gt Source selection for alternative speed reference in manual mode option LOCAL In this way when digital input configured as alternative reference parameter G4 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration option 715 gt REFERENCE 2 is activated the speed of drive pump is the set one in this parameter from keypad In case of the digital input configured as alternative is not activated and keypad is selected as source for main speed reference parameter G25 1 2 set to LOCAL the value set here will be applied directly as speed referenc
157. ameter G4 2 6 gt Maximum range of Analogue Input 1 The value set here is a percentage of the motor rated speed G2 4 3 Motor rpm See figure 10 20 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 83 SDRIVE 700 84 POWER ELECTRONICS G4 2 14 PROTECTION FOR ANALOGUE INPUT 1 LOSS Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 14 AIN1 LOSS N Protection for the Analogue Input 1 loss N Y See Function for additional information N YES It allows user to decide about the behaviour of the equipment when the signal connected to the Analogue Input 1 16 lost Options N 3 NO Disabled function Drive does not realize any action in case of the analogue input signal is lost Y YES Drive will stop generating the fault F42 AIN1 LOSS since the sensor will be considered damaged when a sharp drop down to zero value in the level of the analogue input signal is detected G4 2 15 ZERO BAND FILTER FOR ANALOGUE INPUT 1 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 64 28 or 54 3 2 15 1 2 BAND OFF AIN1 ZERO BAND Zero band filter for the Analogue Input 1 OFF 0 0 9 9 OFF YES Setting a value in this parameter we obtain a filtering of the Analogue Input 1 signal eliminating a possible electrical noise associated to the signal that impedes reading a zero value when it must be read The aim of this parameter is supplying
158. anomaly Capacity higher than 85 of rated capacitance Is there any contactor Audible check Contactor chatter No anomaly Is the contact damaged Visual check Balanced voltage between Digital Measure voltage between phases i e lower than 8V multimeter output voltage output terminals V and W difference for 400V RMS voltage P i models meter Are there any abnormal Disconnect the power supply noises or oscillations OFF and rotate the fan Cooling fan effortlessly Is the cooling fan manually disconnected Check the connections y Check the reading instrument Check the specified Voltage meter Is the displayed value Measurement Soned with an external values and the control Current meter measurement values etc Is there any noise or Audible sensory and visual abnormal vibrations check All No anomaly Is there any imbalance Operating check Has any unusual smell Check if damages have been been perceived produced by overheating Disconnect the cables U V Megger check between and W and join them terminals of output circuit together Check the More than 5MQ and ground terminal resistance between this join Insulation resistance Megger type 500 and ground Note Long life of the main components above indicated is based on a continuous operation for the stipulated load These conditions can change according to the environment conditions FAULT MESS
159. ation G19 2 13 REGENERATION BUS VOLTAGE Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 13 CTR Vbus OFF REGEN BUS VOL Regeneration of bus voltage 625 799V OFF 800V OFF YES It allows setting a voltage value in order to remove over voltage fault If the setting of the previous parameters G19 2 10 gt Frequency V Hz change G19 2 11 gt Stabilize factor in acceleration and G19 2 12 Stabilize factor deceleration has not been enough to reduce the instability of the system then in case of fault F2 V LIM FLT is produced decrease the value of this parameter until the fault disappears The optimum result will be obtained when this parameter is used together with the previous parameters G19 2 10 G19 2 11 y G19 2 12 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 175 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 18 3 Subgroup 19 3 519 3 Motor Model G19 3 1 STATOR RESISTANCE Screen 1 STATOR 0 9 Extended info STATOR RESISTOR Description Stator resistance Rs Range 0 0 9 9 Default value 0 9 Set on run YES Function It allows setting the value of the stator resistance This parameter is used to compensate for motor voltage drop It is very important for applications with large torque transients especially at low speed If the resistance value is very low then the motor torque produced at the starting will be reduced When this value is increased then
160. ault wiring faults or motor fault Disconnect the motor and wiring of the 50700 and F20 GROUND FLT 9 check motor insulation Ground is incorrectly connected or wrong Check and improve the ground connection system Motor stalled Heavy load Check the motor load F211 LIM T O Motor mechanical brake is coupled Increase maximum current limit Motor stalled Heavy load Check the motor load REMIS Motor mechanical brake is coupled Increase maximum torque limit FAULT MESSAGES DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS 239 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS DISPLAY POSSIBLE CAUSE ACTIONS High current used by the motor due to heavy load Check the motor load Check the setting of parameters G2 1 MTR CUR 25 MTR OIL under normal operating conditions and G2 7 MTR COOL relating to the motor Incorrect setting of the thermal model parameters thermal model Increasing the parameter G2 7 MTR COOL can be undertaken when there is a Phase loss the motor or a fault in motor motor PTC fitted and it is connected to the SD700 Potential damage to the soft charge resistors of the Try to reset the fault Disconnect and re connect F27 DL SMTH SD700 9 9 again the input power If the fault persists contact Power Electronics for technical service Disconnect and re connect SD700 input power of the drive If the same fault appears initialize all of F28 MICRO FLT the parameters parameter
161. ause of fault F13 HI V IN when average voltage measured at the input of the equipment is higher than the value set in G11 6 gt High input voltage level during the time adjusted in this parameter Protection from high input voltage is a combination of parameter G11 6 High input voltage level and this one G11 8 TRIP DELAY TIME DUE TO OUTPUT VOLTAGE IMBALANCE Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 8 Dlasy VO 1 0s VOUT asyTRIP DLY Trip delay time due to output voltage imbalance 0 0 10s OFF 10 1 1 0s YES It allows setting a delay time before generating the trip when an output voltage imbalance has been detected Once elapsed that time drive will trip because of fault F18 IMB V OUT G11 9 PERFORMANCE IN CASE OF INPUT POWER LOSS Screen Description Range Default value 0 9 LOW V BHV 0 Performance of the drive in case of input power loss occurs during operation 0 2 See Function for additional information Set on run YES Function It modifies the performance of the drive when input power drops while motor is running according to the selected option 03 NO FAULT No action will be done by the drive 1 gt FAULTS Drive will trip because of fault F11 VIN LOSS 2 STOP Drive will not trip because of fault and will try to control the motor stopping while DC Bus voltage level allows it DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 149
162. ay time for comparator 1 SD70ITCCO017AI Figure 10 38 Example Activation of comparator 1 in normal mode WINDOW MODE Lim 2 gt Lim 1 TIME 5 6916 6918 09 1 6 6918 4 4 5 1 8 10 12 145 16 5 19 22 24 28 30 5 8 1 4 gt Limit 2 for comparator 1 in window made 69 1 5 Limit 1 for comparator 1 in window mode 8 1 6 gt ON delay time for comparator 1 63 1 8 gt OFF delay lime for comparator 1 SD7DITCCOO18A J Figure 10 39 Example Activation of comparator 1 in window mode when limit 2 is higher than limit 1 132 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 WINDOW MODE T Lim 2 lt Lim 1 SPEED 100 70 69 15 gt Lim 1 30 G9 1 4 gt Lim 2 TIME 5 COMPARATOR 25 45 18 10 12 145 165 19 900 305 OUTPUT Gu1B 6918 69 1 6 83 13 59 16 eerie ee nenne On OFF 0 25 4 5 1 8 10 12 145 16 5 19 22 24 28 30 5 38 1 4 Limit 2 for comparator 1 in window mode 68 1 5 gt Limit 1 for comparator 1 in window mode 38 1 6 gt ON delay time for comparator 1 63 1 8 gt OFF delay lime for comparator 1 SD7DITCCOO18A J Figure 10 40 Example Activation of comparator 1 in window mode when limit 2 is lower than limit 1 G9 1 9 SELECTION OF OUTPUT FUNCTION FOR COMPARATOR 1 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 9 SEL FUNT C1 00 Selection of the output function fo
163. before elapsing OFF delay time the output of the comparator will be not deactivated See figures 10 38 10 39 and 10 40 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 141 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G9 3 9 SELECTION OF OUTPUT FUNCTION FOR COMPARATOR 3 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 9 SEL FUNT C3 00 Selection of the output function for the comparator 3 00 11 00 YES allows user to select which function will be activated by comparator 3 To get information about the configuration options see Function in parameter G9 3 9 Selection of output function for comparator 3 If activation and deactivation levels are set to similar values and delay times are set to OFF any noise that appears in the signals of selected source can cause an oscillation in the comparator and therefore an incorrect operation You should set these levels keeping a reasonable margin between them and if it is necessary set a delay time to improve the operation 142 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 10 Group 10 G10 Limits MINIMUM SPEED LIMIT 1 1 MIN1 SP 0 00 SPEED MIN LIMIT1 Minimum speed limit 1 250 to G10 2 0 00 YES allows setting the minimum speed limit 1 that the drive can apply to the motor It is set in of motor rated speed Commands to operate out of these limits are restricted to those limits SPEED
164. c 015 00 Not used Free programming WNC Contact a 9 2 o c 5 r 3 Common Motor PTC Input NC Contact Feedback signal 4 20 Programmable as V or mA Analogue Signal Common Common Terminal Common Terminal 24Vdc SD70DTCOD06CI Figure 12 4 Pressure Group Control with 3 Auxiliary Pumps Start and Stop on demand Note Use screened cables for the controls and connect the screen to ground 250 COMMONLY USED CONFIGURATIONS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 12 6 Pressure Group Control with Eight Pressure References 12 6 1 Parameters Configuration arameter Name Description G1 Options Menu 4 LANG ENGLISH 01 4 Language selection ENGLISH 7 PROG PUMP 61 7 Program Activation the extended functionality of the pump control in 5 MTR PFA 0 85 62 5 Cosine Phi __ Set according to motor nameplate 6 MTR FRQ 50Hz 62 6 Motor frequency Hz Set according to motor nameplate Use the following values as a reference Submersible pumps gt 20 00 7 MTR COOL 40 62 7 Motor cooling at zero speed 00 motor S 40 Force cooled motor gt 100 G3 References REF1SPD PID G3 1 Speed reference source 1 PID 3 The reference value is set for PID functionality G4 Inputs 54 1 Digital Inputs 5 DIGITL IN 1 50 xen BIONA 50 gt STARTISTP Automatic starting of the system S G4 1 6 Multi function Digital Input 2 63 gt SETPONT low bit configuration
165. can be configured for other uses N 3 NO To disable the fixed pump associated to the Output Relay 2 The relay is configured with the option 00 ALWAYS OFF and free configuration is allowed for it Y 3 YES To enable the fixed pump associated to the Output Relay 2 The relay is configured with the option 28 gt PUMP CNTRL and free configuration is not allowed for it 228 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G25 9 3 TO ENABLE FIXED PUMP ASSOCIATED TO OUTPUT RELAY 3 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 3 ENABLE PUMP3 N To enable the fixed pump associated to the Output Relay 3 pump 3 N Y See Function for additional information N YES It allows setting enabling or disabling the fixed pump associated to the Output Relay 3 If this parameter is set to Y when activating pump control in parameter G1 7 gt Program activation option PUMP and configuring one digital input parameter G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 gt Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration with option 54 gt FIX PUMP3 FLT the Output Relay is configured with option 28 gt PUMP CNTRL to control fixed pumps If the pump associated to this relay is not required we recommend you disable it from this parameter In this way the relay can be configured for other uses N 3 NO To disable the fixed pump associated to the
166. ce Contact NC The reference limits will be the speed limits of the equipment that are set in group G10 LIMITS Like in the previous mode we can set the increase and the decrease of the speed while push buttons Up or Down are pressed according to a double ramp for each case settings in group G5 ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION RAMPS Read option 4 gt MOTORIZED POT See figure 10 19 Note For using this function it is necessary to set G3 1 gt Reference source 1 of speed or G3 2 gt Reference source 2 of speed with option PMOT according to the selected source Caution Digital input configuration changes automatically the settings of the digital inputs themselves Make sure there is not a hazard of accidental starting to avoid personal injuries or property damages Pumps program activation 31 7 gt Program activation set to PUMP requires the following considerations There are some configuration options available when the pump program 15 active which can be set in the same way that the options available in the standard program Nevertheless when the pump program is active the drive will assume that only the configurable options from 50 to 69 for G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 Multi function Digital 6 configuration can be set without taking into consideration the setting on parameter G4 1 4 Digital Input configuration
167. ch the drive is integrated 178 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 19 2 Subgroup 20 4 20 4 Modbus TCP This parameter group is used to configure the drive when it must operate in an Ethernet network communication G20 4 1 IP ADDRESS A Screen 1 IP PARAM A 192 Description IP address A of the equipment Range 0 255 Default value 192 Set on run YES Function It allows setting the field A of the IP address assigned to the equipment in the local network of the user This address must be provided by the network administrator of the own user The format of the IP address is the following one A B C D Therefore the setting of this address is realized by introducing a value in each parameter that configure the complete address this is by assigning a value to each one of the 4 parameters from parameter G20 4 1 gt IP address to parameter G20 4 4 gt IP address DY G20 4 2 IP ADDRESS B Screen 2 IP PARAM B 168 Description IP address B of the equipment Range 0 255 Default value 168 Set on run YES Function allows setting the field of the IP address assigned to the equipment in the local network of the user This address must be provided by the network administrator of the own user See Function in parameter G20 4 1 gt IP address for additional information G20 4 3 IP ADDRESS C Screen 3 PARAM C 1 Description IP address
168. comparing with data received through analogue input reading of PID feedback sensor Once exceeded the detection threshold and elapsed the time set in parameter G25 6 14 gt Trip time because of high pressure the drive will stop by PAUSE or will trip by FAULT according to the setting realized in parameter G25 6 12 Response from over pressure G25 6 14 TRIP TIME BECAUSE OF HIGH PRESSURE Screen 14 Hipr DLY 0 0s Extended info PRESS FLT DLY Description Trip time because of high pressure Range 0 999s Default value 0 0s Set on run YES Function It allows setting the trip time because of high pressure Once exceeded the detection level set in parameter G25 6 13 gt Maximum pressure level and elapsed set in this parameter the drive will stop by PAUSE or will trip by FAULT according to the setting realized in G25 6 12 Response from over pressure 220 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G25 6 15 RESPONSE FROM NO FLOW SITUATION Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 15 FLO SWm PAUSE Response of the drive from No Flow detection situation PAUSE FAULT See Function for additional information PAUSE YES It allows selecting the response of the drive from No Flow detection situation PAUSE It will generate the stopping of the drive and next of fixed pumps NO FLOW will be displayed Once the high
169. ctivated See figures 10 38 10 39 and 10 40 G9 3 7 DEACTIVATION VALUE OF COMPARATOR 3 IN NORMAL MODE Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 7 SP C3 OF 0 C3 DEACTIV LEVEL Deactivation value of comparator 3 in normal mode 250 to 250 0 YES It allows setting the deactivation value of the comparator 3 output Output of comparator 3 will be deactivated when source signal of comparator 3 selected in G9 3 1 is lower than the value set in this parameter and additionally OFF delay time set in G9 3 8 has elapsed If after the OFF condition is given this one disappears before elapsing OFF delay time the output of the comparator will be not deactivated See figure 10 38 This parameter is only displayed if comparator 3 is set to normal mode parameter G9 3 2 gt Type selection for comparator 3 set to 0 Normal G9 3 8 OFF DELAY TIME FOR COMPARATOR 3 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 8 T C3 OF 0 0s C3 DEACTIV DELAY OFF delay time to deactivate comparator 3 0 0 999s 0 0s YES It allows setting a timer to deactivate the output of the comparator 3 When the deactivation condition of the output signal of comparator 3 is given in normal or window mode the timer delays the deactivation of this signal for the time set in this parameter If after the OFF condition is given this one disappears
170. d F2 F4 U DESAT Short circuit F5 U DESAT 2 6 V DESAT Extreme over current equipment overload Check if there are possible wiring faults F7 V DESAT fault If the fault persists after disconnecting output W DESAT Wiring fault circuit fault wires request technical assistance F9 W DESAT Desaturation of IGBT IGBT fault Short circuit F10 NEG DESAT Extreme over current equipment overload Check conditions of input power supply and wiring conditions ES E43 HI VIN UN Check input power conditions load type of the F15 CURL Vdc application and all of the motor mechanical parts If the fault persists after disconnecting output wires One of the input fuses is damaged request technical assistance High voltage peak on the input Check conditions of input power supply F16 HI High load regeneration Check stop conditions of the drive Deceleration ramp too high parameters G5 2 DECEL1 and 55 4 DECEL2 F17 LW Vdc Input power is wrong damaged fuses Check conditions of input power supply Motor is driving an unstable load Check motor circuit completely in case of possible F18 IMB V OUT Motor wiring fault wiring faults or motor fault If the fault persists after disconnecting output wires request technical Motor is wrong assistance Motor is supporting unstable loads D Check motor circuit completely in case of possible Eig MBONI Motor wiring f
171. d set the parameter G3 1 gt Reference source 1 of speed and or G3 2 gt Reference source 2 of speed with option MREP 2 Choice of the multi references as PID references First we should enable the PID regulator in G3 1 gt Reference source 1 of speed and or G3 2 3 Reference source 2 of speed option PID and next select option MREF in parameter G6 1 Source selection for introducing reference signal 4 MOTORIZED POT It allows setting the speed reference by two push buttons connected to digital inputs DI5 Up it increases the speed reference Contact NO DI6 Down it decreases the speed reference Contact NC The reference limits will be the speed limits of the equipment that are set in group G10 LIMITS DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 73 SDRIVE 700 SPEED DI5 NO Contact 016 NC Contact ON OFF RUN NENNEN 777771 _ POWER ELECTRONICS While Up push button is pressed the speed increase can be set according to a double ramp in group G5 ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION RAMPS In case of decreasing the speed occurs the same thing this is that decrease can be set in the same way G5 7 gt Ramp 1 for reference increase of motorized potentiometer 65 8 gt Ramp 1 for reference decrease of motorized potentiometer G5 9 gt Ramp 2 for reference increase of motorized potentiometer G5 10 gt Ramp 2 for reference decrease of motorized potenti
172. delay time to improve the operation 134 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 9 2 Subgroup 9 2 9 2 Comparator 2 Comparator 2 operates in the same way of comparator 1 Additionally it includes the same setting parameters with the same configuration options Therefore figures 10 47 10 48 10 49 and 10 50 are also valid for this comparator For this we recommend observe these figures in order to understand better its operation G9 2 1 SOURCE SELECTION FOR COMPARATOR 2 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 1 COMP 2 SEL 00 Selection of the source for the comparator 2 00 22 00 YES It allows user to select the source for the comparator 2 Configuration options are the same than the options for comparator 1 See Function in parameter G9 1 1 gt Source selection for comparator 1 to obtain information about configuration options 69 22 TYPE SELECTION FOR COMPARATOR 2 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 2 COMP 2 TYPE 0 Selection of comparator 2 type 0 1 See Function for additional information 0 YES It allows selecting the operation mode of the comparator 2 Operation modes are 03 Normal Comparator 2 will be activated when the ON condition is given setting realized in G9 2 3 gt Activation value of comparator 2 in normal mode and will be deactivated when the OFF condition is given setti
173. e 4 parameters from parameter G20 4 5 gt Subnet Mask address to parameter G20 4 8 gt Subnet Mask address DY G20 4 6 SUBNET MASK ADDRESS B Screen 6 SUBNET B 255 Description Subnet Mask address B Range 0 255 Default value 255 Set on run YES Function It allows setting the field B of the Subnet Mask address of the local network of the user This address must be provided by the network administrator of the own user See Function in parameter G20 4 5 Subnet Mask address for additional information G20 4 7 SUBNET MASK ADDRESS C Screen 7 SUBNET C 255 Description Subnet Mask address C Range 0 255 Default value 255 Set on run YES Function It allows setting the field C of the Subnet Mask address of the local network of the user This address must be provided by the network administrator of the own user See Function in parameter G20 4 5 Subnet Mask address for additional information G20 4 8 SUBNET MASK ADDRESS D Screen 8 SUBNET D 0 Description Subnet Mask address D Range 0 255 Default value 0 Set on run YES 180 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function It allows setting the field D of the Subnet Mask address of the local network of the user This address must be provided by the network administrator of the own user See Function in parameter G20 4 5 gt Subnet Mask address for additio
174. e digital inputs configured with options 63 gt SETPONT PIN1 Low Bit 64 gt SETPONT PIN Medium Bit and 65 gt SETPONT PIN3 High Bit in parameters G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration The assignment of multiple setpoints is realized according to the following table DIGITAL INPUTS 01 2 65 Di y 64 Di x 63 PID SETPOINT 0 0 10 G2515 SETPTI 0 0 X G2516 SETPT2 0 X 0 25 1 7 5 0 X X 02518 5 4 X 0 O 02519 5 X 0 X 025 05 6 X X 0 025111 5 7 G25 1 6 LOCAL SETPOINT 2 FOR PID Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 6 SETPT2 0 0Bar Local setpoint 2 for PID 0 3276 Engineering Units 0 0 YES It allows setting the value of the local setpoint 2 for PID It is possible to operate with the following units 96 1 5 m s l min m3 min m3 h m s m min m h Bar kPa Psi m C F K It depends on the units of the sensor used See Function in parameter G25 1 5 gt Local setpoint 1 for PID for additional information G25 1 7 LOCAL SETPOINT 3 FOR PID Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 7 SETPT3 0 0Bar LOCAL SETPOINT 3 Local setpoint 3 for PID 0 3276 Engineering Units 0 0 YES It allows
175. e figures 10 47 and 10 48 G25 3 5 DELAY TIME TO START FIXED PUMP 2 RELAY 2 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 5 FP T2 ON 10s FIX PMP2 STR DLY Delay time to start the fixed pump 2 Relay 2 OFF 0 6000s 10s YES allows setting a delay time to start the fixed pump associated to the Relay 2 At the moment of starting the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the drive speed parameter G25 3 2 gt Start speed for the fixed pumps and the PID error G25 3 3 gt Minimum PID error to start the fixed pumps If time is too short overpressure can be generated in the system On the contrary if time is too long under pressure can be generated See figures 10 47 and 10 48 G25 3 6 DELAY TIME TO START FIXED PUMP 3 RELAY 3 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 6 FP T3 ON 10s FIX PMP3 STR DLY Delay time to start the fixed pump 3 Relay 3 OFF 0 6000s 10s YES allows setting a delay time to start the fixed pump associated to the Relay 3 At the moment of starting the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the drive speed parameter G25 3 2 gt Start speed for the fixed pumps and the PID error G25 3 3 gt Minimum PID error to start the fixed pumps If time is too short overpressure can be generated in the system On the contrary
176. e of skip bandwidth while is accelerating or decelerating until reaching the value of 55 in this case during the acceleration soeed at which the drive will remain operating In the second case when reference frequency 2 is inside of one of the skip bandwidths 85 two situations are possible a Drive is accelerating then frequency will be increased up to 85 it will not stop here but it will be increased up to 90 maximum limit value of the skip bandwidth b Drive is decelerating then frequency will be decreased down to 85 it will not stop here but it will be decreased down to 70 minimum limit value of the skip bandwidth In the following figure we can observe the behaviour of the frequency signal according to the skip frequencies and speed references FREQUENCY SPEED ACCELERATION DECELERATION During During 100 REF 2 85 616 2 80 516 3 20 70 22222 DRONE ALOK EEE M SER 60 REF 1 55 50 616 1 40 REESE 30 ms 20 10 G16 1 gt Skip frequency 1 216 2 2 Skip frequency 2 616 3 gt Skip bandwidth SD7OITCCOO22Al Figure 10 45 Example Frequency signal according to the speed reference and skip frequencies 168 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 17 Group 17 G17 Brake G17 1 TIME FOR DC BRAKE ACTIVATION Screen
177. e of the drive pump This functionality is interchangeable between main and alternative speed references this is we can select the main speed reference by analogue input and the alternative by keypad and vice versa G25 1 4 SOURCE SELECTION FOR ALTERNATIVE SPEED REFERENCE IN MANUAL MODE Screen 4 ALT MAN S RZLOCAL Description Selection of the source for the alternative speed reference in manual mode Range LOCAL Alt Al2 Default value LOCAL Set on run YES Function It allows selecting the source for the alternative speed source in manual mode See Function in parameter G25 1 2 gt Source selection for speed reference in manual mode to obtain information about the configuration options G25 1 5 LOCAL SETPOINT 1 FOR PID Screen 5 SETPT1 0 0Bar Extended info Description Local setpoint 1 for PID Range 0 3276 Engineering Units Default value 0 0 Set on run YES 190 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function It allows setting the value of the local setpoint 1 for PID It is possible to operate with the following units 96 1 5 m s l min m min 1 m3 h m s m min m h Bar kPa Psi m C F K It depends on the units of the sensor used In case of operating with unique local setpoint in PID mode its value will be set in this parameter In case of operating with multiple PID setpoints the speed applied for each case will depend on the activating status of th
178. e source of which is set in parameter G25 10 1 gt Flow reading source 234 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 20 17 Subgroup 25 11 525 11 Registers Read only This subgroup shows the time operated by each auxiliary pump This time is visualized as amount of days and minutes It is especially useful when the alternation mode DUTY SHARE option 2 in parameter G25 9 6 3 Alternation mode of fixed pumps is used to check if the operated times by the auxiliary pumps are equal G25 11 1 OPERATED TIME BY PUMP 1 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 1 P1 0d Om Operated time by pump 1 Read only parameter For additional information see chapter 10 20 17 825 11 Registers G25 11 2 OPERATED TIME BY PUMP 2 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 2 P2 0d 0m Operated time by pump 2 Read only parameter For additional information see chapter 10 20 17 825 11 Registers G25 11 3 OPERATED TIME BY PUMP 3 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 3 0d 0m Operated time by pump 3 Read only parameter For additional information see chapter 10 20 17 825 11 Registers G25 11 4 OPERATED TIME BY PUMP 4 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 4 P4 0 0m Operated time by pump 4 Read only parameter For additi
179. ed If parameters G12 5 gt Selection of fault 1 to be reset to G12 8 3 Selection of fault 4 to be reset are set like this auto reset function is not executed 13 ALL THE FLTS All of the faults can be reset automatically 23 11 VIN LOSS To reset fault F11 input power loss 3 gt 13 HI V IN To reset fault F13 high input voltage 4 14 LW V IN To reset fault F14 low input voltage 5 18 IMB V OUT To reset fault F18 output voltage imbalance 6 gt 19 IMB I OUT To reset fault F19 output current imbalance 7 20 GROUND FLT To reset fault F20 ground fault 8 gt 21 I LIM T O To reset fault F21 current limit time out 9 gt 22 TQ LIM T O To reset fault F22 torque limit time out 10 gt 27 DL SMTH To reset fault F27 DC Bus charge fault 11 gt 40 EXT PTC To reset fault F40 motor PTC fault DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 155 80 700 ELECTRONICS 12 gt 41 COMMS TRIP To reset fault F41 fault signal from communication network 133 42 AIN1 LOSS To reset fault F42 Analogue Input 1 signal loss 14 3 43 AIN2 LOSS To reset fault F43 Analogue Input 2 signal loss 15 3 47 COMMS T O To reset fault F47 communication time out 163 49 SPD LIMIT To reset fault F49 exceeded speed limit 17 65 LOW PRESSURE To reset fault F65 minimum pressure 18 gt 66 HI PRESSURE To reset fault F66 maximum pressure 19 3 67 LOW WATER To reset fault F67 low wat
180. eed 3 is selected by combination of the two digital inputs configured as inch speed 1 and 2 INPUTS Inch speed 1 Inch speed 2 Inch speed 3 Note The activation of this function includes the start command Therefore this signal prevails over any other input configured as start SPEED WHEN DRIVE 2 IS RUNNING STEADY 8 eal SPEED 153 TIME S 4 p SPEED 152 DIY 152 DIX 151 ON 5 0 ON 55 ti 5 6151 gt Inch speed 1 51 G15 2 gt Inch speed 2 IS2 6153 gt Inch speed 3 IS3 SD70ITCCO0035AI Figure 10 44 Operation of the SD700 according to the activation of the inch speeds through digital inputs DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 165 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G15 1 INCH SPEED 1 Screen 1 INCH1 0 00 Extended info Description Inch speed 1 Range 250 to 250 Default value 0 00 Set on run Yes Function It allows user to set a value as inch speed 1 For more information see chapter 10 15 G15 INCH SPEEDS and figure 10 44 G15 2 INCH SPEED 2 Screen 2 INCH2 0 00 Extended info Description Inch speed 2 Range 250 to 250 Default value 0 00 Set on run YES Function It allows user to set a value as inch speed 2 For more information see chapter 10 15 G15 INCH SPEEDS and figure 10 44 G15 3 INCH SPEED Screen 3 INCH3 0 00 Extended info IN
181. een Description Range Default value Set on run Function 5 DAMPING 0 0 Damping of the drive 0 0 20 0 0 0 YES It allows setting a damping value for the drive when operates with no loaded motors If the motor is operating with no load and a high oscillation in the current is detected then it is recommended to increase this value Nevertheless avoid operating with very high values higher than 1 5 G19 2 6 COMPENSATING BANDWIDTH OF TORQUE TRANSITORY Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 6 TTP BAND 0 0 Compensating bandwidth of torque transitory 0 0 10 0 0 0 YES allows setting an initial value for a band of frequencies where the torque transitory will be compensated This function helps in the starting when the load is heavy and a high torque boost is required This value can be increased when strikes and oscillations are observed during the motor starting Nevertheless do not to modify this value unnecessarily since the motor operation will be affected G19 2 7 CURRENT LIMIT FACTOR Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run 7 SLIP 2 0 SLIP COMPENSAT Current limit factor 0 0 20 0 2 0 YES DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 173 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Function allows setting the current limit factor It modifies the speed by reducing the output frequency to keep the output current within a contro
182. een Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function G4 3 7 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note Note POWER ELECTRONICS MINIMUM RANGE OF ANALOGUE INPUT 2 4 INmin2 4mA AIN2 LOW RANGE Minimum range of the Analogue Input 2 10 to 10V 0 to 20mA 4mA YES It allows setting the minimum voltage or current value for the Analogue Input 2 according to the characteristics of the sensor that is going to be connected MINIMUM RANGE OF SENSOR 2 5 2 0 01 6 SENS2 LOW RANGE Minimum range of sensor 2 3200 to G4 3 7 Engineering units 0 01 5 YES allows setting the minimum units value of the sensor connected to the Analogue Input 2 This value should also correspond to the minimum voltage or current level of the sensor set in G4 3 4 Minimum range of Analogue Input 2 The setting of this parameter should be checked if the sensor units are changed in parameter G4 3 2 gt Selection of sensor 2 units It is necessary to set this value to operate in open loop and closed loop This parameter will be only available if G4 3 1 gt To enable sensor of Analogue Input 2 is set to Y MAXIMUM RANGE OF ANALOGUE INPUT 1 6 2 20 AIN2 HIGH RANGE Maximum range of the Analogue Input 1 10 to 10V 0 to 20mA 20mA YES It allows setting the maximum voltage or current value for the Analogue Inp
183. ency switching device and leakage current may flow Ground the drive to avoid electrical shock Use caution to prevent the possibility of personal injury Connect only to the dedicated ground terminal of the drive Do not use the case or the chassis screw for grounding When installing grounding wire should be connected first and removed last The earth cable must have a minimal cross sectional area that meets local country electrical regulations Motor ground must be connected to the drive ground terminal and not to the installation s ground We recommend that the section of the ground connection cable should be equal or higher than the active conductor Installation ground must be connected to the drive ground terminal POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 1 INTRODUCTION 11 Designation Code CODE PULSE NUMBER 6Puses __ 12 Pulses 18 18 Pulses CODE FILTER 1 First environment filter Second environment filter CODE PROTECTION DEGREE ao IP00 Degree protection 20 Degree protection 5S IP54 Degree protection CODE POWER SUPPLY 5 380 500Vac e CODE CURRENT 115A 330 330A CODE MODEL 7 700 CODE SERIES SDRIVE In case of 230Vac power supply consult availability with Power Electronics INTRODUCTION 11 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 1 2 Drive description The SDRIVE700 is a UNIQUE drive gt Dueto its mechanical design FFA Full Frontal Access has reached an impo
184. er 20 gt 31 SCR 11 To reset fault F31 fault on phase L1 of rectifier 21 3 32 SCRL2 To reset fault F32 fault on phase 2 of rectifier 22 33 SCR L3 To reset fault F33 fault on phase L3 of rectifier 23 68 CAVIT UNDERL To reset fault F68 cavitation underload trip 24 69 FLOW SWITCH To reset fault F69 No Flow trip 25 70 IRRIGATOR To reset fault F70 irrigator trip CAUTION At the moment of selecting faults that can be reset you should pay special attention to option 1 gt ALL THE In this case the protections of the drive and the motor will be disabled It is not recommended select this option since the drive could try to reset internal trips causing serious damage to the drive itself G12 6 SELECTION OF FAULT 2 TO BE RESET Screen 6 F2 AUTO RST 0 Description Selection of fault 2 to be reset Range 0 25 Default value 0 Set on run YES 156 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function If auto reset function is enabled G12 1 gt AUTO RESET option Y the drive will consider the fault programmed here as resettable automatically Fault 2 to be reset is selected according to the options explained in section Function of parameter G12 5 Selection of fault 1 to be reset EN CAUTION At the moment of selecting faults that can be reset you should pay special attention to option 1 gt ALL THE In this case
185. er is reached drive will start to apply the alternative deceleration ramp from that moment on If this parameter is set to OFF default value drive will only apply the deceleration ramp 1 parameter G5 2 Note The alternative deceleration ramp can be selected independenily of drive speed This selection can be realized through digital inputs by configuring one of them with the option 14 ACC DEC 2 or by using the output functions of comparators for example if the magnitude of the comparator is the drive rated current when the drive output current is below a defined level calculated as of In a ramp change occurs See figures 10 22 and 10 23 OUTPUT SPEED 55 1 gt Acceleration ramp 1 55 2 gt Deceleration ramp 1 G5 3 gt Acceleration ramp 2 d A 55 4 gt Deceleration ramp 2 BER e 2 4 Y 2 Mee E G5 5 3 Speed for acceleration ramp change N 25 6 gt Speed for deceleration ramp change Acceleration 1 area E 65 6 namaa x i Acceleration 2 area i 054 Reference speed X TIME Deceleration 1 area t t b t ts 2 Deceleration 2 area SD70ITCCOO04AI Figure 10 22 Main and alternative acceleration deceleration ramps DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 OUTPUT SPEED A oa E lt 5 1 gt Acceleration ramp 1 05
186. es inch speed 3 as speed reference When comparator output is activated drive will start and will accelerate until the speed reference is reached in this case the speed reference is inch speed 3 set in parameter G 15 3 08 3 INV SPEED Activation of the comparator output inverts the speed this is the rotation direction of the motor For that drive applies a deceleration ramp until stopping the motor and next changes the rotation direction of the motor and accelerates until reaching the same speed value Note Rotation inversion function must be enabled in parameter G10 9 gt To enable speed inversion 09 ACC DEC 2 When comparator output is activated alternative ramps adjusted G5 3 gt Acceleration ramp 2 and G5 4 gt Deceleration ramp 2 are activated 10 REFERENCE 2 When comparator output is activated the alternative reference selected in G3 2 3 Reference source 2 of speed is activated 11 gt SPEED LIMIT 2 When comparator output is activated the alternative speed limits set in G10 3 gt Minimum speed limit 2 G10 4 gt Maximum speed limit 2 Note If activation and deactivation levels are set to similar values and delay times are set to OFF any noise that appears in the signals of selected source can cause an oscillation in the comparator and therefore an incorrect operation You should set these levels keeping a reasonable margin between them and if it is necessary set a
187. et to 0 Normal G9 2 4 LIMIT 2 FOR COMPARATOR 2 IN WINDOW MODE Screen 4 LIM 2 C2 100 Extended info C2 WINDOW LIMIT2 Description Limit 2 of the comparator 2 in window mode Range 250 to 250 Default value 100 Set on run YES Function allows defining one of the limits to activate comparator 2 in window mode Output of comparator 2 will be activated when source signal of comparator 2 selected in G9 2 1 is within the limit 1 set in G9 2 5 and the limit 2 and additionally ON delay time set in G9 2 6 has elapsed If after the ON condition is given this one disappears before elapsing ON delay time the output of the comparator will be not activated See figures 10 39 and 10 40 Note This parameter is only displayed if comparator 2 is set to window mode parameter G9 2 2 Type selection for comparator 2 set to 1 gt Window G9 2 5 LIMIT 1 FOR COMPARATOR 2 IN WINDOW MODE Screen 5 LIM 1 2 0 Extended info C2 WINDOW LIMIT1 Description Limit 1 of the comparator 2 in window mode Range 250 to 250 Default value 0 Set run YES Function allows defining one of the limits to activate comparator 2 in window mode Output of comparator 2 will be activated when source signal of comparator 2 selected in G9 2 1 is within the limit 1 and the limit 2 set in G9 2 4 and additionally ON delay time set in G9 2 6 has elapsed If after the ON condition is given this one disappea
188. f Relay 1 control source to obtain information about the configuration options DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 115 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G8 1 6 ON DELAY TIME FOR RELAY 2 Screen 6 T R2 ON 0 0s Extended info R2 ACTIVAT DELAY Description ON delay time for the Relay 2 Range 0 0 999s Default value 0 0s Set on run YES Function It allows user to set a delay time before activating the Relay 2 If during this time the activation condition disappears the relay will be not activated G8 1 7 OFF DELAY TIME FOR RELAY 2 Screen 7 T R2 OFF 0 0s Extended info R2 DEACTIV DELAY Description OFF delay time for the Relay 2 Range 0 0 999s Default value 0 0s Set on run YES Function It allows user to set a delay time before deactivating the Relay 2 If during this time the deactivation condition disappears the relay will be not deactivated this is the relay will follow activated G8 1 8 RELAY 2 INVERSION Screen 8 INVERT REL2 N Description Logic inversion of the Relay 2 Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run NO Function allows user to invert the logic of the Relay 2 Relay 2 has one normally open contact terminals 29 30 and another normally closed contact terminals 30 31 See figure 10 31 N 3 NO No inversion Y YES Inversion of relay logical function G8 1 9 SELECTION OF RELAY 3 CONTROL SOURCE Screen 9 SEL RELAY 3 05
189. f the comparator will be not deactivated See figure 10 38 Note This parameter is only displayed if comparator 1 is set to normal mode parameter G9 1 2 gt Type selection for comparator 1 set to 0 Normal G9 1 8 OFF DELAY TIME FOR COMPARATOR 1 Screen 8 T C1 OF 0 0s Extended info C1 DEACTIV DELAY Description OFF delay time to deactivate comparator 1 Range 0 0 999s Default value 0 0s Set on run YES Function It allows setting a timer to deactivate the output of the comparator 1 When the deactivation condition of the output signal of comparator 1 is given in normal or window mode the timer delays the deactivation of this signal for the time set in this parameter If after the OFF condition is given this one disappears before elapsing OFF delay time the output of the comparator will be not deactivated See figures 10 38 10 39 and 10 40 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 131 SDRIVE 700 MOTOR SPEED 16 100 69 13 ON 30 69 1 7 gt OFF COMPARATOR OUTPUT ON OFF MOTOR SPEED 100 70 69 14 gt Lim 2 30 69 1 5 gt Lim 1 COMPARATOR OUTPUT OFF POWER ELECTRONICS NORMAL MODE TIME 5 6916 69 1 8 8 10 12 14 5 22 24 28 30 5 G9 1 3 3 Activation value of comparator 1 in normal mode G9 1 6 3 ON delay time for comparator 1 G9 1 7 3 Deactivation value of comparator 1 in normal mode G9 1 8 3 OFF del
190. f the local network of the user This address is needed to the drive access to an external network This address must be provided by the network administrator of the own user See Function in parameter G20 4 9 Gateway address for additional information G20 4 12 GATEWAY ADDRESS D Screen Description Range Default value Set on run 12 GATEWAY D 0 Gateway address D 0 255 0 YES DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 181 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Function It allows setting the field D of the Gateway address of the local network of the user This address is needed to the drive access to an external network This address must be provided by the network administrator of the own user See Function in parameter G20 4 9 Gateway address for additional information G20 4 13 MAC ADDRESS A Screen 13 MAC A 12 Description MAC address A Range 0 255 Default value 12 Set on run YES Function It allows setting the field A of the MAC address This address is unique and exclusive and is associated to the LAN board drive It must be provided by Power Electronics The format of the MAC address is the following one A B C D E F Therefore the setting of this address is realized by introducing a value in each parameter that configure the complete address this is by assigning a value to each one of the 6 parameters from parameter G20 4 13 MAC address A to parameter
191. f the winding has been modified ensure the correct data is introduced for the appropriate configuration Calculate the motor cooling efficiency at zero speed and introduce that value 40 is a commonly used value Where open structures forced cooling or water cool motors are used a higher efficiency at zero speed will be obtained If the equipment is operating at low speeds for a long time and trips are generated by the thermal model and the motor is not too much hot increase the of the cooling Thermal model is deactivated by introducing OFF We advise installing a thermal protection independent to the motor DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 67 80 700 ELECTRONICS TORQUE 100 80 60 40 20 MOTOR RATED FREQUENCY Torque curve for maximum increase of temperature Torque curve for temperature increase 7 001 Figure 10 18 Specific thermal reduction of the motor 68 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 3 Group 3 G3 References G3 1 REFERENCE SOURCE 1 OF SPEED Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 1 REF1 SPD LOCAL Reference source 1 of speed NONE Alt Al2 Al2 LOCAL MREF PMOT PID See Function for additional information LOCAL YES allows selecting the reference source 1 of speed Possible reference sources are the following ones NONE Reference so
192. figured in this option the set limits Active in Pump Control mode only Verify the wiring of digital input A contact has activated to indicate that there is An external trip has been produced by opening a gh F67 LOW WATER contact on the digital input Active in Pump Control by lack of water Verity the conditions of the mode only installation Verify the wiring of digital input Power supply of the fans has been overheated F53 INTRNAL The limit of internal temperature of the electronics TEMP chamber has been exceeded FAULT MESSAGES DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS 241 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS DISPLAY POSSIBLE CAUSE ACTIONS e Check if the pump of the installation is not F68 The pump is operating with no load operating with no water CAVIT UNDERL Settings of the drive in protections group G25 6 are Verify the settings of the parameters referred to the incorrect cavitation protection depending on the installation Check if the pump has water The digital input configured as flow detection Check if the flow detector has water and is indicates absence of the same one connected correctly Check the settings in group G25 6 F69 FLOW SWITCH IRRIGAT TRIP equipment are correct F71 CYCLING The drive shows several start stop cycles wake Verify possible leakages in the installation up sleep in a short time Verify the settings of this protection in group G25 6 Verify the water leve
193. for the selection of 6 DIGITL IN 2 63 i configuration multiple setpoints 2 64 1 7 Multi function Digital Input 64 gt SETPONT PIN2 middle bit configuration for the selection of 7 DIGITL IN 3 64 i configuration multiple setpoints E G4 1 8 Multi function Digital Input 4 65 gt SETPONT PIN3 high bit configuration for the selection of 8 DIGITL IN 4 65 configuration multiple setpoints G4 Inputs 54 3 Analogue Input 2 G4 3 1 To enable sensor of Analogue Y YES 5 li allows enabling the sensor of the Analogue Input 2 Input 2 that will be used for PID feedback 2 SENSOR 2 Bar gt These units must be set according to type of sensor that user will use in the installation 3 AIN2 FORMAT mA 64 3 3 Analogue Input 2 Format mA gt These units must be set according to the type of sensor that user will use in the installation 64 3 4 Minimum range of Analogue Input 4mA 3 These units must be set according to the type of sensor 4 INmin2 4mA i 2 that user will use in the installation 5 Smi2 0 0Bar 64 3 5 Minimum range of sensor 2 0 0Bar gt This range must be set according to the type of sensor that user will use in the installation 6INmax2 20mA G4 3 6 Maximum range of Analogue Input 20 gt These units must be set according to the type of sensor 2 that user will use in the installation 7 5 2 410 0 G4 3 7 Maximum range of sensor 2 Pt range be 59 according to
194. function for Comparator 3 set to option 11 gt SPEED LIMIT 2 Commands to operate out of these limits are restricted to those limits See figure 10 41 CURRENT LIMIT 5ILIMITZ A Output current limit 0 25 In to 1 50 In depending on the drive capacity YES 144 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function Note allows setting the output current limit Motor current will be within this programmed limit When this protection is active the drive status of current limitation ILT is displayed In normal operation status avoid adjusting values very lower than value of motor rated current since several effects torque boost settings fast acceleration and deceleration can produce false results We do not recommend that current limit works constantly in applications when the motor is at steady status Damage may occur to the motor and the torque variations can affect the load Current limit should work only when an overload occurs or due to excessive acceleration and deceleration values or because motor data details are entered incorrectly G10 6 TRIP TIME BECAUSE OF CURRENT LIMIT Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 6 I LIM TO OFF Trip time because of current limit 0 to 60s OFF 61 OFF YES It allows setting the trip time because of current limit has been reached This parameter provides with the possibility of tripp
195. g the fault F57 PUMP OVERLOA We can set the value for a low pass filter to read the current in order to avoid oscillations by means of the parameter G11 12 G11 12 FILTER FOR PUMP OVERLOAD Screen 12 FILZOFF Extended info PMP OVL FILTER Description Filter for pump overload Range OFF 0 1 to 5s Default value OFF Set on run YES 150 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function allows setting the value of the low pass filter in order to avoid oscillations when the Output current of the drive is read The overload protection is a combination of this parameter together with parameters G11 11 gt Pump overload level and G11 13 gt Trip delay time because of pump overload When the output current of the drive is higher than the current set in parameter G11 11 during the time adjusted in parameter G11 13 the drive turns off its output generating the fault F57 PUMP OVERLOA G11 13 TRIP DELAY TIME BECAUSE OF PUMP OVERLOAD Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 13 Povl DLY OFF PMP OVERLOAD DLY Trip delay time because of pump overload 0 249s OFF 250 OFF YES It allows setting a delay time to generate the drive trip because of pump overload The overload protection is a combination of this parameter together with parameters G11 11 gt Pump overload level and G11 12 3 Filter for pump overload
196. g of the output speed This is the standard setting when the PID is used for an application of constant pressure control If the pressure decreases feedback signal due to a higher demand it is required to increase the pump speed to keep constant the pressure in the system Y YES PID output inversion enabled In this case the PID regulator response when the feedback signal is falling down is a reduction of the output speed For example this operation is typical for a temperature control by means of PID mode A reduction of the temperature feedback signal due to a lower demand requires that the speed of the fan is reduced to keep the temperature 196 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 20 9 Subgroup 25 3 525 3 Start Conditions General considerations for starting conditions During the setpoint ramp neither the conditions for the activation of fixed pumps nor the conditions for sleep mode will be considered Only when the drive is in regulation mode see parameter G25 7 4 gt Setpoint ramp for additional information those conditions will be considered During the bypass process connection of fixed pumps these conditions will be not considered either G25 3 1 WAKE UP LEVEL OF THE DRIVE Screen 1 LP Pon 0 0 Extended info AWAKENING LEVEL Description Wake up level of the drive Range 0 0 10096 of setpoint value Default value 0 096 Set on run YES Function It allows settin
197. g the wake up level of the drive It is set as percentage of the PID setpoint For example if the PID setpoint is 5Bar and the value set in this parameter is 10 then 1096 of 5 is 0 5 and because it is a differential value then we are placing the wake up level below 4 5Bar 5Bar 0 5 4 5Bar DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 197 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS FEEDBACK Engineer Units ecce A eqe P aaa TEE TE EI EE EEE Dee 5222200 UTE DOM ty t b t ts ls ty MOTOR SPEED STEADY SPEED b t G2541 Na 101 GSAT i Merle TIME L t t DRIVE PUMP A E ou T 3 OFF li t b t ts ts lr 25 3 1 gt Wake up level of the drive 625 4 1 gt Delay time before activating sleep mode G25 4 2 9 Sleep speed for local setpoint 1 NOTE For this example we have taken as stop condition of the drive pump sleep mode activation a speed value concretely the sleep speed associated to the local setpoint 1 But the stop condition can be any one of the remain speeds associated to each one of the PID local setpoints in case of the stop condition is the speed signal or can also be the flow detection the flow level or the output current level SD70ITCCOO25BI Figure 10 46 Activation and deactivation of Sleep Mode G25 3 2 START SPEED FOR THE FIXED PUMPS Screen 2 FP SpON 90 0 Extended info FIX PMP STAR SPD Descript
198. gs Speed limit 1 reached Motor speed has reached speed limit 1 Speed limit 2 reached Motor speed has reached speed limit 2 High input voltage STATUS MESSAGES 39 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 9 VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP 60 These parameters constantly indicate the input signal status and dynamic parameter status of the SD700 Visualization lines are the second and the third lines The user can select the parameter to be displayed in each line from the different visualization options To select a display parameter you should move to the cursor to the second or third line For this you need to press ESC IT H key for approx two seconds The cursor moves from one line to the next Once located on the second or third line you can navigate like the programming line line 4 and select the desired parameter to be displayed Once selected these parameters are saved into memory These parameters are then displayed on lines 2 and 3 whenever the drive is powered up Thanks to these lines user can display desired parameters and obtain additional information easily Visualization Lines 304 3838 gi MENU OPTIONS These lines show specific parameters that can be useful for the user SD7OITCOO19CI Figure 9 1 Visualization Lines Description 9 1 Parameters SV 1 Motor Visualization Screen 1 Unis Description 0 Sp Ref 100 female It shows the preset reference value of speed which
199. gure 10 26 Start by SPIN of drive when input power is lost and restored again 7 5 START MODE 2 Screen 5 START 2 RAMP Description Start mode 2 definition Range RAMP SPIN Default value RAMP Set on run YES DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 105 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Function It allows selecting the alternative start mode of the motor See parameter G7 4 gt Start mode to obtain information about selection options See figures 10 26 and 10 27 Note Start mode 2 alternative start mode is selected through a digital input configured with option 22 gt START MODE 2 in parameter G4 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 gt Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration G7 6 START DELAY TIME Screen 6 START DLY OFF Extended info DELAY TO START Description Start delay time Range OFF 0 6500s Default value OFF Set on run YES Function allows setting a delay time from the drive receives the start command to begin the motor starting See figure 10 27 G7 7 STOP DELAY TIME Screen 7 STOP DLY OFF Extended info DELAY TO STOP Description Stop delay time Range OFF 0 6500s Default value OFF Set on run YES Function allows setting a delay time from the drive receives the stop command to begin the motor stopping See figure 10 27 106 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 SPEED REFERENC
200. h option 28 gt PUMP CNTRL to control fixed pumps If the pump associated to this relay is not required we recommend you disable it from this parameter In this way the relay can be configured for other uses N 3 NO To disable the fixed pump associated to the Output Relay 1 The relay is configured with the option 00 ALWAYS OFF and free configuration is allowed for it Y gt YES To enable the fixed pump associated to the Output Relay 1 The relay is configured with the option 28 gt PUMP CNTRL and free configuration is not allowed for it G25 9 2 TO ENABLE FIXED PUMP ASSOCIATED TO OUTPUT RELAY 2 Screen 2 ENABLE PUMP2 N Description To enable the fixed pump associated to the Output Relay 2 pump 2 Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run YES Function It allows setting enabling or disabling the fixed pump associated to the Output Relay 2 If this parameter is set to Y when activating pump control in parameter G1 7 Program activation option PUMP and configuring one digital parameter G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 gt Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration with option 53 gt FIX PUMP2 FLT the Output Relay 1 is configured with option 28 gt PUMP CNTRL to control fixed pumps If the pump associated to this relay is not required we recommend you disable it from this parameter In this way the relay
201. han the value set in this parameter and additionally OFF delay time set in G9 2 8 has elapsed If after the OFF condition is given this one disappears before elapsing OFF delay time the output of the comparator will be not deactivated See figure 10 38 This parameter is only displayed if comparator 2 is set to normal mode parameter G9 2 2 gt Type selection for comparator 2 set to 0 Normal G9 2 8 OFF DELAY TIME FOR COMPARATOR 2 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 8 T C2 OF 0 0s C2 DEACTIV DELAY OFF delay time to deactivate comparator 2 0 0 999s 0 0s YES It allows setting a timer to deactivate the output of the comparator 2 When the deactivation condition of the output signal of comparator 2 is given in normal or window mode the timer delays the deactivation of this signal for the time set in this parameter If after the OFF condition is given this one disappears before elapsing OFF delay time the output of the comparator will be not deactivated See figures 10 38 10 39 and 10 40 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 137 SDRIVE 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G9 2 9 SELECTION OF OUTPUT FUNCTION FOR COMPARATOR 2 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 9 SEL FUNT C2 00 Selection of the output function for the comparator 2 00 11 00 YES allows user to select which function will be activated by compara
202. hange from current limit 1 set in G10 5 to current limit 2 set in G10 7 Additionally it is possible to select the alternative current limit 2 by using one digital input parameters G4 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration 6 set to option 23 CURRENT LIMI2 G10 9 TORQUE LIMIT Screen 9 MAX TOR 150 Extended info Description Torque limit Range 250 to 250 Default value 150 Set on run YES Function It allows setting a torque limit value This value is the maximum motor torque that the drive will allow the motor to supply to the load Note In applications with low and medium loads clean water pumps fans etc where high torque is not required default value is enough Nevertheless in applications with high load mills heavy tool etc you must increase the torque limit to allow that drive reaches the torque values required by the load at specific moments G10 10 TRIP TIME BECAUSE OF TORQUE LIMIT Screen 10 T LIM TO OFF Extended info Description Trip time because of torque limit Range 0 to 60s OFF 61 Default value OFF Set on run YES Function allows setting the trip time because of torque limit has been reached This parameter provides with the possibility of tripping the drive automatically if torque limit Set in G10 9 has been reached during a time set in this parameter G10 11 TO ENABLE SPEED INVERSION Sc
203. he reference source of speed is set to LOCAL in parameter G3 1 gt Reference source 1 of speed or G3 2 3 Reference source 2 of speed depending on the reference source selected 70 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 4 Group 4 G4 Inputs 10 4 1 Subgroup 4 1 4 1 Digital Inputs G4 1 1 MAIN CONTROL MODE Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 1 CNTROL MODE1 1 Main control mode 0 3 See Function for additional information 1 NO allows user to set the main control mode of the drive to give the orders that drive it Start Stop Reset The configuration options of the main control mode are 0 NONE Control mode 1 is not operative 1 3 LOCAL Drive control is realized from keypad this is the signals that control it is given through the keypad of the drive itself 2 REMOTE Drive control is realized through control terminals this is by activating or deactivating signals connected to the control terminals of the drive SERIAL COMMS Drive control is realized through communication bus this is signals that drive the drive will be sent through it G4 1 2 ALTERNATIVE CONTROL MODE Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 2 CNTROL MODE2 2 Alternative control mode 0 3 2 NO It allows user to set the secondary control mode or alternative of the drive to give
204. idered This parameter allows user to consider the PID error at the moment of stopping the fixed pumps At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the drive speed parameter G25 4 19 to G25 4 26 stop speeds assigned to each local setpoint depending on the selected local setpoint and the stop delay time for each fixed pump G25 4 14 for pump 1 G25 4 15 for pump 2 G25 4 16 for pump 3 G25 4 17 for pump 4 and G25 4 18 for pump 5 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 207 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 4 14 G25 4 18 FEEDBACK gta ee 625 4 13 REFERENCE eR eos wom Se eRe ee ie et eee Es 100 86 5 t SPEED 062554 La pendiente depende del valor 255 3 1 de aceleraci n 4 9 ajustado ON 854851 2225 0023 SENE mA e E E z 5 25 4 14 6254 18 tf aes DUE As N La x TIME gt t t DRIVE PUMP 1 ON TIME 1 E 2 ti b t t FIXED PUMP X gt ti tz 525 4 13 gt Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps 325 4 21 gt Stop speed 3 for one fixed pump 325 4 14 gt Delay time to stop fixed pump 1 325 4 22 gt Stop speed 4 for one fixed pump G25 4 15 gt Delay time to stop fixed pump 2 5
205. igher power units contact Power Electronics The motor nameplate must be checked to ensure that the selected variable speed drive is correct for each specific motor 16 POWER RANGE POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 3 2 Power Range at 690Vac HEAVY DUTY HEAVY DUTY Power kW 15096 Power kW 12096 5070062 6x x 8070080 8 1 2 0146 0551 313 4 50701056 105 90 157 13 10 15 5070210 6x x xx 5070460 6 40 40 60 55 5 60 SD706606xxxx 60 63 90 8 amp 5 80 90 SD707506xxxx 750 1710 1125 938 90 19725 SD709506xxxx 90 900 1425 8 100 125 Table 3 2 Table of power and current data at 690V NOTES Rated power for standard A C motors of 4 pole 1500rpm For higher power units contact Power Electronics motor nameplate must be checked to ensure that the selected variable speed drive is correct for each specific motor POWER RANGE 17 SDRIVE 700 4 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS 18 INPUT OUTPUT ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS MOTOR PROTECTIONS DRIVE PROTECTIONS DIGITAL INPUTS ANALOGUE INPUTS Power supply Input frequency Input current Input power factor Power factor Momentary power loss EMC input filter Harmonics filter Motor output voltage Output frequency Overload capacity Efficiency at full load Motor power kW Motor voltage Control method Carrie
206. iguration 67 111 STOP 1 RAMP lt gt RAMP SPIN 37 212 STOP 2 5 RAMP SPIN 1 67 313 BRK STP 2 OFF 3 OFF 0 lo 250 RAMP SPIN 7 414 5 G7 5 5 START 2 RAMP SPIN G7 6 6 STAR DLYZOFF OFF 0 to 65005 7 7 STOP OLY OFF gt OFF 0 to 6500s G7 8 8 STP SP N NzNo YzYes G7 8 9 OFFdly OFF 21 OFF 0 000 to 10 05 67 10 10 RUN AFTR VFL G7 111 11 SPNstr B OFF OFF 0 1 to 100 G8 Outputs 58 1 Output Relays G8 1 1 1 SEL RELAY 1202 00 31 5 OFF O1 ALWAYS 02 FAULTS 03 GENERAL FAULT 04 5 05 RUN 06 READY 07 2 SPEED 08 5 SPEED 09 SP DIRECTION 10 RESERVE 11 5 REF DIRECT 12 RESERVE 13 5 LIMIT 14 CURR LIMIT 15 VOLT LIMIT 16 LIMIT 172 COMPARATOR1 18 COMPARATOR2 19 COMPARATOR3 20 ACC DEC 2 21 REFERENCE 2 22 5 2 23 5 LIMIT 2 24 DC BRAKE 25 RESERVE 26 RESERVE 27 RESERVE 28 CNTRL 29 JOCKEY PUMP 30 PRIMING PUMP 31 51 CONDIT G8 1 2 2 T R1 ON 0 0s lt 4 00 999s G8 1 3 3 T R1 OFF 0 0s lt 00 9995 68 1 4 4 INVERT REL1 N N No 68 1 5 5 SEL RELAY 2 03 68 1 6 6 T R2 ON 0 0s lt gt 0 0 9995 G8 1 7 7 T R2 OFF 0 0s 0 0 9995 1 8 18 INVERT REL2zN N No Y Yes B SD70ITGO0058AI Figure 10 6 Parameters structure from group G7 t
207. imum speed limit 2 and maximum speed limit 2 alternative speed limits is realized through one of the digital inputs parameters from G4 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration set to option 20 SPEED LIMIT 2 or by means of the output function of one of the comparators parameters G9 1 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 1 69 2 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 2 and G9 3 9 Selection of output function for Comparator 3 set to option 11 gt SPEED LIMIT 2 Commands to operate out of these limits are restricted to those limits See figure 10 41 MAXIMUM SPEED LIMIT 2 4 MAX2 SP 100 SPEED MAX LIMIT2 Maximum speed limit 2 G10 3 96 to 425096 10096 YES It allows setting the maximum speed limit 2 that the drive can apply to the motor It is set in 96 of motor rated speed Selection of minimum speed limit 2 and maximum speed limit 2 alternative speed limits is realized through one of the digital inputs parameters from G4 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration set to option 20 SPEED LIMIT 2 or by means of the output function of one of the comparators parameters G9 1 9 3 Selection of output function for Comparator 1 G9 2 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 2 and G9 3 9 Selection of output
208. ined above The following table relates the inputs DI5 and DI6 to the selected multi reference PARAMETER REFERENCE DI5 06 MREF4 0 0 MREF5 0 1 MREF6 1 0 MREF 7 When you select option 3 MREF WIRES in parameter G4 1 4 Selection of digital inputs configuration digital inputs 4 5 and 6 are configured automatically to select multiple references 014 represents high bit and DI6 represents low bit The combination of these inputs offers the possibility of selecting up to seven different speed references or PID setpoints depending on the selected option explained above The following table relates the inputs DI4 DI5 and DI6 to the selected multi reference PARAMETER REFERENCE DI 05 06 G14 1 MREF 1 14 2 MREF2 01 1 O G14 3 MREF3 O 1 1 0144 MREF4 1 Gi45 5 1 O0 1 046 MREF6 1 1 0 In the following figure you can observe the selection of multi references according to the activation and or deactivation of the digital inputs DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 161 SDRIVE 700 SPEED 100 MREF 4 90 80 5 70 MREF 3 60 MREF 6 50 40 MREF 2 30 MREF 7 20 POWER ELECTRONICS BA MREF 1 10 TIME 0 t t 5 t ts 5 ty ts ty tio tr ty tu DI6 ON E E E IN 222 OFF
209. info C3 WINDOW LIMIT1 Description Limit 1 of the comparator 3 in window mode Range 250 to 250 Default value 0 Set run YES Function allows defining one of the limits to activate comparator 3 in window mode Output of comparator 3 will be activated when source signal of comparator 3 selected in G9 3 1 is within the limit 1 and the limit 2 set in G9 3 4 and additionally ON delay time set in G9 3 6 has elapsed If after the ON condition is given this one disappears before elapsing ON delay time the output of the comparator will be not activated See figures 10 39 and 10 40 Note This parameter is only displayed if comparator 3 is set to window mode parameter G9 3 2 gt Type selection for comparator 3 set to 1 Window 140 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G9 3 6 ON DELAY TIME FOR COMPARATOR 3 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 6 T C3 ON 0 0s C3 ACTIVAT DELAY ON delay time to activate comparator 3 0 0 999s 0 0s YES It allows setting a timer to activate the output of the comparator 3 When the activation condition of the output signal of comparator 3 is given in normal or window mode the timer delays the activation of this signal for the time set in this parameter If after the ON condition is given this one disappears before elapsing ON delay time the output of the comparator will be not a
210. ing the drive automatically if current limit set in G10 5 has been reached during a time set in this parameter G10 7 ALTERNATIVE CURRENT LIMIT Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 71 MAX2 Alternative current limit 0 25 In to 1 50 In depending on the drive capacity Sl It allows setting the alternative output current limit Motor current will be within this programmed limit When this protection is active the drive status of current limitation ILT is displayed In normal operation status avoid adjusting values very lower than value of motor rated current since several effects torque boost settings fast acceleration and deceleration can produce false results We do not recommend that current limit works constantly in applications when the motor is at steady status Damage may occur to the motor and the torque variations can affect the load Current limit should work only when an overload occurs or due to excessive acceleration and deceleration values or because motor data details are entered incorrectly G10 8 CHANGE SPEED FOR 2 ALTERNATIVE CURRENT LIMIT Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run 8 MI2 brSP OFF Change speed to alternative current limit OFF 0 1 to 250 OFF YES DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 145 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Function It allows setting the speed level to c
211. ion Start speed for the fixed pumps Range OFF 0 to 250 Default value 90 0 Set on run YES Function It allows setting the drive speed above of which the fixed pumps will start This one is an optional condition that can be disabled For that you must set this parameter value to 0 in that way any speed for above of this one is able to start the pumps This is the speed of the drive is not considered to start the fixed pumps So we force this condition to be fulfilled therefore it is not already a condition The value is set as percentage of motor speed 198 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 At the moment of starting of the fixed pumps additionally it will also considered the start delay time for each fixed pump parameter G25 3 4 to G25 3 8 and the PID error parameter G25 3 3 gt Minimum PID error to start the fixed pumps SPEED G25 3 4 G25 3 8 A M 625 32 DPE E one 1 The grade depends on the 1 set deceleration ie 25 5 1 value eden 02552 TIME f L t DRIVE PUMP ON TIME li t ti FIXED PUMP X ON TIME ty te ts G25 3 2 Start speed of fixed pumps 325 3 4 9 Delay time to start fixed pump 1 325 3 5 Delay time to start fixed pump 2 G25 3 6 gt Delay time to start fixed pump 3 25 3 7 gt Delay time to start fixed pump 4
212. ion ramp 1 according to the requirements of each process The setting is in acceleration units increase in of speed per second For example an acceleration ramp of 10 s means that the drive increases its speed by 10 of motor rated speed per each second elapsed If parameter G5 5 gt Speed for acceleration ramp change 15 set to OFF drive will search the reference speed by following the acceleration pattern set in this parameter See figures 10 22 and 10 23 For instance we have a motor of 50Hz and 4 poles with a synchronism rated speed of 1500rpm If we set the acceleration ramp to 5 s motor will take 20 seconds to reach the 100 of its speed 1500rpm from 0 motor is completely stopped at the beginning Note Usually it should be used slower settings supported by the application An acceleration ramp too much fast can cause equipment overload ILT status making that this ramp is ignored and replaced with a slower ramp automatically To get a better programming you must be realistic with these settings If you need fast accelerations and or decelerations we advise you to use slower settings firstly until the remaining operations are checked G5 2 DECELERATION RAMP 1 Screen 2 DECEL1 3 0 s Extended info INITIAL DECEL Description Deceleration ramp 1 Range 0 01 650 s Default value 3 096 8 Set on run YES Function It allows user to set the deceleration ramp 1 according to the requirements of each p
213. is applied to the motor speed MtrFreqg 0Hz Hz It shows the frequency being applied to the motor 0 Mtr Torge 0 0 M Motor torque shows the present torque applied to the motor It shows the power factor of the motor MtrPfatr 00 It shows if the motor PTC temperature sensor is connected PTC Motor 0 X PTC Connected 0 PTC Not Connected 2 Motor Temp 0 0 o Motor heat ss 22 motor temperature A level of 110 will cause 25 trip 40 VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP GO POWER ELECTRONICS 9 2 Parameters SV 2 Drive Visualization SDRIVE 700 Screen Units Descripion 1 O 390 390 390V It shows the input instantaneous voltage applied to the drive RS ST RT V Vol 390V 50 0 50 0 50 0Hz Bus vol 540V IGBT Temp 23 Drive Temp 26 C It shows the average input voltage to the drive 9 3 Parameters SV 3 External Visualization ANLG IN1 0 0V AIN1 Refr 0 00 AIN1 S 40 00 ANLG IN2 0 0V AOUT2 Refer 0 0 Input DG 000000 0 Relays X 0 X Speed M 0 000m s Unis Description It shows the value of Analogue Input 1 0 It shows the value or the PID reference proportional to Analogue Input 1 in percentage It shows the value of sensor 1 associated to the Analogue Input 1 It shows the value of the Analogue Input 2 0 2 It shows the value o
214. is referred and the PID error G25 4 13 Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps See figure 10 50 G25 4 20 STOP SPEED 2 FOR ONE FIXED PUMP Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 20 SPD2o0f 70 0 Stop speed for one fixed pump associated to the local setpoint 2 0 0 to 250 0 0 YES It allows setting the speed value below which the drive must remain for stopping fixed pump whenever the operating setpoint is the local setpoint 2 set in parameter G25 1 6 gt Local setpoint 2 for PID See Function in parameter G25 4 19 gt Stop speed 1 for one fixed pump for additional information At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the stop delay time for each fixed pump parameter G25 4 14 to G25 4 18 depending on the what fixed is referred and the PID error G25 4 13 gt Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps See figure 10 50 G25 4 21 STOP SPEED 3 FOR ONE FIXED PUMP Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 21 SPD30f 70 0 FPUMP STP SPEED3 Stop speed for one fixed pump associated to the local setpoint 3 0 0 to 250 0 0 YES It allows setting the soeed value below which the drive must remain for stopping a fixed pump whenever the operating setpoint is the local setpoint 3 set in parameter G25 1 7 gt Local setpoint 3 for PID See Fu
215. istory Fault storage It shows a list of the last five faults in chronological order The most recent fault appears in first place G13 2 Each time that a faults occurs the drive shows the fault in general screen G13 1 After the fault is solved and reset this fault will be shifted to the first position of fault register G13 2 The previous faults will shift down one position The oldest fault message stored G13 6 gt Register 5 of fault history will be lost By pressing key two seconds approximately you can access to the extended information that shows the fault order FIFTH FAULT Fxx upto FIRST FAULT Fxx 158 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Next all of the faults are shown FONOFAULT 33 F33SCRL3 1 F1ILIMFLT 34 F34IGBT TEMP 2 F2VLIMFLT 35 5 L1 LOSS 3 F3PDINTFLT 36 F36 PHSEL2LOSS 4 F4U DESAT 37 F387 PHSE L3 LOSS 5 F5U DESAT 40 F40EXT PTC 6 gt F6V DESAT 41 F41 COMMS TRIP 7 F7V DESAT 42 F42 AIN1 LOSS 8 F8W DESAT 43 F43 AIN2LOSS 9 F9W DESAT 44 F44CAL FLT 10 10 NEG DESAT 45 45 STOP T O 11 11 VIN LOSS 46 4 F46 EEPROM FLT 12 F121lMBV IN 47 F47 COMMS T O 13 gt 48 F48 SPI COM 14 FI4LWVIN 49 49 SPD LIMIT 15 F15 CURL Vac 50 gt 50 PSU FAULT 16 gt 16 1 Vac 51 F51 SCR TEMP 17 F17 LW Vdc 52 F52 SUPPLY FAN 18 F18 IMB V OUT 53 53 INTR
216. ive dust dry or wet and water drops As an electronic device the SD700 will have a longer life if the installation is done properly in a clean place with a correct ventilation system and protected from mechanical vibrations 2 3 Drive Mounting SD700 should be mounted vertically It should be well fastened through the anchorages designed for this to avoid any movement If the drive is installed inside a cabinet the heated air must be vented out of the cabinet to ensure correct cooling To avoid such a situation it is also necessary to leave enough horizontal and vertical space with any adjacent equipment We recommend cooling the cabinet to evacuate dissipated heat 2 4 Power Connection and Control Wiring 2 4 1 Power Wiring Input terminals drive supply and output terminals motor supply are accessible from the bottom SD700 is designed for working with 3 phase supply with the neutral connected to the earth It is not necessary to use power factor correction capacitors at the SD700 input and do not connect them to the output of the drive Line voltage should be connected to L1 L2 and L3 terminals and earth will be connected to the terminals assigned for this function Motor should be connected to the terminals indicated as U V and W SD70ITPOO01CE Figure 2 1 Power Connection Detail 14 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 We recommend installing the drive according to the following connecti
217. ive is possible through RS232 terminals RS485 terminals or USB port Note Do not modify this parameter if is not necessary DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 177 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 19 1 Subgroup 20 3 20 3 Modbus G20 3 1 COMMUNICATION ADDRESS Screen 1 COMMS ADDR 10 Extended info COMM ADDRESS Description Drive address for communication Range 1 240 Default value 10 Set on run YES Function allows assigning an identification address to the drive for communicating with it from the network If communication is required with several drives different address 15 required for each unit G20 3 2 COMMUNICATION SPEED Screen 2 BAUDS 4800 Description Communication speed Range 1200 2400 4800 9600 Default value 4800 Set on run YES Function It is data transmission speed It allows setting transmission rating for MODBUS serial communications This transmission rating must be the same than the rating of the master of the communication bus on which the drive is integrated G20 3 3 COMMUNICATION PARITY Screen 3 PARITY NONE Description Selection of communication parity Range EVEN NONE ODD Default value NINGUN Set on run YES Function It allows setting the parity of MODBUS serial communication It is used for data validation If you do not want to validate data set this parameter to NONE Parity selection must be the same than the parity of the master of the communication bus on whi
218. l in the aspiration circuit well F72 PRES SW Breakage or low water in aspiration circuit tank etc Verify the status of the pressure switch An external trip to the drive has been produced Verify your irrigating equipment and check if the F70IRRIGATORF closing a contact on the digital input configured as connections between the drive and the irrigating 11 3 Maintenance SD700 drives consist of many electronic parts such as semiconductor devices Temperature humidity vibration and deteriorated components can reduce its efficiency To avoid any possible irregularity we recommend making periodic inspections 11 3 1 Warnings Be sure to remove the input power while performing maintenance Be sure to perform maintenance after checking the DC Link capacitor has discharged Check that the voltage between terminals VDC VDC is below DC 30V The bus capacitors in the drive main circuit can still be charged even after the power is turned off The correct output voltage of the drive can only be measured by using an RMS voltage meter Others voltage meters including digital voltage meters are likely to display incorrect values caused by the high frequency PWM output voltage of the drive 11 3 2 Routine inspection Be sure to check the following points before handling the drive Installation site conditions Drive cooling system conditions Excessive vibrations Excessive overheating 242 FAULT
219. lection for the Analogue Output 1 OFF 0 0 20 05 OFF YES It allows selecting a filter for the Analogue Output 1 value and in the same time setting a value Sometimes if the analogue signal appears slightly unstable improved stability and response can be achieved with the addition of a suitable filter value Filter use can add a slight delay to the analogue output signal G8 2 6 MODE SELECTION FOR ANALOGUE OUTPUT 2 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 6 ANLG OUT2 02 Mode selection for the Analogue Output 2 00 27 01 It allows user to configure the Analogue Input 2 For this see parameter G8 2 1 gt Mode selection for Analogue Output 1 where different configuration options are listed and explained G8 2 FORMAT SELECTION FOR ANALOGUE OUTPUT 2 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 7 FORMT 2 4 20mA Format selection for the Analogue Output 2 0 10 0 20 4 20 4 20mA NO It allows configuring the Analogue Output 1 in one of four possible formats according to the system requirements G8 2 8 LOW RANGE SELECTION OF ANALOGUE OUTPUT 2 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 8 MIN2 RNG 0 Low range selection of Analogue Output 2 250 to 250 0 YES It allows setting the minimum level of the Analogue Output 2 Minimum value setting can be higher than the val
220. llable margins display shows the warning message ILT Adjusting this parameter can improve the stability of the current limit function considering the motor Slip Note We only recommend setting this value when limitation current action is unstable Usually this value must be set to the motor rated slip A low value will improve the Stability although the current limit action will operate earlier G19 2 9 INITIAL FREQUENCY Screen 9 STR FRQ 0 0 Extended info Description Starting initial frequency Range 0 0 100 Default value 0 0 Set on run YES Function allows setting an initial frequency that will be applied at the moment of the drive starting G19 2 10 FREQUENCY V Hz CHANGE Screen 10 V H BREK OFF Extended info Description Frequency V Hz change Range OFF 0 0 0 1 100 Default value OFF Set on run YES Function It allows a frequency value below which a special algorithm will be implemented This algorithm will improve the instability of the drive In some applications during a certain frequency range excessive current oscillation may be generated and this may cause the drive trip in overcurrent or over voltage protections In order to avoid these oscillations the value of this parameter must be decreased down to a certain frequency value below which a special algorithm to improve the instability of the drive will be implemented as mentioned before This parameter operates together with
221. lly in the parameters G4 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 8 Multi function Digital Input 4 configuration Note To configure this mode as well as selecting this option it is necessary to realize one of the settings described below 1 Choice of multi references as speed references We should set the parameter G3 1 gt Reference source 1 of speed and or G3 2 gt Reference source 2 of speed with option MREF 2 Choice of multi references as PID references First we should enable the PID regulator in G3 1 gt Reference source 1 of speed and or G3 2 Reference source 2 of speed option PID and next select option MREF in parameter 26 1 gt Source selection for introducing reference signal 3 MREF WIRES Three of the six digital inputs 014 015 and 016 are configured to select the settings of the multiple references getting up to 7 references set before These ones can be speed references or PID references See group G14 MULTI REFERENCES The three remaining inputs DI1 to DI3 can be programmed individually in the parameters G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 7 Multi function Digital Input configuration Note To configure this mode as well as selecting this option it is necessary to realize one of the settings described below 1 Choice of the multi references as speed references We shoul
222. lows selecting the units of measurement for reading the flow G4 4 2 FLOWMETER CONFIGURATION Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 2 Pls s 1001 5 Flowmeter configuration 0 to 32760 Flow Units 1001 5 YES It allows setting the amount of the fluid per pulse received For example if setting is 100l s default value and the present flow is 5001 5 5 pulses per second will be received G4 4 3 MAXIMUM RANGE OF FLOWMETER Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 3 M 10001 6 FLOW MAX RANGE Maximum range of flowmeter 0 to 32760 Flow Units 1000l s YES It allows setting the maximum range of the flowmeter It is used to calculate the reset level of the flow control algorithm The percentage set in G25 10 4 gt Flow percentage to reset algorithm is linked to the value set in this parameter For example if 100 units are set as maximum range in this parameter and we want that the reset level of the flow algorithm is below 30 units then G25 10 4 should be set to 3096 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 89 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 5 Group 5 G5 Acceleration and Deceleration Ramps G5 1 ACCELERATION RAMP 1 Screen 1 ACCE1 3 0 s Extended info INITIAL ACCEL Description Acceleration ramp 1 Range 0 01 650 s Default value 3 096 8 Set on run YES Function It allows user to set the accelerat
223. lows setting the flow level to reset the flow limitation algorithm When the level of the instantaneous read in the source set in parameter G25 10 1 is below the value set in this parameter the flow limitation algorithm will give the PID regulator the control is set in of the range of analogue input 1 or 2 in case of selecting option 0 gt or 1 3 Al2 respectively in parameter G25 10 1 gt Flow reading source or it is set in of the value set in the parameter G4 4 3 Maximum range of flow meter in case of selecting the option 2 PULSE as flow reading source in parameter G25 10 1 G25 10 5 DECELERATION RAMP DURING ALGORITHM Screen 5 DECrat 2 0 s Extended info FLOW DECEL RATE Description Deceleration ramp during the flow limitation algorithm Range 0 0 to 250 s Default value 2 0 5 YES Function It allows setting the deceleration ramp that will be applied by the drive to decrease the pump speed until the read flow is lower than the flow set in parameter G25 10 2 3 Maximum allowed flow minus the margin set in G25 10 3 Offset percentage over maximum flow as offset or deviation margin G25 10 6 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT OF INSTANTANEOUS FLOW Screen 6 UNIT FLOW ZI s Description Units of measurement of instantaneous flow Range Default value I s Set on run Function Read only parameter that shows the units of measurement of the instantaneous flow th
224. ltage Units Equipment rated voltage 10 gt DC BUS Signal proportional to the DC Bus voltage Units Motor voltage x 1 414 11 gt DRIVE TEMP Signal proportional to the drive temperature Units Drive temperature 118 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 12 9 SPEED REF Signal proportional to the speed reference Units Motor speed 13 gt Reserved Reserved for future use 14 gt PID REFERENCE Signal proportional to the reference in PID mode Units 96 15 gt PID FEEDBACK Signal proportional to the feedback in PID mode Units 90 16 3 PID ERROR Signal proportional to the error difference between reference signal feedback signal in PID mode Units 96 17 gt INPUT 1 Analogue Input 1 signal is transferred to analogue output Units 18 3 ANLG INPUT 2 Analogue Input 2 signal is transferred to analogue output Units 19 gt ANLG INPUT 1 2 Signal proportional to the addition of the two inputs This allows course and fine setting of the signal Units 20 CURRENT FLOW Analogue signal proportional to the read flow through analogue input or pulse input Units 96 21 MAX SCALE It forces the output to the maximum value Units 10096 bottom scale 22 3 ABSOLUT SPEED Signal proportional to the motor speed without sign absolute value Units Motor speed 27 MACRO PUMP OV Pump OFF 10V Pump ON Units Note
225. m 68 2 3 gt Low range selection of analogue output 1 44 68 2 4 gt High range selection of analogue output 1 ov 2 6V 10V G8 2 2 0 10 SD70ITCCOO12AI Figure 10 33 Example 1 Analogue Output 1 with format 0 10V DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 123 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Example 2 Like previous example now the same motor is rotating at 1440rpm inverse direction rotation with a range from 3000rpm to 3000 and 1500rpm as rated speed Analogue Output 1 will be configured as 10V output Set mode of Analogue Output 1 in G8 2 1 to 01 9 SPEED MOTOR motor speed Select format for Analogue Output 1 G8 2 2 to 10 Set minimum and maximum values high range and low range of the Analogue Output 1 scale in parameters G8 2 3 for low range and G8 2 4 for high range G8 2 3 gt 200 since 3000rpm is 200 of the motor rated speed 1500rpm G8 2 4 gt 200 since 3000rpm is 200 of the motor rated speed 1500rpm Then 10 10 M _ _1440 0 4 8V 3000 3000 2i With this setting the value of Analogue Output 1 will be 4 8V when motor rotates in inverse direction at 1440rpm G8 2 3 G8 2 4 20096 4440rpm 20096 5 GB 2 2 gt Format selection for analogue output 1 3000rpm T 0 1500 3000rpm 68 2 3 Low range selection of analogue output 1 4 Li GB 2 4 gt High range selection of analogue output 1 40 4 8V
226. m subgroup S9 2 G9 to subgroup S9 3 G9 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS SDRIVE 700 53 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 610 Limits G10 1 1 SP 0 00 lt gt 250 to Max speed 1 610 2 12 MAX1 SP 100 Min speed 1 to 250 610 3 3 2 SP 100 lt gt 250 to Max speed 2 610 414 2 SP 100 lt x Min speed 2 to 250 G10 5 SI 0 25 to 1 50In 610 6 61 LIM TO OFF OFF 0 ta 605 lt gt G10 8 8 brSP OFF lt A 0 1 to 250 G10 9 9 MAX TOR 150 lt gt 2509 to 250 Git 10TLIMTOsOFF 2 0 0 608 OFF 61 j G10 11 11 INVERSION N G11 Protections 611 111 5P LIM 23 0 0 60s OFF 61 G11 2 2 STOP OFF 0 0 to 9995 G11 3 3 GND I LIMIT 10 OFF 0 30 In Y Yes G11 4 4 LOW VOLT2360V 323 425V G11 5 5 LOW V TOz5 0s lt gt 0 0 60s OFF 61 611 6 6 HIGH VOLT 440V 418 550V 611 7 7 HIV TOs5 0s 0 0 605 1 6G11 8 8 VO 1 0s 611 3 3 LOW V BHY 0 1 FAULTS 2 5 11 10 10 PTC EXT Y Yes 611 11 11 PUMP OV 20 0A G11 12 12 PMovI FIL OFF OFF 0 1 to 55 611 13 13 Povl DLY OFF 0 2495 OFF 250 0 0 10s OFF 10 1 e O NO FAULT C emuo ewan 50701 0062 Y Yes
227. me 4 Connections BASE SECTION POWER CONNECTIONS BACK SIDE VIEW POWER CONNECTIONS 123 50700 00005 Figure 6 1 Power connections location for 5070150 5x 5070170 5x and 5070105 6x 26 CONNECTION TERMINALS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 6 1 2 Frame 5 Connections SIDE VIEW POWER NNECTIONS BASE SECTION CONNECTIONS POWER CONNECTIONS 50700 00006 Figure 6 2 Power connections location for 5070210 5 5070275 5x and 5070130 6 5070170 6x CONNECTION TERMINALS 27 80 700 POWERELECTRONCCS 6 1 3 Frame 6 Connections BASE SECTION POWER CONNECTIONS BACK SIDE VIEW POWER CONNECTIONS 393 3 50700 0007 Figure 6 3 Power connections location for SD70330 5x SD70460 6x and SD70210 6x SD70320 6 1 4 Frame 7 Connections 392 2 208 5 331 25 BASE SECTION POWER CONNECTIONS SIDE VIEW POWER CONNECTIONS 396 52 992 2 DEM 215 5 Figure 6 4 Power connections location for 5070580 5x 5070720 5 5070385 6x 5070460 SDTODTDOOOSAE 28 CONNECTION TERMINALS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 6 1 5 Frame 8 Connections SIDE VIEW SECTION POWER CONNECTIONS BASE SECTION 271 96 38 1 411092 POWER CONNECTIONS 5 70 0017 Figure 6 5 Power connections location for SD70840 5x SD70925 5x and SD70550 6x SD70660 6x 6 1 6 Frame 9 Connec
228. mp is starting and stopping continuously in cavitation pauses If the drive starts a number of times without relaxing for the time set in this parameter then the drive will trip because of fault F71 CYCLING also stopping the fixed pumps 222 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G25 6 21 CYCLE COUNTER Screen 21 CYCLE CNT 5 Extended info Description Cycle counter Range OFF 1 5 Default value 5 Set on run YES Function It allows setting the maximum number of allowed cycles without relaxing If this number is exceeded then trip will be generated Note Go to sleep and wake up is also considered a cycle DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 223 80 700 ELECTRONICS 10 20 13 Subgroup 25 7 525 7 Pipe Filling Process Setpoint Ramp G25 7 1 PRESSURE READING SOURCE Screen 1 PRESSU SOU PID Description Pressure reading source Range PID Alt Al2 See Function for additional information Default value PID Set on run YES Function It allows selecting the source for the reading of the pressure that determines the end of the pipe filling process parameter G25 7 3 The configurable options are the following ones PID Pressure reading from feedback signal of the PID Alt Pressure reading from Analogue Input 1 12 Pressure reading from Analogue Input 2 G25 7 2 SPEED FOR PIPE FILLING PROCESS Screen 2 FILL SP 70 0 Extended info P
229. n port via RS232 485 or USB X4 USB port Figure 6 10 Location and description of user connectors CONNECTION TERMINALS POWER ELECTRONICS 6 2 2 Control Wiring SDRIVE 700 The following figure provides an overview of the standard wiring of control terminals through the X1 and X2 user connectors X1 CONNECTOR Mutifunction Digital Inputs Factory Settings X2 CONNECTOR Common Terminal 24Vdc 3 06 Start Reset Stop 012 gt 00 Not used gt 00 Not used 3 00 Not used 015 00 Not used DI6 3 17 Control 2 NO Contact Common NC Contact NO Contact Common NC Contact 02 No Fault Common NC Contact Multifunction Relay Outputs Motor PTC Input Analogue Ref Signal 0 10Vdc Programmable V or mA Power supply common for Analogue Signal Analogue Reference Signal 0 20mA 4 20mA Programmable V or mA Power supply common for Analogue Signal Power supply for Analogue Signal 10Vdc 26 Programmable V or mA Common Terminal OVdc Terminal 24Vdc RS485 A Serial communication RS485 B Serial communication OVdc Terminal Serial communication RS232 Rx Serial communication RS232 Tx Serial communication 50700 0001 Figure 6 11 Example of standard wiring of control terminals Digital inputs can be configured individually or collectively Details on varying standard configurations are a
230. nal information G20 4 9 GATEWAY ADDRESS A Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 9 GATEWAY A 0 Gateway address A 0 255 0 YES It allows setting the field A of the Gateway address of the local network of the user This address is needed to the drive access to an external network This address must be provided by the network administrator of the own user The format of the Gateway address is the following one A B C D Therefore the setting of this address is realized by introducing a value in each parameter that configure the complete address this is by assigning a value to each one of the 4 parameters from parameter G20 4 9 Gateway address to parameter G20 4 12 gt Gateway address DY G20 4 10 GATEWAY ADDRESS B Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 10 GATEWAY 0 Gateway address B 0 255 0 YES It allows setting the field B of the Gateway address of the local network of the user This address is needed to the drive access to an external network This address must be provided by the network administrator of the own user See Function in parameter G20 4 9 Gateway address for additional information G20 4 11 GATEWAY ADDRESS C Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 11 GATEWAY 0 Gateway address 0 255 0 YES It allows setting the field C of the Gateway address o
231. nction in parameter G25 4 19 gt Stop speed 1 for one fixed pump for additional information At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the stop delay time for each fixed pump parameter G25 4 14 to G25 4 18 depending on the what fixed is referred and the PID error G25 4 13 gt Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps See figure 10 50 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 211 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 4 22 STOP SPEED 4 FOR ONE FIXED PUMP Screen 22 SPD4of 70 0 Extended info Description Stop speed for one fixed pump associated to the local setpoint 4 Range 0 0 to 250 Default value 70 0 Set on run YES Function allows setting the speed value below which the drive must remain for stopping a fixed pump whenever the operating setpoint is the local setpoint 4 set in parameter G25 1 8 gt Local setpoint 4 for PID See Function in parameter G25 4 19 gt Stop speed 1 for one fixed pump for additional information At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the stop delay time for each fixed pump parameter G25 4 14 to G25 4 18 depending on the what fixed is referred and the PID error G25 4 13 Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps See figure 10 50 G25 4 23 STOP SPEED 5 FOR ONE FIXED PUMP Screen 23 SPD5o0f 70 0 Extended info FPUMP STP SPEED5 Description Stop speed for
232. ng realized in G9 2 7 gt Deactivation value of comparator 2 in normal mode 1 Window Comparator 2 will be activated when signal is within the limit 1 setting realized in G9 2 5 gt Limit 1 for comparator 2 in window mode and limit 2 setting realized in G9 2 4 gt Limit 2 for comparator 2 in window mode and additionally limit 2 is higher than limit 1 If limit 2 is lower than limit 1 logical function of comparator output will be inverted See figure 10 37 to observe the behaviour of the comparator output for each operation mode G9 2 3 ACTIVATION VALUE OF COMPARATOR 2 IN NORMAL MODE Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run 3 SP C2 ON 100 C2 ACTIVAT LEVEL Activation value of comparator 2 in normal mode 250 to 250 100 YES DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 135 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Function It allows setting the activation value of the comparator 2 output Output of comparator 2 will be activated when source signal of comparator 2 selected in G9 2 1 is higher than the value set in this parameter and additionally ON delay time set in G9 2 6 has elapsed If after the ON condition is given this one disappears before elapsing ON delay time the output of the comparator will be not activated See figure 10 38 Note This parameter is only displayed if comparator 2 is set to normal mode parameter G9 2 2 Type selection for comparator 2 s
233. nge the wiring while the equipment is connected to the input power supply N CAUTION Changes of control wiring or bridges should be performed at least 10 minutes after disconnecting the input power and after checking the DC Link voltage is discharged with a meter below 30Vdc Otherwise you may get an electric shock Users access to the control board is via a series of terminals and plugs As standard the control board is fitted with terminals and plugs for control input and output connections display connection communication serial port RS232 RS485 communication USB port Optional boards can be fitted for additional control input SD70ITPO001CE outputs fibre optic input output encoder inputs serial communication interfaces dynamic braking control Figure 6 9 Control board of SD700 6 2 1 Connectors and J umpers Description A5 Optic Fiber Communication een drives X6 Dynamic Braking Unit connaction PERETI 111 Lt Ep XT Communication busses connection PROGNI DI 1 10 Connector for optional encoders board X2 Programmable d digital outputs X3 Keypad connection X8 Communication buses connection 1 Digital inputs PTC connection programmable analog inputs and outputs control power supply and X9 For optional serial communication inputs outputs board Jp4401 JP1104 To select communicatio
234. nstallation 252 COMMONLY USED CONFIGURATIONS POWER ELECTRONICS 12 6 2 Connections Drawing Terminals 1 and 2 start stop command NO status Terminals 1 and 3 setpoint pin 1 PID mode NO status Terminals 1 and 4 setpoint pin 2 PID mode NO status Terminals 1 and 5 setpoint pin 3 PID mode NO status SDRIVE 700 SETPT Digital Input 4 Digital Input 3 Digital Input 2 SETPONT PIN3 SETPONT PIN2 dl iE PIN 1 G25 15 10Bar SETPT1 0 0 625 16 2 0 SETPT2 SS G2517 308r SETPT3 0 X 0 625 18 40 SEPPIM 0 J X j xXx 6219 08 SEIPID X 0 J 0 G25110 60Bar SETPT6 X 0 X 625 11 70 SETPT7 0 625 1 12 80 8 Note 0 Not active and X Active X1 CONNECTOR 24V Usr DI Multifunction Digital Inputs Common Terminal 24Vde 011 gt 50 PMP START STP 012 gt 63 SETPONT 1 gt 64 SETPONT 2 014 gt 65 SETPONT PINS 015 gt 00 Not used Free programming 016 gt 00 Not used Free programming Motor PTC Input Feedback Signal 4 20 Programmable as V or mA Analogue Signal Common Common Terminal Common Terminal 24Vdc X2 CONNECTOR NO Contact Common NC Contact NO Contact Common NC Contact NO Contact Common NC Contact Multifunction Digital Outputs 5070 0007 1 Figure 12 5 Pressure Group Cont
235. ntrol source G8 1 5 gt Selection of Relay 2 control source and G8 1 9 gt Selection of Relay control source configured with the option 29 JOCKEY PUMP G25 9 8 START DELAY TIME FOR JOCKEY PUMP Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 8 JPon DLY 20s Start delay time for Jockey pump 0 6500s 205 YES It allows setting a delay time to start the Jockey pump This time will start elapsing after the condition to start this pump is fulfilled this is when the pressure is below the level set in parameter G25 9 7 gt Starting pressure of Jockey pump G25 9 9 STOPPING PRESSURE OF JOCKEY PUMP Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 9 JPof 0 0 Stopping pressure of Jockey pump 0 0 3276 Engineering Units 0 0 YES It allows setting the pressure level above which the Jockey pump will stop If the drive pump starts then the Jockey pump will stop automatically although the pressure level set in this parameter is not reached G25 9 10 BYPASS TIME FOR PRIMING PUMP Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 10 PRp BYP 300s PRIM PUM BYP DLY Bypass time for the Priming pump 0 1 6000s 300s YES It allows setting the bypass time for the Priming pump Once stopped the Priming pump and started the drive if the digital inp
236. o PFILL END DELAY Description Safety time for pipe filling process Range OFF20 1 9999min Default value 15m Set on run YES Function It allows setting a safety time to force the end of pipe filling process The pressure level set in parameter G25 7 3 9 Pressure for the end of pipe filling process together with the time set in this parameter are the conditions to end the pipe filling process The condition that is fulfilled before pressure or time will force the end of the pipe filling process changing the equipment from FILL status to setpoint ramp RAMP Note If this time is set to 0 the drive will not execute the pipe filling process G25 7 5 SETPOINT RAMP Screen 5 SPT RAMP 1 0Bar s Description Setpoint ramp Range 0 01 326 Engineering Units s Default value 1 0Bar s Set on run YES Function It allows setting the ramp that will be applied to increase the setpoint After finishing the pipe filling process or if this process has not been realized from the beginning the drive will adjust the setpoint value to the present value of the feedback signal provisionally Then the setpoint will be increased according to the ramp set in this parameter up to 5 below the real setpoint selected by user In that moment the drive will start the real regulation During the setpoint ramp the drive cannot go to sleep by no demand By setting a slow setpoint ramp we achieve a smooth increase of the mot
237. o subgroup S8 1 G8 50 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS a mmm mom 18 X G8 1 9 9 SEL RELAY 3 05 SDRIVE 700 OO ALWAYS OFF O1 ALWAYS 02 FAULTS 3 GENERAL FAULT 4 START 05 RUN O6 READY 07 ZERO SPEED 08 5 SPEED 09 SP DIRECTION 10 RESERVE 11 5 REF DIRECT 12 RESERVE 13 5P LIMIT 14 CURR LIMIT 15 VOLT LIMIT 16 LIMIT 17 COMPARATOR1 18 COMPARATOR2 19 COMPARATOR3 20 ACC DEC 2 21 REFERENCE 2 22 5 2 23 5P LIMIT 2 24 DC BRAKE 25 RESERVE 26 RESERVE 2T RESERVE 28 CNTRL 29 JOCKEY PUMP 30 PRIMING PUMP 31551 CONDIT 228 88 1 11711 T R3 OFF 0 0s 88 1 121 12 INVERT REL3 N 58 2 Analogue Outputs 08 2 1 1 ANLG OUT1 01 58 2 212 FORMT 124 20 68 2414 RNG 100 68 2 55 FILTER 1 OFF nS oF 25 0 0 9996 ie YzYes 01 5 MOTOR 02 CURRENT MOTOR 03 VOLTAGE MOTOR 04 POWER MOTOR 05 TORQUE MOTOR 08 MOTOR 07 MOTOR OB FREQUENCY MOTOR O9 INPUT VOLTAGE 10 06 BUS 11 DRIVE TEMP 12 5 REF 13 Reserved 14zPID REFERENCE 15 PID FEEDBACK 16zFID ERROR 17 ANLG INPUT 1 TB ANLG INPUT 2 19 ANLG INPUT 1 2 20 CURRENT FLOW 21 SCALE 22 ABSOLUT SPEED 27 MACRO PUMP 250 to 250 col OFF 0 0 to 20 05 SD70ITGOO059AI Figure 10 7 Parameters structure from subgroup S8 1 G8 to subgrou
238. o the Analogue Output 2 This analogue output is configured with the option 27 gt MACRO PUMP and free configuration is not allowed for it G25 9 6 ALTERNATION MODE OF FIXED PUMPS Screen 6 FP ALTER MOD 0 Description Alternation mode of fixed pumps Range 0 2 See Function for additional information Default value 0 Set run YES Function It allows selecting the alternation mode used by the drive to start the fixed pumps Options 0 3 LINEAR The drive will always start the fixed pumps by following the same sequence 1 2 3 and will stop them in the same way 1 2 3 no alternation 13 CYCLE The first pump to start will be the next one to the last stopped pump 2 DUTY SHARE The drive will try to make the operation times of all available pumps equal G25 9 7 STARTING PRESSURE OF JOCKEY PUMP Screen 7 JPon P 0 0Bar Extended info Description Starting pressure of Jockey pump Range 0 0 3276 Engineering Units Default value 0 Set run YES 230 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function It allows setting the pressure level below which the Jockey pump will start During periods of very low demand for example tank filling processor opening a couple of taps the Jockey pump will start to cover this demand This pump will only start if the drive is sleeping and additionally there is some output relay parameters G8 1 1 gt Selection of Relay 1 co
239. of Power Electronics Verify that the ambient conditions are proper for the equipment Be sure that there is nothing obstructing the cooling fans dust papers dirt in general and that these rotate correctly Disconnect and re connect the input power of the A fault in the microcontroller has occurred drive If the fault persists request technical assistance of Power Electronics An external trip has been produced by closing a 4 T 56 une Nod Verify the wiring of digital input EMERGEN STOP en on the digital input configured in this Ghack the installation High current used by the motor due to heavy load ity of th The load exceeds the capacity of the motor cooling under normal operating conditions F57 PUMP edt Check if the motor cooling is appropriate OVERLOA ete sete setting of the parameters related to overload pump overload in group G11 Phase loss of the motor or a fault in motor windings Verify the setting of minimum pressure level Check the operation of the low pressure switch F65 LOW Pressure reference is lower than the minimum detector PRESSURE pressure level Active in Pump Control mode only Check the status of the analogue inputs 1 and 2 in parameters SV3 1 and SV3 4 in displaying group GO An external trip has been produced by closing a Check if the pressure of the installation exceeds F66 HI PRESSURE contact on the digital input con
240. of parameter G12 5 Selection of fault 1 to be reset A CAUTION At the moment of selecting faults that can be reset you should pay special attention to option 1 gt ALL THE In this case the protections of the drive and the motor will be disabled It is not recommended select this option since the drive could try to reset internal trips causing serious damage to the drive itself DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 157 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 13 Group 13 G13 Fault History G13 1 SCREEN FOR GENERAL FAULT Screen 1 FO NO FAULT Extended info LAST FAULT FXX Description Screen for general fault Range Default value Set on run Function It allows visualizing last fault information Drive shows this screen in case of a trip has been produced in the equipment By pressing key two seconds approximately you can access to the extended information that shows the fault order LAST FAULT Fxx when fault is solved The equipment is reset by pressing the STOP RESET key from display or by using an external reset if it is connected Several faults can be reset automatically by using auto reset function see group G12 AUTO RESET G13 2 REGISTER 1 OF FAULT HISTORY Screen 2 FO NO FAULT Extended info FIFTH FAULT FXX Description Register 1 of fault history Range Default value gt Set on run Function lt allows visualizing the information of the fault stored in register 1 of fault h
241. oken pipe Although hardware or software conditions exist favourable comparison to trip because of minimum pressure fault the trip is not produced while the present motor speed is not lower than the speed set in this parameter if any of the enabled fixed pumps is not started either In short it is an additional safety measurement to guarantee the broken pipe detection with a higher reliability Note This parameter value is set in of motor rated speed G25 6 12 RESPONSE FROM OVER PRESSURE Screen 12 HP MODE PAUSE Description Response of the drive from over pressure situation Range PAUSE FAULT See Function for additional information Default value PAUSE Set on run YES Function It allows setting the response of the drive from over pressure situation PAUSE It will generate the stopping of the drive and next of fixed pumps PRESSURE PAUS will be displayed Once the high pressure condition disappears if the delay time after pause has elapsed the drive will start FAULT It will generate fault and next fixed pumps will be stopped In this case the visualization will be F66 HI PRESSURE G25 6 13 MAXIMUM PRESSURE LEVEL Screen 13 HP LEV 100Bar Extended info HIGH PRESS LEVEL Description Maximum pressure level Range 0 3276 Engineering Units Default value 100Bar Set on run YES Function It allows setting the pressure level above which the drive recognises a high pressure level by
242. ometer G5 11 gt Speed for changing the acceleration and deceleration ramp See group G5 ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION RAMPS for additional information about these parameters Note In this mode the speed reference set by the potentiometer will be memorized even if the motor is stopped and also if the power supply is lost Note For using this function it is necessary to set G3 1 gt Reference source 1 of speed or G3 2 3 Reference source 2 of speed with option PMOT according to the selected source We can observe the operation of the motorized potentiometer in the following figure TIME gt OFF gt t t 9 ti 8 COMMAND t t ti t TIME E t h ts 5 DIS gt Multi Function Digital Input 5 Assigned function Up Reference 06 gt Multi function Digital Input 6 Assigned function Down Reference 5070 0024 Figure 10 19 Motorized potentiometer operation 14 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Note 5 ERASAB It operates like option 4 gt MOTORIZED POT but when the motor is stopped or the power supply is lost the speed reference will not be memorized but the minimum reference value set in G10 1 gt Minimum speed limit 1 or G10 3 gt Minimum speed limit 2 will be taken DI5 Up it increases the speed reference Contact NO DI6 Down it decreases the speed referen
243. on INPUT POWER SUPPLY 3 PHASE PE 380 480Vac 50 60Hz SD70DTPO00034AI Figure 1 2 Power wiring connection Note is recommended to use an earth cross section equal or higher than active wires cross section N CAUTION Line voltage must never be connected to U V and W terminals Otherwise the drive will be damaged 2 4 2 2 4 3 Control Wiring Control wiring should be installed as far as possible from the power wiring If you have to pass the control wiring next to the power wiring it should do perpendicularly The cable should be screened and the shield should be connected to ground Do not use voltages of 24Vdc and 220Vac into the same cable Observations before Trial Run Before applying voltage we recommended to check that the power wiring is connected correctly and to verify that the connections are correctly fastened It is recommended to close the doors of SD700 before applying voltage the first time Before applying voltage to the drive and configuring it make sure the line voltage is compatible with drive power supply On the contrary the drive will be damaged After applying voltage to the drive verify the display is turned on and the status led of the DC bus is also illuminated Check line voltages when the display is lit If the drive does not read one of the 3 phases then check input power wiring Before starting the SD700 the parameters should be programmed correctly for proper operation
244. on run Function 4 LANG ESPANOL Selection of the user language ENGLISH ESPANOL DEUTSCH ESPANOL NO It allows user to select the language All of the screens parameters and configurable options for each parameter will appear in the language selected by user G1 5 PARAMETERS INITIALIZE Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 5 INITIALISE 0 Parameters initialize to default values 0 3 See Function for additional information 0 allows selecting the parameters that we desire to initialize back to the factory default values factory settings Options description 03 NOINIT Any parameter is initialized 1 3 USR PRMTR User parameters are only initialized this is all of the parameters groups except for the groups G2 MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA and G19 FINE TUNING 2 MTR PRMTR Motor data are only initialized this is parameters of the groups G2 and G19 ALL PRMTR All parameters of the drive are initialized DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 63 80 700 POWERELECTRONICS G1 6 TO HIDE SOME CONFIGURATION MENUS Screen 6 SHORT Menu NO Description To hide some configuration menus Range NO YES Default value NO Set on run NO Function When this parameter is active configuration menus are hidden Groups G1 OPTIONS MENU G10 LIMITS and Visualization groups are only visible G1 7 PROGRAM ACTIVATION Screen 7 PROG STANDAR Description
245. on the selected local setpoint and the PID error G25 4 13 gt Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps If time is too short overpressure can be generated in the system On the contrary if time is too long under pressure can be generated See figure 10 50 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 209 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 4 17 DELAY TIME TO STOP FIXED PUMP 4 1 Screen 17 FP T4 OF 10s Extended info FPUMP4 STP DELAY Description Delay time to stop the fixed pump 4 Analogue Output 1 Range 0 6000s Default value 10s Set on run YES Function It allows setting the delay time to stop the fixed pump associated to the Analogue Output 1 At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the drive speed parameter G25 4 19 to G25 4 26 stop speeds assigned to each local setpoint depending on the selected local setpoint and the PID error G25 4 13 gt Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps Note time is too short overpressure can be generated in the system On the contrary if time is too long under pressure can be generated See figure 10 50 G25 4 18 DELAY TIME TO STOP FIXED PUMP 5 2 Screen 18 5 OF 10s Extended info FPUMP5 STP DELAY Description Delay time to stop the fixed pump 5 Analogue Output 2 Range 0 60005 Default value 10s Set on run YES Function It allows setting the delay time to stop the fixed pump associated
246. onal information COMMONLY USED CONFIGURATIONS 249 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Note If the Pump Control program is selected and then de selected all of the Digital Inputs will be reset to mode 00 i e unused It will be necessary to individually configure Digital Input functionality to suit the application should this occur This guarantees safe installation and operation in order to prevent any external hardware causing damage to the equipment Note Digital outputs will be affected by pump control activation To select an auxiliary pump you must proceed like this o Set any free digital input to the options 52 FIX PUMP1 FLT 53 FIX PUMP2 FLT or 54 FIX PUMPS FLT o Enable the pump control in the corresponding parameter G25 9 1 G25 9 2 and G25 9 3 respectively To remove the configuration of that fixed pump and release the relay for other use you must Disable the pump control in the corresponding parameter G25 9 1 G25 9 2 and G25 9 3 respectively X1 CONNECTOR X2 CONNECTOR 24V Usr DI m 016 gt 00 Not used Free programming 28 P 3 Control Pump ontro 8 Terminal 24Vdc 28 Pump 1 Control a 011 gt 50 PMP START STP Common 8 5 012 gt 52 FIX PUMP1 FLT Fault Auxiliary Pump 1 NC Contact e E 013 53 FIX PUMP2 FLT Fault Auxiliary Pump 2 S 28 Pump 2 Control 9 2 014 3 54 FIX PUMP3 FLT Fault Auxiliary Pump 3 Common 2
247. onal information see chapter 10 20 17 825 11 Registers DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 235 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 11 5 OPERATED TIME BY PUMP 5 Screen 5 P5 0d 0m Description Operated time by pump 5 Range Default value Set on run Function Read only parameter For additional information see chapter 10 20 17 S25 11 Registers G25 11 6 RESET COUNTERS Screen TIME RESTORE N Description Reset counters Range N Y Default value N Set on run NO Function It allows the possibility of resetting the counters of the pumps N 3 NO The counters of the pumps are not reset Y 3 YES All of the counters of the pumps will be reset 236 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 11 FAULT MESSAGES DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS When a fault occurs the SD700 will stop the motor and show the generated fault on the display You can display this fault in the programming line lower line while motor current and the speed values at the moment of the fault are displayed in the upper line It is possible to navigate through the additional display lines to access other status parameters without resetting the fault These additional status parameters offer further information about the moment at which the fault occurred Additionally the FAULT led will blink and the fault message will be displayed until the fault is remedied and the drive is reset Fault Messages
248. one fixed pump associated to the local setpoint 5 Range 0 0 to 250 Default value 70 0 Set on run YES Function It allows setting the speed value below which the drive must remain for stopping a fixed pump whenever the operating setpoint is the local setpoint 5 set in parameter G25 1 9 gt Local setpoint 5 for PID See Function in parameter G25 4 19 gt Stop speed 1 for one fixed pump for additional information At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the stop delay time for each fixed pump parameter G25 4 14 to G25 4 18 depending on the what fixed is referred and the PID error G25 4 13 gt Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps See figure 10 50 G25 4 24 STOP SPEED 6 FOR ONE FIXED PUMP Screen 24 SPD6o0f 70 0 Extended info FPUMP STP SPEED6 Description Stop speed for one fixed pump associated to the local setpoint 6 Range 0 0 to 250 Default value 70 0 Set on run YES 212 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function It allows setting the speed value below which the drive must remain for stopping a fixed pump whenever the operating setpoint is the local setpoint 6 set in parameter G25 1 10 gt Local setpoint 6 for PID See Function in parameter G25 4 19 gt Stop speed 1 for one fixed pump for additional information At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally i
249. or speed Note Default units of measurement which are displayed depend on the selected engineering units See parameters G4 2 2 gt Selection of sensor 1 units and G4 3 2 gt Selection of sensor 2 units DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 225 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 20 14 Subgroup 25 8 25 8 Setpoint Compensation due to Pressure Loss G25 8 1 COMPENSATION PRESSURE AT THE STARTING OF 1 FIXED PUMP Screen 1 COMP 1 0 0Bar Extended info Description Compensation pressure at the starting of one fixed pump Range 0 0 3276 Engineering Units Default value 0 0Bar Set on run YES Function allows compensating the pressure loss in the pipe by increasing the setpoint automatically when one fixed pump is connected Note Default units of measurement which are displayed depend on the selected engineering units See parameters G4 2 2 gt Selection of sensor 1 units and G4 3 2 Selection of sensor 2 units G25 8 2 COMPENSATION PRESSURE AT THE STARTING OF 2 FIXED PUMPS Screen 2 COMP 2 0 0 Extended info Description Compensation pressure at the starting of two fixed pumps Range 0 0 3276 Engineering Units Default value 0 0 Set on run YES Function allows compensating the pressure loss in the pipe by increasing the setpoint automatically when two fixed pumps are connected Note Default units of measurement which are displayed depend on the selected engineering
250. oss 6 programmable inputs active high 24Vdc 1 PTC input 1 logic 5 PTC resistance than 1K5 ambient temperature 0 logic PTC resistance gt than 4K7 high temperature 1 programmable digital input controlled by jumper a fault is generated when it is disconnected to avoid dangerous situations during programming Additional features Isolated power supply 2 programmable and differential inputs Operation modes Current signal 0 20mA 4 20mA Voltage signal 0 10Vdc 10Vdc differential Additional features Optically insulated Consult availability with Power Electronics Cable length could be increased depending on cable type Consult with Power Electronics TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS POWER ELECTRONICS ENCODER INPUTS DIGITAL OUTPUTS ANALOGUE OUTPUTS POTENTIOMETER VOLTAGE USER POWER SUPPLY COMMUNICATION VISUALIZATION INFORMATION CONTROL MODES CONTROL PANEL OTHERS CERTIFICATION SDRIVE 700 Optional encoder boards are available for two differential encoders one available for the user one available for vector control mode Others types of encoders can be used as necessary Additional features Voltages inputs from 5 to 24Vdc 3 programmable changeover relays 250Vac 8A or 30Vdc 8A 2 isolated programmable outputs 0 20mA 4 20mA 0 10Vdc y 10Vdc 10Vdc power supply voltage for speed reference by potentiometer 26mA maximum 24Vdc user power su
251. otection of pump from cavitation situation Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run YES Function allows enabling or disabling the protection of pump from cavitation situation Options NO Protection from cavitation disabled Y YES Protection from cavitation enabled 216 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Note To protect the pump from cavitation status it is necessary to realize the following settings a Setto Y this parameter b Seta value of cavitation current in parameter G25 6 4 below which the first detection condition will be fulfilled C Seta value of cavitation speed in parameter G25 6 5 above which the second detection condition will be fulfilled d Seta delay time for activation of cavitation protection in parameter G25 6 6 Once elapsed the last cavitation condition will be activated e Seta pause time for deactivation of cavitation protection in parameter G25 6 1 From this moment on the drive will try to start again If three previous conditions are fulfilled the drive will stop the pump to protect it from cavitation status no water To adjust cavitation parameters Power Electronics recommend whenever it is possible follow the next steps fthe load is variable adjust the application for the most frequent load value for example select a middle consumption for an irrigator water pump Start
252. p S8 2 G8 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 51 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 68 2 6 6 ANLG OUT2 02 00 27 See 158 21 G8 2 7 T FORMT 2 4 20 mA 68 2 8 8 MIN2 RNG 0 250 to 250 08 29 19 2 RNG 100 250 to 250 G8 2 10 10 FILTER 2 21 OFF 0 0 to 20 05 G9 Comparators 9 1 Comparator 1 89 1 111 COMP 1 SEL 00 01 5 MOTOR O2 CURRENT MOTOR MOTOR 4 POWER MOTOR 05 TORQUE MOTOR 06 MOTOR 01 MOTOR 08 MTR 08 1 VOLTAGE 10 DC BUS TIzDRIVE TEMP 12 SPEED REF 13 Resernved 14 REFERENCE 15 PID FEEDBACK 16 PID ERROR 1T ANLG INPUT 1 TB ANLG INPUT 2 18 AMLG INPUT 1 2 2 zReserved 21 MAX SCALE 22554850 SPEED 1 Window G9 1 3 3SP C1ON 100 G91414LIM 2 C1 100 G9 1 5 5 LIM 1 1 0 G9 1 6 6 T C1 ON 0 0s e G9 1 9 9 SEL FUNT 1 00 4 00 USE 01 5TART STOP 02 5 1 03 5 2 04 Q5 START INCH1 16 5 INCH 6G9 1 2 2 COMP 1 TYPE 0 07 5 INCH3 08 SPEED 09 30 DEC 2 10 REFERENCE 2 1155 LIMIT 2 b SD70ITGOO60AI Figure 10 8 Parameters structure from subgroup S8 2 G8 to subgroup S9 1 subgroup G9 52 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS 59 2 Comparator 2 69 2111 COMP 2 SEL 00 G9 2 4 4 2 C2 1
253. pad the drive will not start automatically when input power is restored after power loss occurring since the signal is not kept activated DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 109 POWER ELECTRONICS INPUT INPUT POWER POWER LOSS RESTORED TIME gt ti t 5 l ts SPEED SPEED REFERENCE TIME 1 2 RUN ti 5 5 t 5 COMMAND ti t ts ts ts SD70ITCCOO30AI Figure 10 29 Parameter G7 10 set to N Running does not continue after recovering input power INPUT amp POWER INPUT POWER LOSS RESTORED TIME 2 ti t t SPEED SPEED REFERENCE TIME 25 RUN ti t COMMAND lt li t SD70ITCCO031AI Figure 10 30 Parameter G7 10 set to Y Running continues after recovering input power 110 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G7 11 ACCURACY SETTING FOR STARTING BY SPIN Screen 11 SPNstr B OFF Extended info SPIN START TUNE Description Accuracy setting for starting by spin Range OFF 0 1 100 Default value OFF Set on run YES Function It allows setting the accuracy of the speed searching function when the drive starts by SPIN mode Usually the optimum value is between 2 and 59 As the value is lower more accuracy is required DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 111 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 8 Group 8 G8 Outputs 10 8 1 Subgroup 8 1 8 1 Output Relays G8 1 1 SELECTION O
254. parameter operates together with parameters G25 6 4 gt Cavitation current and G25 6 5 gt Cavitation speed See Function in parameter G25 6 2 gt To enable cavitation protection to obtain information about the setting of cavitation parameters G25 6 7 TO ENABLE LOW PRESSURE PROTECTION Screen 7 ENABLE LO PRE N Description To enable low pressure protection Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run YES 218 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function It allows the possibility of tripping because of low pressure fault F65 LOW PRESSURE and stopping the pump N 3 NO Low pressure protection disabled Y gt YES Low pressure protection enabled G25 6 9 MINIMUM PRESURE LEVEL Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 9 LO PRE 5 0Bar LO PRESSURE LEVL Minimum pressure level OFF 0 to 3276 Engineering Units 5 0Bar YES It allows setting the pressure level below which the drive will trip because of low pressure fault F65 LOW PRESSURE Default units of measurement which are displayed depend on the selected engineering units See parameters G4 2 2 gt Selection of sensor 1 units and G4 3 2 Selection of sensor 2 units G25 6 10 TRIP DELAY TIME BECAUSE OF MINIMUM PRESSURE FAULT Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on r
255. parameters G19 2 11 gt Stabilize factor in acceleration and G19 2 12 3 Stabilize factor in deceleration Note Whenever there is no instability in the system installation do not modify the default value of this parameter G19 2 11 STABILIZE FACTOR IN ACCELERATION Screen 11 STA F AC OFF Extended info STABILIZE F ACC Description Stabilize factor in acceleration Range 80 0 99 9 OFF 100 Default value OFF Set on run YES 174 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Function It allows setting a value as stabilize factor during acceleration Usually the instability of the system is reduced during the acceleration by decreasing the value of this parameter This parameter operates together with parameter G19 2 10 3 Frequency V Hz change See Function in parameter G19 2 10 for additional information G19 2 12 STABILIZE FACTOR IN DECELERATION Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 12 STA F DC OFF STABILIZE F DEC Stabilize factor in deceleration 80 0 99 9 OFF 100 OFF YES It allows setting a value as stabilize factor during deceleration Usually the instability of the system is reduced during the deceleration by decreasing the value of this parameter This parameter operates together with parameter G19 2 10 Frequency V Hz change See Function in parameter G19 2 10 for additional inform
256. pply regulated and short circuit protected From a communication perspective the SD700 will provide Standard Hardware USB Port RS232 Port RS485 Port Software Protocols Standard Modbus RTU Average current and 3 phase motor current Average voltage and 3 phase motor voltage Average input voltage and 3 phase input voltage Speed Torque Power Power factor of motor Relay status Digital input status PTC status Output comparator status Value of analogue inputs and sensors Analogue output value Motor overload status and drive overload status IGBT temperature Motor output frequency Fault history 6 last faults Local from keypad Remote from digital inputs Serial communications Type Length Connection Alphanumeric Display Visualization Leds Keypad Graphic Display Real time clock Perpetual calendar CE UL cUL Possibility of increasing length Consult with Power Electronics Optional Hardware Optic Fibre Ethernet Optional Profibus DeviceNet TCP IP N2 Metasys Removable 3 meters RJ45 4 lines of 16 characters LED ON Control board is energized LED RUN Motor receiving power supply from 50700 LED FAULT Blinking shows that a fault has occurred 6 control keys to program the drive start and stop reset Provided with independent memory Optional graphical display with 3 5 TFT touch screen Independent memory TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS 19 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS
257. pplying up to two different ramps previously set ramps 1 and 2 of reference increase The ramp change is set in parameter G5 11 gt Speed for ramp change with motorized potentiometer The drive will apply the ramp 1 until the speed exceeds the value set in G5 11 From that moment on drive will start to apply the ramp 2 If G5 11 is set to OFF any ramp change will not be done and the drive will search the reference speed by only applying the ramp 1 for reference increase of motorized potentiometer set in this parameter Setting is realized in acceleration units increase in 96 of speed per second See figure 10 24 94 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G5 10 RAMP 2 OF REFERENCE DECREASE FOR MOTORIZED POTENTIOMETER Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 10 MPT DEC2 3 0 s Ramp 2 of reference decrease for motorized potentiometer function 0 01 650 s 3 0 s YES It allows setting the ramp 2 of reference decrease for motorized potentiometer function This function is configured in G4 1 4 gt Selection of digital inputs configuration with the option 4 9 MOTORIZED or 5 9 ERASAB POT Additionally it is necessary to set G3 1 gt Reference source 1 of speed or G3 2 Reference source 2 of speed with the option PMOT depending on the selected source is 1 or 2 With this function user can introduce the speed refe
258. pressure be generated in the system On the contrary if time is too long under pressure can be generated See figure 10 50 G25 4 15 DELAY TIME TO STOP FIXED PUMP 2 RELAY 2 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 15 FP T2 OF 10s FPUMP2 STP DELAY Delay time to stop the fixed pump 2 Relay 2 0 60005 10s YES It allows setting the delay time to stop the fixed pump associated to the Relay 2 At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the drive speed parameter G25 4 19 to G25 4 26 stop speeds assigned to each local setpoint depending on the selected local setpoint and the PID error G25 4 13 gt Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps If time is too short overpressure can be generated in the system On the contrary if time is too long under pressure can be generated See figure 10 50 G25 4 16 DELAY TIME TO STOP FIXED PUMP 3 RELAY 3 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 16 FP T3 OF 10s FPUMP3 STP DELAY Delay time to stop the fixed pump 3 Relay 3 0 6000s 10s YES It allows setting the delay time to stop the fixed pump associated to the Relay 3 At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the drive speed parameter G25 4 19 to G25 4 26 stop speeds assigned to each local setpoint depending
259. pressure condition disappears if the delay time after pause has elapsed the drive will Start FAULT It will generate fault and next fixed pumps will be stopped In this case the visualization will be F69 FLOW SWITCH G25 6 16 TO ENABLE FLOW SWITCH DURING PIPE FILLING PROCESS Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 16 NO FLO FILL N To enable No Flow switch during the pipe filling process N Y See Function for additional information N YES It allows the possibility of enabling or disabling the No Flow switch to stop the drive during the pipe filling process according to the setting of the parameter G 25 6 14 gt Response from No Flow situation N 3 NO Protection from No Flow situation is disabled The drive will ignore No Flow input during the pipe filling process Y 3 YES Protection from No Flow situation is enabled The drive will consider Flow input during the pipe filling process to stop G25 6 17 MINIMUM STOP SPEED BECAUSE FLOW DETECTION Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 17 NO FLsp 0 0 NO FLOW MIN SPED Minimum stop speed because of No Flow detection 0 0 to 250 0 0 YES It allows setting the minimum stop speed of the drive because of No Flow detection When the motor speed is higher that the speed set in this parameter the
260. put 1 is set to Y MAXIMUM RANGE OF ANALOGUE INPUT 1 6 INmax1 10V AIN1 HIGH RANGE Maximum range of the Analogue Input 1 10 to 10V 0 to 20mA 10V YES allows setting the maximum voltage or current value for the Analogue Input 1 according to the characteristics of the sensor that is going to be connected MAXIMUM RANGE OF SENSOR 1 7 5 1 10 01 Maximum range of sensor 1 G4 2 5 to 3200 Engineering Units 10 01 5 YES allows setting the maximum units value of the sensor connected to the Analogue Input 1 This value should also correspond to the maximum voltage or current level of the sensor set in G4 2 6 Maximum range of Analogue Input 1 The setting of this parameter should be checked if the sensor units are changed in parameter G4 2 2 gt Selection of sensor 1 units It is necessary to set this value to operate in open loop and closed loop This parameter will be only available if G4 2 1 gt To enable sensor of Analogue Input 1 is set to Y DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G4 2 8 SPEED FOR THE MINIMUM RANGE OF ANALOGUE INPUT 1 Screen 8 SPD LO1 0 Extended info Description Speed corresponding to the minimum range of the Analogue Input 1 Range 250 to 250 Default value 0 Set on run YES Function If the Analogue Input 1 is used for introducing the speed reference setting of parameter G4 2 1 gt To enable
261. put of comparator 3 will be activated when source signal of comparator 3 selected in G9 3 1 is higher than the value set in this parameter and additionally ON delay time set in G9 3 6 has elapsed If after the ON condition is given this one disappears before elapsing ON delay time the output of the comparator will be not activated See figure 10 38 Note This parameter is only displayed if comparator 3 is set to normal mode parameter G9 3 2 gt Type selection for comparator 3 set to 0 Normal G9 3 4 LIMIT 2 FOR COMPARATOR 3 IN WINDOW MODE Screen 4 LIM 2 C3 100 Extended info C3 WINDOW LIMIT2 Description Limit 2 of the comparator 3 in window mode Range 250 to 250 Default value 100 Set on run YES Function allows defining one of the limits to activate comparator 3 in window mode Output of comparator 3 will be activated when source signal of comparator 3 selected in G9 3 1 is within the limit 1 set in G9 3 5 and the limit 2 and additionally ON delay time set in G9 3 6 has elapsed If after the ON condition is given this one disappears before elapsing ON delay time the output of the comparator will be not activated See figures 10 39 and 10 40 Note This parameter is only displayed if comparator 3 is set to window mode parameter G9 3 2 gt Type selection for comparator 3 set to 1 Window G9 3 5 LIMIT 1 FOR COMPARATOR 3 IN WINDOW MODE Screen 5 LIM 1 C3 0 Extended
262. r 1 G9 1 1 SOURCE SELECTION FOR COMPARATOR 1 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 1 COMP 1 SEL 00 Selection of the source for the comparator 1 00 22 See Function for additional information 00 YES allows user to select the source for the comparator 1 according to the following options 00 gt NONE There is no source for the comparator 01 gt SPEED MOTOR Comparison signal is motor speed 02 gt CURRENT MOTOR Motor current signal 03 gt VOLTAGE MOTOR Motor voltage signal 04 gt POWER MOTOR Motor power signal 05 gt TORQUE MOTOR Motor torque signal 06 PF MOTOR Motor cosine de phi 07 gt TEMP MOTOR Motor temperature signal 08 FREQUENCY MTR Drive input frequency 09 gt INPUT VOLTAGE Drive input voltage 10 gt DC BUS DC Bus voltage 11 9 DRIVE TEMP Drive temperature 12 SPEED REF Speed reference 13 gt Reserved Reserved for future use 14 PID REFERENCE Speed reference in PID mode DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS SDRIVE 700 127 80 700 ELECTRONICS 15 gt PID FEEDBACK System feedback signal 16 gt PID ERROR PID error signal difference between reference signal and feedback signal of the sensor 17 ANLG INPUT 1 Signal connected to Analogue Input 1 18 INPUT 2 Signal connected to Analogue Input 2 19 gt INPUT 1 2 Sum of signals connected to analogue
263. r frequency Output dV dt filter Output cable length Ambient temperature Altitude Altitude de rating Degree protection Ambient humidity Display degree protection Rotor locked Motor overload thermal model POWER ELECTRONICS 380 500Vac 550 690Vac 20 to 10 3 Phase 230Vac optional 48 a 62 Hz Output current gt 0 98 of fundamental 0 88 2sec depending on the load Second environment limits 3 and 4 First environment limit 1 and 2 optional built in Choke coils 390 impedance to 100 Input voltage 0 to 250 150 during 60sec at 50 C gt 97 50 to 150 of SD700 rating 5 to 500 Vector control without encoder Sensorless open loop Vector Control and V Hz 4 to 8kHz PEWave 500 to 800V us according to 50700 rating Maximum 300 meters Minimum 30 C Maximum 50 C 1000m gt 1000m 1 per 100m 3000m maximum IP20 and 54 lt 95 non condensing 54 Phase current imbalance phase voltage imbalance Motor over temperature PTC normal status 85R 2 Speed limit Torque limit Output current limit Overload IGBT s overload Input phase loss Low input voltage High input voltage DC Bus voltage limit Low DC Bus voltage High input frequency Low input frequency IGBT temperature Heat sink over temperature Power supply fault Drive thermal model Ground fault Software and Hardware fault Analogue input signal loss speed reference l
264. r the PID reference proportional to the Analogue Input 2 signal 2 shows the value of sensor 2 associated to the Analogue Input 2 It shows the value of Analogue Output 1 5 1 It shows the magnitude value associated to the Analogue Output 1 speed current It shows the value of Analogue Output 2 5 It shows the magnitude value associated to the Analogue Output 2 speed current It shows whether the Digital Inputs are activated or not from 011 to DI6 The final is another input which shows the status of the motor PTC signal X Active 0 Not Active It shows whether the output relays are activated not X Active 0 Not Active shows the speed of the motor in engineering units Pressing key you can access to the following sub parameters of configuration Screen 0 001 To set the ratio factor between motor speed and 10 machine speed It allows selection of the units to be displayed Description Units Ma m s Note They both are settable during run VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP GO 41 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 9 4 Parameters 5 4 Internal Visualization Screen Units Description 00000000 Actual Fault 00 code fault See faulthistoryG13 It shows the drive rated current maximum current of the equipment at 50 SW 10 T itshowsthe software version installed into the It shows
265. r the comparator 1 00 11 See Function for additional information 00 YES It allows user to select which function will be activated by comparator 1 according to the following options 00 gt NO USE Comparator output deactivated Comparator has no effect 01 gt START STOP When comparator output is activated it will give the start command and when comparator output is deactivated it will give the stop command 02 gt STOP 1 Stop mode 1 is activated set in G7 1 when comparator output is activated 03 gt STOP 2 Stop mode 2 is activated set in G7 2 when comparator output is activated 04 gt RESET When comparator output is activated drive reset is executed DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 133 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 05 gt START INCH1 Output of comparator activates the start command and takes inch speed 1 as speed reference When comparator output is activated drive will start and will accelerate until the speed reference is reached in this case the speed reference is inch speed 1 set in parameter G15 1 06 3 START INCH2 Output of comparator activates the start command and takes inch speed 2 as speed reference When comparator output is activated drive will start and will accelerate until the speed reference is reached in this case the speed reference is inch speed 2 set in parameter 615 2 07 gt START INCHS3 Output of comparator activates the start command and tak
266. rage output motor current for a time higher than 15 F22 TQ LIM T O torque has exceeded the torque limit set in parameter G10 7 for the time set in G10 8 T LIMT F29 DSP FLT DSP has detected wrong data F40 EXT External trip or motor PTC device has operated terminals 8 and 9 Values out of the range 85Q to 2KQ generate this fault F41 COMMS TRIP Trip generated through 5232 or RS485 communication Master PLC or PC is generating a fault in the SD700 through serial communication The 50700 is not receiving a signal on Analogue Input 1 and G4 2 14 AIN1 LOSS is set to Yes The signal F42 AIN1 LOSS connected to this has been lost The 50700 is not receiving a signal on the Analogue Input 2 and G4 3 14 AIN2 1055 is set to Yes The signal F43 AIN2 LOSS un connected to this input has been lost F44 CAL FLT Internal reference voltage levels are wrong STOP T O Trip generated due to excessive stopping time The elapsed time from stop signal activation has exceeded the value set in parameter 11 2 STOP TO F46 EEPROM FLT Non volatile memory is faulty F47 COMMS T O Trip generated due to excessive delay of serial communication The elapsed time from the last valid data transmission has exceeded the time set in parameter G20 2 COMMS T O F48 SPI COM Trip because data bus transfer is wrong F49 SPD LIMIT Motor speed has exceeded the speed limit parameters
267. rameter G4 1 5 gt Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration or by configuring the output function of one of the comparators options 02 gt STOP 1 and 03 gt STOP 2 in parameter G9 1 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 1 G9 2 9 gt Selection of output function for Comparator 2 or G9 3 9 Selection of output function for Comparator 3 or automatically by setting a changing speed G7 3 gt Changing speed for stop mode See figures 10 25 and 10 27 7 3 CHANGING SPEED FOR STOP MODE Screen 3 BRK STP 2 OFF Extended info STP2 UNDER SPEED Description Changing speed for stop mode from stop by RAMP to Stop by SPIN Range OFF 0 to 250 Default value OFF Set on run YES Function Drive changes the stop mode from RAMP to SPIN by setting this parameter to a value different to zero when drive is stopping and reaches the speed value set in this parameter We suppose that drive has the stop mode 1 or 2 set by RAMP depending on the stop mode selected is the main or alternative one as stop mode selected When drive receives the stop command the drive will stop by applying a deceleration ramp from the operating speed steady status until reaching the speed set here and from that moment on drive will apply the stop mode by SPIN drive turns off the output to the motor and this one is stopped by inertia until stopping If
268. rd Range OFF 0000 to 9999 Default value 0 Set run YES Function It allows user to introduce an access password to lock parameters and avoid unauthorized changes in the programming If we select option 1 gt PARTIAL LOCK or 2 TOTAL LOCK in parameter G1 1 gt PARAMETERS LOCK this screen appears automatically to request the introduction of the access password 2 PASSWORD OFF Parameters lock is executed when we introduce the password and this one is memorized after elapsing a few seconds To unlock parameters setting you should access to the parameter G1 1 and select option 0 NO Next this screen appears automatically to request the introduction of the access password 2 PASSWORD Parameters unlock is executed once the password is introduced and after elapsing few seconds This password is the same one used for locking parameters 62 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G1 2b UNLOCK PASSWORD RECOVERY Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 3 PSW ERR XXXX Recovery of the unlock password access 0000 to 9999 0000 YES supplies information to recover the introduced lock password according to the expression Unlock passwordz XXXX 2 This parameter appears when an incorrect password is introduced to unlock parameters G1 4 LANGUAGE SELECTION Screen Description Range Default value Set
269. re version SW Ver 1 3 80 700 00 POWER ELECTRONICS POWER ELECTRONICS INDEX SAFELY INSTRUCTIONS d 7 1 INTRODUCTION ei desee ei neci Een Eso E 11 121 D sigBnauon noi oie atu 11 1225 5 ee 12 2 INSTALLATION AND 13 2 asunto aeneo ae ie esM bd ee up 13 2 2 Environmental GOITdItGDS 14 223 Dive Mounting m 14 2 4 Power Connection and Control Wiring 14 3 POWER RANGE Ea a a A aE edana A iaaa aeeai a 16 9 dTowebhahge 00 vtec a i 16 3 2 Power Range at DOO Vac e da 17 4 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS dee e eae ete osos 18 DIMENSIONS M 20 Dimensions Frames 24 etna pu leone 20 5 2 Dimensions of Frames 6 7 21 53 Dimensions of
270. reen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 2 NUMBR 1 Number of auto reset attempts 1 5 1 YES allows user to set the maximum number of auto reset attempts realized by the drive in case of a fault occurs This parameter together with G12 4 gt Reset time for the counter of auto reset attempts control the drive to carry out auto reset function in a controller manner DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 153 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS FAULT RESET Counter 5 ATTEMPTS Fauli COUNTER 6124 PONES ice the reset oe emer starts from first RESET 0 li b b li ts ts 17 8 ls to 1516 tia CASE B The attempts counter of auto reset will not be reset because the fifth fault occurs before the time for reseting the counter has elapsed CASE A The attempts counter of auto reset will be reset because the time elapses before occuring 5 faults 5123 gt Delay time before auto reset 6124 3 Reset time of the counter of auto reset attempts SD70ITCCOO20AI Figure 10 42 Example Application of auto reset function for 5 faults G12 3 DELAY TIME BEFORE AUTO RESET Screen 3 R STR DEL 5s Extended info Description Delay time before executing auto reset function Range 5 120s Default value 58 Set on run YES Function It allows setting the time elapsed from occurring the fault to the fault is reset
271. reen 11 INVERSION N Description To enable speed inversion Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value N Set on run YES Function It enables or disables the possibility of inverting the motor speed This function prevents the motor running in negative rotation direction N gt NO Disabled inversion Motor running in negative rotation direction is not allowed Y gt YES Enabled inversion Motor running in both rotation directions is allowed 146 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 11 Group 11 G11 Protections G11 1 TRIP TIME BECAUSE OF SPEED LIMIT Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 1 SP LIM TO OFF Trip time because of speed limit has been reached 0 605 OFF 61 OFF YES It allows setting a delay time to generate the fault F49 SPD LIMIT when the drive reaches the predefined speed limit G11 2 MAXIMUM TIME FOR STOP LIMIT Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 2 STOP TO OFF Maximum time for stop limit OFF 0 0 a 999s OFF YES allows setting a maximum time of stop limit It supplies a safety function to stop the drive automatically if the motor has not stopped after the time set in this parameter has elapsed and if the drive has received a stop command The drive will fault on F45 STOP T O This function is used to pro
272. rence 7 for the equipment Set according to the requirements of the applic 12 SETPT8 8 0Bar G25 1 12 Local setpoint 8 for the PID 8 0Bar gt It allows user to set the value of the speed reference 8 for the equipment Set according to the requirements of the applic COMMONLY USED CONFIGURATIONS 251 80 700 POWERELECTRONICS Parameter Name Description Value G25 Pump Control 25 2 PID Setting 2 PID FBK AD2 G25 2 2 PID feedback source AI2 gt It allows selecting Analogue Input 2 as feedback signal for PID regulator G25 Pump Control 525 3 Start Conditions 11 Pon 0 0 625 3 1 Wake up level of the drive gt It allows setting the wake up level for the drive as a percentage of the PID setpoint G25 Pump Control 25 4 Stop Conditions 20s gt This delay time will be applied to any conditions that E G25 4 1 Delay time before activating sleep activate the sleep mode These conditions are sleep speed 11 T SLP 20s Flow input Flow measurement and sleep current If anyone of them is met the time to activate sleep mode will start elapsing Seep spees stant 40 0 gt It allows setting the sleep speed 1 below which the 2 SLPsp1 40 0 G25 4 2 Sleep speed for local setpoint 1 will sleep whenever local setpoint 1 is selected Set according to the installation 42 0 gt It allows setting the sleep speed 2 below which the 3 SL
273. rence by means of two push buttons connected to the digital inputs DI5 up or increase the speed reference and DI6 down or decrease the speed reference While we press Up push button we can decrease the speed by applying up to two different ramps previously set ramps 1 and 2 of reference decrease The ramp change is set in parameter G5 11 gt Speed for ramp change with motorized potentiometer The drive will apply the ramp 1 until the speed is below the value set in G5 11 From that moment on drive will start to apply the ramp 2 If G5 11 is set to OFF any ramp change will not be done and the drive will search the reference speed by only applying the ramp 1 for reference decrease of motorized potentiometer set in this parameter Setting is realized in deceleration units decrease in 96 of speed per second See figure 10 24 G5 11 SPEED FOR RAMP CHANGE WITH MOTORIZED POTENTIOMETER Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 11 MPOT BRK OFF Speed for increase decrease ramps change with motorized potentiometer OFF 0 to 250 of speed reference OFF YES This parameter allows using the alternative ramps of reference increase and decrease with motorized potentiometer function selected G4 1 4 gt Selection of digital inputs configuration with the option 4 gt MOTORIZED POT or 5 gt ERASAB and also set G3 1 gt Reference source 1 of speed
274. requencies G16 1 1 SKIP 1 0 0 516 2 2 SKIP 2 0 0 616 3 3 SKIP BAND OFF OFF 0 to 20 G17 Brake G17 1 1 DC 250 to 250 250 to 250 OFF 0 0 to 995 G17 3 3 DC VOLTS 0 0 00 25 174141 HEATING OFF OFF 0 0 to 30 G17 5 5 DYN BRAK N NzNo YzYes 21 800 to 810 OFF 811 ViHz PEVE 619 2 1 1 MIN FLUX 100 619 2 5 5 DAMPING 0 0 cot 0 0 to 20 0 619 2 6 6 TTP BAND 0 0 0 0 10 0 619 2 9 9 STR FRO 0 0 0 0 100 OFF 0 0 0 1 100 lt 80 0 99 9 OFF 100 80 0 99 9 OFF 100 625 799 800 619 3 1 1 STATOR 0 9 SD70ITGOO64AI Figure 10 12 Parameters structure from group G15 to subgroup 519 3 G19 56 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS G20 Serial Communication Controls G20 1 1 PROTOCOL M M MODBUS G20 2 2 COMMS OFF 0 10 255 6G20 3 2 2 BAUDS 4800 20 3 3 3 PARITY NONE 520 4 Modbus TCP G20 4 1 11P PARAM A 192 320 4 2121 PARAM B 166 620 4 3131 PARAM C 1 G20 4 5 5 SUBNET 255 20 4 6 6 SUBNET 255 G20 4 7 T SUBNET 255 G20 4 8 8 SUBNET D 0 20 4 9 9 GATEWAY A 0 G20 4 10 110 GATEWAY 0 6G20 4 11 11 GATEWAY 0 G20 4 12 12 GATEWAY 0 0 GECIULIITNE G20 4 14 14 34 G20 4 15 15 M
275. requencies The drive will only take these reference values when is changing speed during acceleration and deceleration but it will not operation at these speed values One this value is set the bandwidth adjusted G16 3 gt Skip bandwidth will be based on it forming a frequency range that the drive will avoid See example and figure 10 45 in parameter G16 3 gt Skip bandwidth G16 3 SKIP BANDWIDTH Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run 3 SKIP BAND OFF OFFSET BAND Skip band OFF 0 20 OFF YES DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 167 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Function It allows setting the band of frequencies inside of which drive does not operate in spite of the drive goes through that band of frequencies during the acceleration and deceleration Example We suppose that skip frequency 1 G16 1 is set to 40 skip frequency 2 G16 2 is set to 8096 and the skip bandwidth is set to 2096 The avoided frequencies will be from 40 10 to 40 10 and from 80 10 to 80 10 this is from 30 to 50 and from 70 to 90 Now we suppose that reference frequency 1 speed reference 1 is 55 out of the two skip bandwidths Reference frequency 2 speed reference 2 is 85 therefore is inside of one skip bandwidth In the first case reference frequency 1 55 the drive will only take the frequency values that are insid
276. rive speed will be forced to the value set in parameter G25 5 1 gt Speed bypass at the starting of fixed pumps to avoid over pressure situations in the system at the starting of a fixed pump See figures 10 47 and 10 48 G25 5 3 SPEED BYPASS AT THE STOPPING OF FIXED PUMPS Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 3 BY SPof 90 BYPASS OFF SPEED Speed bypass at the stopping of fixed pumps 0 0 to 250 90 YES allows setting a speed bypass value The drive speed will be forced to the value set in this parameter during the time set in parameter G25 5 4 gt Time of speed bypass after stopping fixed pumps to avoid under pressure situations in the system at the stopping of a fixed pump See figure 10 50 G25 5 4 TIME OF SPEED BYPASS AFTER STOPPING FIXED PUMPS Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 4 BY T OFF 5s BYPASS OFF DELAY Time of speed bypass after stopping fixed pumps OFF 0 999s 55 YES It allows setting a value for the time of speed bypass During this time the drive speed will be forced to the value set in parameter G25 5 3 gt Speed bypass at the stopping of fixed pumps to avoid under pressure situations in the system at the stopping of a fixed pump See figure 10 50 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 215 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 20 12 Subgroup 25 6 25 6 Protection G25
277. rmally open contact terminals 32 33 and another normally closed contact terminals 33 34 See figure 10 31 N 3 NO No inversion Y YES Inversion of relay logical function DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 117 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 10 8 2 Subgroup 8 2 8 2 Analogue Outputs 08 21 MODE SELECTION FOR ANALOGUE OUTPUT 1 Screen 1 ANLG OUT1 01 Description Mode selection for the Analogue Output 1 Range 00 27 See Function for additional information Default value 01 Set on run NO Function allows user to configure the Analogue Input 1 according to the following options 00 gt NONE It is not used 01 gt SPEED MOTOR Signal proportional to the motor speed Units Motor speed 02 gt CURRENT MOTOR Signal proportional to the motor current Units Motor rated current 03 VOLTAGE MOTOR Signal proportional to the motor voltage Units Motor rated voltage 04 gt POWER MOTOR Signal proportional to the motor power Units Motor power 05 gt TORQUE MOTOR Signal proportional to the motor torque Units Motor torque 06 PF MOTOR Signal proportional to the motor power factor Units Motor rated Cosine Phi 07 gt TEMP MOTOR Signal proportional to the motor temperature Units eMotor temperature 08 FREQUENCY MTR Signal proportional to the input frequency Units frequency 50Hz 100 09 gt INPUT VOLTAGE Signal proportional to the input vo
278. rocess The setting is in deceleration units decrease in of speed per second For example a deceleration ramp of 10 s means that the drive decreases its speed by 10 of motor rated speed per each second elapsed If parameter G5 6 gt Speed for deceleration ramp change is set to OFF drive will search the reference speed by following the deceleration pattern set in this parameter See figures 10 22 and 10 23 Note Usually it should be used slower settings supported by the application A deceleration ramp too much fast can cause motor regeneration to the drive VLT For this drive will replace the set ramp with a slower ramp automatically To get a better programming you must be realistic with these settings If you need fast accelerations and or decelerations we advise you to use slower settings firstly until the remaining operations are checked 90 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G5 3 ACCELERATION RAMP 2 Screen 3 ACCE 2 1 0 s Extended info SECOND ACCELE Description Acceleration ramp 2 Range 0 01 650 s Default value 1 0 s Set on run YES Function It allows user to set the alternative acceleration ramp according to the requirements of each process The setting is in acceleration units increase in of speed per second For example an alternative acceleration ramp of 1096 s means that the drive increases its speed by 1096 of motor rated speed per each second
279. rol with Eight Pressure Setpoints Note Use screened cables for the control and connect the screen to ground COMMONLY USED CONFIGURATIONS 253 80 700 POWERELECTRONICS 13 CONFIGURATION REGISTER VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE SD700 SERIAL 2 MODEL APPLICATION DATE CUSTOMER NOTES To save parameters into the display The SD700 can copy the drive configuration into the display to use at a later stage if necessary This allows the user to test different settings without losing current configuration of the equipment program multiple drives using one display or to keep a copy of the drive configuration for future commissioning requirements To achieve this follow the steps described below Go into subgroup 51 10 To memorize parameters into the display o Set G1 10 1 UPLOAD Y o The display will show UPLOADING 100 Current parameter setting of the drive has been stored into the display transfer memorized data from display to drive o Set G1 10 2 DOWNLOAD Y o The display will show DOWNLOADING 100 Memorized setting inside the display will be transferred to the drive PARAMETERS FACTORY SETTINGS SETTING 1 SETTING 2 G1 Options Menu 110 5 0 0 2 PASSWORD OFF OFF 3 PSW ERR XXXX XXXX 4 LANG ESPANOL ESPANOL 5 INITIALISE 0 0 6 SHORT MenuzNO NO 7 PROG STANDARD STANDARD G1 Options Menu 51 10 Eloader UPLOAD N DOWNLOAD N G1 Options Menu 11 FAN CTRL FIXE FIX
280. rs surge suppressors RFI filters on the output side of the drive Doing so may damage these components Always check whether the DC Link LED is OFF before wiring terminals The capacitors may hold high voltage even after the input power is disconnected Use caution to prevent the possibility of personal injury TRIAL RUN Verify all parameters before operating the drive Alteration of parameters may be required depending on application and load Always apply voltage and current signals to each terminal that are within levels indicated within this manual Otherwise damage to the drive may result SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 9 SSDRIVE700 ELECTRONICS SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10 OPERATION PRECAUTIONS When the Auto Restart function is enabled keep clear of driven equipment as the motor will restart suddenly after a fault is reset The STOP RESET key on the keypad is active only if the appropriate function setting has been made For this reason install a separate EMERGENCY STOP push button that can be operated at the equipment If a fault reset is made with the reference signal still present then a restart will occur Verify that it is permissible for this to happen otherwise an accident may occur Do not modify or alter anything within the drive Before programming or operating the SDRIVE 700 series initialise all parameters back to factory default values EARTH CONNECTION The drive is a high frequ
281. rs before elapsing ON delay time the output of the comparator will be not activated See figures 10 39 and 10 40 Note This parameter is only displayed if comparator 1 is set to window mode parameter G9 2 2 Type selection for comparator 2 set to 1 Window 136 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G9 2 6 ON DELAY TIME FOR COMPARATOR 2 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 6 T C2 ON 0 0s C2 ACTIVAT DELAY ON delay time to activate comparator 2 0 0 999s 0 0s YES It allows setting a timer to activate the output of the comparator 2 When the activation condition of the output signal of comparator 2 is given in normal or window mode the timer delays the activation of this signal for the time set in this parameter If after the ON condition is given this one disappears before elapsing ON delay time the output of the comparator will be not activated See figures 10 38 10 39 and 10 40 G9 2 7 DEACTIVATION VALUE OF COMPARATOR 2 IN NORMAL MODE Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 7 SP C2 OF 0 C2 DEACTIV LEVEL Deactivation value of comparator 2 in normal mode 250 to 250 0 YES It allows setting the deactivation value of the comparator 2 output Output of comparator 2 will be deactivated when source signal of comparator 2 selected in G9 2 1 is lower t
282. rs group allows user to set multiple references for the equipment These references will be activated by using digital inputs configured as multiple speed references or PID setpoints To use them like this you must proceed in the following manner 1 Select option 2 9 MREF 2 WIRES or 3 MREF WIRES in parameter G4 1 4 gt Selection of digital inputs configuration 2 Once realized the previous setting you must select if multi references are speed references or PID setpoints If multi references are speed references you must only select the option MREF in parameter G3 1 Reference source 1 of speed or in G3 2 gt Reference source 2 of speed depending on the reference source of speed is selected If multi references are PID setpoints first you must to enable the PID regulator by selecting option PID in 03 1 gt Reference source 1 of speed or in G3 2 Reference source 2 of speed Next you must select option MREF in parameter G6 1 gt Source selection for introducing reference signal When you select option 2 MREF 2 WIRES in parameter G4 1 4 Selection of digital inputs configuration digital inputs 5 and 6 are configured automatically to select multiple references 015 represents high bit and DI6 represents low bit The combination of these inputs offers the possibility of selecting up to four different speed references or PID setpoints depending on the selected option expla
283. rtant objective to make easy in a significant way its installation and maintenance thanks to its modular independence It is available in IP20 and IP54 gt Due to features First soeed drive incorporating a Graphical Display with 3 5 TFT touch screen for fast and easy programming Real time clock and perpetual calendar o USB 2 1 Communication Port o Fibre Optic Port gt Due to its reliability FPA Fault Preventing Algorithms is able to detect critical situations and correct them avoiding unnecessary downtime in production Power Electronics has employed a new control strategy MCA Motion Combined Algorithms combining all the advantages of different traditional motor control and ensuring robustness and stability SDRIVE 280 1 1131 CE prii EENES 1 Removable Display 2 Control Terminals 3 Power Terminals 12 INTRODUCTION POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION 2 1 Basic Configuration The following devices are required to operate the drive Proper peripheral devices must be selected and correct connections must be done to ensure proper operation An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in system malfunction or reduction in product life as well as component damage You must read and understand this manual thoroughly before proceeding AC Power Supply Earth leakage circui
284. rts from OHz to the reference frequency setpoint of speed This means that rotor would rotate faster that stator and a sudden braking of the load would be generated due to this a mechanical blow is produced and its consequent regeneration If we select the option SPIN then we can start loads in movement avoiding these problems Note When drive starts by SPIN rotation direction applied to the motor is the same rotation direction of reference speed When speed reference is 0 0 rotation direction applied to the motor is positive The following figure shows the drive behaviour at starting by SPIN In this case the starting is due to an input power loss and reestablishment of it again Drive can also start in this way if Option SPIN is configured motor is stopped by inertia in parameter 27 1 gt Stop mode 1 or G7 2 gt Stop mode 2 depending on the stop mode selection realized before Drive receives the stop command and starts to stop the motor Drive receives the start command again before motor is stopped completely 104 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 INPUT 4 POWER INPUT POWER RESTORED INPUT POWER LOSS gt ty b b t l MOTOR SPEED TIME gt ti 8 ti t OUTPUT SPEED SPEED REFERENCE TIME B t ls ts ty ts OUTPUT VOLTAGE TIME gt ty te ts ty 15 2 Fi
285. s Drive is decreasing the output frequency due to a stop command Motor is Stopping stopping by ramp until zero speed is reached Free run stop when a fault Drive is stopping by free run stop after a fault occurs emergency stop Motor STO NIC S occurs Stopping time is determined by inertia as the drive output has turned off Fivind start Flying start operation must be configured if required The 50700 will search ying for the actual motor shaft speed once the drive has received a start command DC brake SD700 is applying DC current injection to stop the motor 38 STATUS MESSAGES POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Screen Name Description 00000000 50700 is injecting DC current to prevent moisture condensing within the motor Non condensing current is A activated CAUTION Although the motor is not running there is dangerous voltage Run Led will be lit during this process Be careful to avoid damages and personal injury Drive is applying a delay time before DC current injection is active When this time is elapsed the DC brake will be active 50700 is working according to inch speed 1 command and Start Inch speed 1 mode 15 active When operated in this mode the Start Inch speed Inch speed 1 1 command is dominant over other inputs programmed for Start functionality Therefore if one input is configured as Start and it is deactivated in spite of this deactivated input
286. selected G4 3 2 gt Selection of sensor 2 units G4 3 2 SELECTION OF SENSOR 2 UNITS Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 2 SENSOR 2 1 5 Selection of units of measurement for the sensor 2 96 m3 s I m m3 m m3 h m s m m m h Bar kPa Psi m F K allows selecting different units of measurement for the Analogue Input 2 according to the sensor that is going to be used If this parameter is modified the minimum and maximum values are affected by the proper conversion For this reason the settings of the parameters G4 3 5 gt Minimum range of sensor 2 and G4 3 7 gt Maximum range of sensor 2 should be checked This parameter is only available if G4 3 1 gt To enable sensor of Analogue Input 2 is set to Y G4 3 3 ANALOGUE INPUT 2 FORMAT Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 3 AIN2 FORMAT V Analogue Input 2 format V mA V NO It allows user to configure the format of the Analogue Input 2 to connect a voltage or current signal according to the sensor or signal type used to introduce the reference DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 85 SDRIVE 700 86 G4 3 4 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function G4 3 5 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note Note G4 3 6 Scr
287. selection which means a block setting All that means that the user will configure the pump program freely according to his requirements selecting the correct functionality and protections For a correct programming of the digital inputs when the pump program is active there is additional information in G25 PUMP CONTROL Selection of the pump program will set all the Digital Inputs from G4 1 5 to G4 1 10 to mode 00 gt NO USE If re programming is needed it will be necessary to configure their functionality in a separate way again So it guarantees a safety installation operation avoiding that hardware external to the equipment can cause any kind of damage DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 15 SDRIVE 700 76 Note POWER ELECTRONICS The digital outputs will also be affected due to pump control activation To select one auxiliary pump it is necessary to act in the following way Set any free digital input to options 52 gt FIX PUMP1 FLT 53 FIX PUMP2 FLT 54 gt FIX PUMPS FLT 55 gt FIX PUMP4 FLT or 56 gt FIX PUMPS FET To enable the control of the pump 1 2 3 4 and or 5 set the corresponding parameter G25 9 1 G25 9 2 G25 9 3 G25 9 4 G25 9 5 respectively to Y To remove this pump configuration and release the relay for another use the user should Disable the control of the pump in the corresponding parameter G25 9 1 G25 9 2 G25 9 3 G25 9 4 or G25 9 5 respec
288. sensor of Analogue Input 1 to N we can set in this parameter the value of this reference corresponding to the minimum voltage or current level set in parameter G4 2 4 Minimum range of Analogue Input 1 The value set here is a percentage of the motor rated speed G2 4 3 Motor rpm SPEED 04 23 G4 3 9 610206104 2 64 2 9 gt Speed for the maximum range of analogue input 1 64 3 9 gt Speed for the maximum range of analogue input 2 64 2 8 gt Speed for the minimum range of analogue input 1 oe G4 3 8 gt Speed for the minimum range of analogue input 2 10 INPUTS 310 2 gt Maximum speed limit 1 20 610 4 gt Maximum speed limit 2 G10 1 gt Minimum speed limit 1 G10 1 0103 TCR 10 3 gt Minimum speed limit 2 du UE SD7OITCCOO024Al Figure 10 20 Scaling of the speed limits for the analogue inputs G4 2 9 SPEED FOR THE MAXIMUM RANGE OF ANALOGUE INPUT 1 Screen 9 SPD 10096 Extended info Description Speed corresponding to the maximum range of the Analogue Input 1 Range 250 to 250 Default value 100 Set on run YES Function If the Analogue Input 1 is used for introducing the speed reference setting of parameter G4 2 1 gt To enable sensor of Analogue Input 1 to N we can set in this parameter the value of this reference corresponding to the maximum voltage or current level set in par
289. set in parameter G5 11 gt Speed for ramp change with motorized potentiometer If G5 11 is set to OFF any ramp change will not be done In this case the drive will search the reference speed by only applying the ramp 1 for reference increase of motorized potentiometer set in this parameter Setting is realized in acceleration units increase in of speed per second See figure 10 24 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 93 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G5 8 RAMP 1 OF REFERENCE DECREASE FOR MOTORIZED POTENTIOMETER Screen 8 MPT DEC1 3 0 s Extended info Description Ramp 1 of reference decrease for motorized potentiometer function Range 0 01 650 s Default value 3 0 5 Set run YES Function allows setting the ramp 1 of reference decrease for motorized potentiometer function This function is configured in G4 1 4 gt Selection of digital inputs configuration with the option 4 9 MOTORIZED or 5 9 ERASAB POT Additionally it is necessary to set G3 1 gt Reference source 1 of speed G3 2 Reference source 2 of speed with the option PMOT depending on the selected source 15 1 or 2 With this function user can introduce the speed reference by means of two push buttons connected to the digital inputs DI5 up or increase the speed reference and DI6 down or decrease the speed reference While we press Down push button we can decrease the speed by applying up to two
290. set to YES Relay 1 will be pre defined as fixed speed pump 1 Y YES gt If setting is set to NO Relay 2 will be free for user 2 ENABLE PUMP2 Y enable fixed pump associated cen If set to YES Relay 2 will be pre defined as fixed speed pump 2 Y YES If setting is set to NO Relay 3 will be free for user 3 ENABLE PUMP3 Y a enable fixed pump associated c on If set to YES Relay 3 will be pre defined as fixed speed pump 3 ALTER MOD 1 G25 9 4 To enable fixed pump alternation 1 gt Cycle The pump that starts will be the next pump in mode sequence to the last pump stopped 12 5 2 Connections Drawing G25 4 1 Delay time before activating sleep 11 T SLP 20s mode 2 SLPsp1 40 0 G25 4 2 Sleep speed for local setpoint 1 13 FP erOFF 0 0 There are several configuration options available when pump program is activated These options can be configured like in standard program Nevertheless unlike standard program when pump program is activated the drive will only allow setting the options of each digital input from G4 1 5 to G4 1 10 and will not consider the setting realized in parameter G4 1 4 DIGIT MODE where digital inputs are set in groups This means that user will configure the pump program as he wants by selecting the functionality and protections that he needs For a correct configuration of the inputs when pump program is active see chapter G25 Pump Control to get additi
291. sets the delay time to start the fixed pump associated to 6 FP T3 ON 10 0s G25 3 6 Delay time to start fixed pump 3 sets the delay time to start the fixed pump associated to G25 Pump Control 25 4 Stop Conditions 20s gt This delay time will be applied to any conditions that activate the sleep mode These conditions are sleep speed No Flow input Flow measurement and sleep current 40 0 gt The drive will sleep below the value set here whenever local setpoint 1 is selected G25 4 13 Maximum PID error to stop fixed 0 0 This parameter allows user to consider the PID error pumps at the moment of stopping fixed pumps Set according to the requirements 2 G25 4 14 Delay time to stop fixed pump 1 d the delay time to stop the fixed pump associated to 15 FP T2 OF 10s G25 4 15 Delay time to stop fixed pump 2 b us the delay time to stop the fixed pump associated to 16 FP T3 OF 10s G25 4 16 Delay time to stop fixed pump 3 x the delay time to stop the fixed pump associated to 70 0 It sets the speed below which the drive must remain to 19 SPD1lof 70 0 G25 4 19 Stop speed 1 for one fixed pump stop one fixed pump whenever the operating setpoint is local setpoint 1 adjusted in G25 1 5 G25 Pump Control 525 9 Fixed Pumps Control 62593 To enable fixed pump associated Y YES gt If setting is set to NO Relay 1 will be free for user 1 ENABLE PUMP1 Y Rela configuration If
292. ssible to improve breakaway torque when starting heavy loads This parameter is used in association with parameter G19 2 3 gt Torque boost band Note Set a low value first Increase the value gradually until achieving a proper value to start correctly the installation Do not set values higher than needed ones since this would produce current limitation and unnecessary overstress of the drive and motor G19 2 3 TORQUE BOOST BAND Screen 3 BW BOOST 0 0 Extended info BOOST BAND Description Torque boost band Range 0 0 100 Default value 0 096 Set on run Sl Function It allows setting a band or range of frequencies during which torque boost set in G19 2 2 2 Initial voltage will be applied at the moment of starting Using this function it is possible to improve breakaway torque when starting heavy loads This parameter is used in association with previous parameter G19 2 2 172 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G19 2 4 SLIP COMPENSATION Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 4 SLIP COMPENS N Slip compensation N See Function for additional information N YES If this function is active it helps to compensate the slip on the motor This function must be enabled in case of heavy load able to provoke a high slip during the starting N gt NO Function disabled Y YES Function enabled G19 2 5 DRIVE DAMPING Scr
293. st first of all configure one of the digital inputs as option 50 gt START STP On the contrary the drive does not allow configuring any other option Once this is done it is possible to configure the resting inputs as necessary respecting always the configuration rules DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 Rule for Multiple References Selection With the pump program 18 possible to operate using up to 8 different regulation setpoints in PID mode settable in G25 1 5 to G25 1 12 To active each different setpoint 3 digital inputs configured as options 63 64 and 65 can be used It is necessary to take into consideration the following items o No Digital Input could be configured as 64 gt SETPONT PIN2 unless previously other different input has been configured as 63 gt SETPONT PINT o No Digital Input could be configured as 65 gt SETPONT PIN3 unless previously two different inputs have been configured as options 63 gt SETPONT PIN1 64 gt SETPONT PIN2 Rule for Selection De selection of Auxiliary Pumps For selecting one auxiliary pump it is necessary to act in the following way o Set any digital input to options 52 gt FIX PUMP1 FLT 53 gt FIX PUMP2 FLT 543 FIX PUMPS FLT 55 gt FIX PUMP4 FLT 56 gt FIX PUMPS FLT o To enable the control of the pump in the corresponding parameter G25 9 1 G25 9 2 G25 9 3 G25 9 4 and G25 9 5 respectively
294. t breaker ELB Inline Magnetic Contactor Installation and wiring Motor Use a power source with a voltage within the permissible range of drive input power rating Equipment is provided to operate with the neutral connected to the ground Select circuit breakers or fuses in accordance with applicable national and local codes We recommend using specified circuit breakers or fuses to operate with drive Install if necessary When installed do not use it for the purpose of starting or stopping the drive To reliably operate the drive install the drive in the proper orientation and with proper clearances Incorrect terminal wiring could result in the equipment damage Do not connect power factor capacitors surge arrestors or radio noise filters to the output side of the drive INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION 13 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 2 2 Environmental Conditions Verify ambient conditions of mounting location Ambient temperature should not be below 30 C or exceed 50 C It is necessary to consider the use of the equipment according to normal duty or heavy duty It is recommended to consult the tables of standard types included in this manual to guarantee correct use of the equipment Relativity humidity should be less than 95 non condensing Altitude should be below 1 000m 3 300ft SD700 is offered with IP20 and IP54 protection degree Nevertheless we recommend protecting it from conduct
295. t will also be considered the stop delay time for each fixed pump parameter G25 4 14 to G25 4 18 depending on the what fixed is referred and the PID error G25 4 13 gt Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps See figure 10 50 G25 4 25 STOP SPEED 7 FOR ONE FIXED PUMP Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 25 SPD7of 70 0 Stop speed for one fixed pump associated to the local setpoint 7 0 0 to 250 0 0 YES It allows setting the speed value below which the drive must remain for stopping a fixed pump whenever the operating setpoint is the local setpoint 7 set in parameter G25 1 11 gt Local setpoint 7 for PID See Function in parameter G25 4 19 gt Stop speed 1 for one fixed pump for additional information At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the stop delay time for each fixed pump parameter G25 4 14 to G25 4 18 depending on the what fixed is referred and the PID error G25 4 13 gt Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps See figure 10 50 G25 4 26 STOP SPEED 8 FOR ONE FIXED PUMP Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 26 SPD80f 70 0 FPUMP STP SPEED8 Stop speed for one fixed pump associated to the local setpoint 8 0 0 to 250 0 0 YES It allows setting the speed value below which the drive must remain for stopping a fixed pump
296. tage of the motor rated speed G2 4 3 Motor rpm See figure 10 20 G4 3 9 SPEED FOR THE MAXIMUM RANGE OF ANALOGUE INPUT 2 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 9 SPD 2 100 Speed corresponding to the maximum range of the Analogue Input 2 250 to 250 100 YES If the Analogue Input 1 is used for introducing the speed reference setting of parameter G4 3 1 gt To enable sensor of Analogue Input 2 to N we can set in this parameter the value of this reference corresponding to the maximum voltage or current level set in parameter G4 3 6 gt Maximum range of Analogue Input 2 The value set here is a percentage of the motor rated speed G2 4 3 Motor rpm See figure 10 20 G4 3 14 PROTECTION FOR ANALOGUE INPUT 2 LOSS Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 14 AIN2 LOSS N Protection for the Analogue Input 2 loss N Y See Function for additional information N YES It allows user to decide about the behaviour of the equipment when the signal connected to the Analogue Input 2 is lost Options N 3 NO Disabled function Drive does not realize any action in case of the analogue input signal is lost Y YES Drive will stop generating the fault F43 AIN2 LOSS since the sensor will be considered damaged when a sharp drop down to zero value in the level of the analogue input signal is detected
297. tect from uncontrolled stops where motor needs a longer time than the predict time to stop As well as other protections integrated into the drive this time can be set to turn off the output voltage and stop the motor by free run spin if this time has elapsed and the motor has not stopped completely Controlled stop time is calculated in standard conditions during system operation Stop limit time must be set to a higher value than controlled stop time value With a high input voltage the drive has a limited capacity to absorb in DC Bus the power regenerated by high inertial loads This can prevent the equipment from following the speed reference beyond this limit Stop limit time can be used to provide with protection from control losses due to excessive regeneration Stop limit time is also useful to protect from incorrect setting of parameters of the PID regulator in closed loop control G11 3 GROUND FAULT DETECTION Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 3 GND I LIMIT 10 GND CURR MAX LEV Ground fault detection OFF 0 30 In 10 YES It allows setting a value of leakage current to ground It provides with the option of tripping the equipment drive turns off the output to the motor because of fault F20 GROUND FLT automatically if a leakage current higher than the value set in this parameter has been reached DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 147 148 SDRIVE 700
298. ternative reference command NO status X1 CONNECTOR X2 CONNECTOR Common Terminal 24 4 2 NO Contact 5 011 gt 05 Start Stop 3 012 gt 15 Reference 2 NC Contact og 5 NO Contact 5 Common 2 5 NC Contact S 02 No Fault 5 Motor PTC Input Incase of trip relay will change over Analogue Signal Ref 0 10Vdc 26 Common for Analogue Signal gt 1kQ Power Supply for Analogue Signal 10Vde 26mA Common Terminal Common Terminal 24Vdc 50700 000 Figure 12 1 Start Stop commands by terminals and speed reference by analogue input Note Use screened cables for the controls and connect screen to ground COMMONLY USED CONFIGURATIONS 245 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 12 3 Start Stop Commands by Terminals and Speed Reference by Motorized Potentiometer 12 3 1 Parameters Configuration arameter Name Description G1 Options Menu 4 LANG ENGLISH 1 4 Language selection ENGLISH PROG STANDAR 1 7 Program activation G2 Motor Nameplate Set according to motor nameplate MTR VOLT 400V V Set according to motor nameplate 3 MTR PWR 00 0kW 62 3 Motor rated power __kW Set according to motor nameplate rpm Set according to motor nameplate Set according to motor nameplate Hz Set according to motor nameplate Use the following values as a reference Submersible pumps gt
299. the application requirements 7 4 4 40 0 6144 Multi reference 4 40 090 Allows setting the setpoint 4 value for the drive It should be set according to the application requirements 5 MREF 5 50 0 614 5 Multi reference 5 50 0 Allows setting the setpoint 5 value for the drive It should be set according to the application requirements 2 6 MREF 6 60 0 G14 6 Multi reference 6 60 0 Allows setting the setpoint 6 value for the drive It should be set according to the application requirements A 7 MREF 7 70 0 G14 7 Multi reference 7 70 0 Allows setting the setpoint 7 value for the drive It should be set according to the application requirements 12 4 2 Connections Drawing Terminals 1 and 2 start stop command NO status Terminals 1 and 5 multi reference A NO status Terminals 1 and 6 multi reference M NO status Terminals 1 and 7 multi reference B NO status COMMONLY USED CONFIGURATIONS 247 80 700 ELECTRONICS Digital Input 4 Digital Input 5 Digital Input 6 Multi reference A Multi reference M Multi reference B G14 1 10 0 MEF1 0 0 X G14 2 420 0 0 1 X 10 0143 43005 MREF3 0 1 6144 4400 MREFA 0 0 Gl45 45000 MREFS 0 X 6146 4600 0 Note 0 Not active and X Active X1 CONNECTOR X2 CONNECTOR Common Terminal 24Vdc Contact
300. the software version installed into the HM y y It shows the hardware version of the equipment PID R 0 0 d 2 It shows the reference value in PID mode of the equipment standard program 0 PID F 0 0 It shows the feedback value PID mode of the equipment standard program feedback shows the error value in PID mode that means the difference between the reference value 0 PID Error 0 0 and the real value of the system feedback signal 6 It shows if comparators are activated Comparators 000 cw 1 Active 0 Not Active 9 5 Parameters SV 5 Programmable Parameters This group is not only a display group Some parameters such as speed pressure and inch speeds can be adjusted in this group These parameters are also available in their corresponding parameter groups This is a simple way to allow user adjustment of basic parameters without entering the main programming groups Screen Units Description Local Sp 100 motor speed It shows the speed reference value in local mode introduced by keypad See G3 3 parameter for additional data PID Local 100 feedback It allows user to select the PID reference in local mode See G6 2 parameter for additional data 0 RESET LEVL 100 Maia It allows setting a reset level for the flux control algorithm as in G25 10 4 SLEP FLO 0 0l s Eng Units It allows setting a flow level to sleep the drive as in G25
301. the torque boost will be increased The value of the stator resistance is set as of motor rated impedance Consider the following table for approximate Rs values according to the motor power ratings Power kW Rs value 24 025 05 Note If this value is set too high then increased motor current can reach the current limit G10 5 avoiding motor speed increase We recommend consulting the standard value table since Rs value is variable according to the drive capacity 176 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 19 Group 20 G20 Serial Communication Controls G20 1 COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL Screen 1 PROTOCOL M Description Communication protocol Range M Default value M Set on run YES Function It allows selecting the communication protocol to be used If you want to access to the drive internal variables through serial port this parameter must be set to the desired protocol Option M gt MODBUS G20 2 LIMIT TIME FOR COMMUNICATION Screen 2 COMMS T OzOFF Extended info COMMS TIMEOUT Description Limit time for serial communication Range OFF 0 25s Default value OFF Set on run YES Function It allows setting the limit time for serial communication This parameter provides with the option of generating a drive trip F47 COMMS T O if the time elapsed from the last valid data transmission has exceeded the limit time set in this parameter Serial communication with the dr
302. the type of sensor that user will use in the installation G25 Pump Control 25 1 Setpoints CONTROL MODE 1 G25 1 1 Control mode 1 Pumps The drive will start in pump control mode 5 SETPT1 1 0Bar G25 1 5 Local setpoint 1 for the PID 1 0Bar It allows user to set the value of the speed reference 1 for the equipment Set according to the requirements of the applic 6 SETPT2 2 0Bar G25 1 6 Local setpoint 2 for the PID 2 0Bar gt It allows user to set the value of the speed reference 2 for the equipment Set according to the requirements of the applic 7 SETPT3 3 0Bar 625 1 7 Local setpoint 3 for the PID 3 0 gt It allows user to set the value of the speed reference 3 for the equipment Set according to the requirements of the applic 8 5 4 4 0 G25 1 8 Local setpoint 4 for the PID 4 0 gt It allows user to set the value of the speed reference 4 for the equipment Set according to the requirements of the applic 9 SETPT5 5 0Bar G25 1 9 Local setpoint 5 for the PID 5 0Bar gt It allows user to set the value of the speed reference 5 for the equipment Set according to the requirements of the applic 10 SETPT6 6 0Bar 625 1 10 Local setpoint 6 for the PID 6 0Bar gt It allows user to set the value of the speed reference 6 for the equipment Set according to the requirements of the applic 11 SETPT7 7 0Bar G25 1 11 Local setpoint 7 for the PID 7 0Bar gt It allows user to set the value of the speed refe
303. ti function Digital Input 1 configuration for additional information about the configuration options G4 1 9 MULTI FUNCTION DIGITAL INPUT 5 CONFIGURATION Screen 9 DIGITL IN 5 00 Description Multi function Digital Input 5 configuration Range 00 69 Default value 00 Set on run NO Function It allows user to configure the Digital Input 5 for its individual use See Function in parameter G4 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration for additional information about the configuration options G4 1 10 MULTI FUNCTION DIGITAL INPUT 6 CONFIGURATION Screen 10 DIGITL IN 6 17 Description Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration Range 00 69 Default value 17 Set on run NO Function It allows user to configure the Digital Input 6 for its individual use See Function in parameter G4 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration for additional information about the configuration options 80 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 4 2 Subgroup 4 2 4 2 Analogue Input 1 54 21 TO ENABLE SENSOR OF ANALOGUE INPUT 1 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 1 SENSOR 1 N It enables the sensor of the Analogue Input 1 N Y See Function for additional information N NO It allows user to use the Analogue Input 1 and to access to the needed parameters for configuring the sensor See G4 2 2 gt Selec
304. tion of sensor 1 units up to G4 2 7 Maximum range of sensor 1 N 3 NO The analogue input will remain scaled in default units 96 Y 3 YES The analogue input and any variables relating to the analogue input will be configured in the engineering units selected in G4 2 2 gt Selection of sensor 1 units 54 22 SELECTION OF SENSOR 1 UNITS Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function Note 2 SENSOR 1 1 6 Selection of units of measurement for the sensor 1 96 m3 s I m m3 m m3 h m s m m m h Bar kPa Psi m F K allows selecting different units of measurement for the Analogue Input 1 according to the sensor that is going to be used If this parameter is modified the minimum and maximum values are affected by the proper conversion For this reason the settings of the parameters G4 2 5 Minimum range of sensor 1 G4 2 7 gt Maximum range of sensor 1 should be checked This parameter is only available if G4 2 1 gt To Enable sensor of Analogue Input 1 is set to Y G4 2 3 ANALOGUE INPUT 1 FORMAT Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function AIN1 FORMAT V Analogue Input 1 format V mA V NO It allows user to configure the format of the Analogue Input 1 to connect a voltage or current signal according to the sensor or signal type used to introduce the reference DESCRIPTION OF P
305. tions 5 018 1 Figure 6 6 Power connections location 5071030 5 5071440 5x and 5070750 6x SD70950 6x CONNECTION TERMINALS 29 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 6 1 7 Frame 10 Connections 25 real al MES BASE SECTION POWER CONNECTIONS 971 sIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW 1 CONNECTIONS FOR U W 44 487 IPIE 21 v let ah ozone wos Inh 80 447 FRONT VIEW CONNECTIONS FOR 11 12 13 50700 00019 Figure 6 7 Power connections location for SD71580 5x 5071800 5x and 5071140 6x SD71420 6x 30 CONNECTION TERMINALS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 6 1 8 Frame 5 Connections BASE SECTION POWER CONNECTIONS 402 Y TOP SECTION POWER CONNECTIONS 50700 00022 Figure 6 8 Power connections location 5070210 50 5070275 50 IP00 CONNECTION TERMINALS 31 80 700 ELECTRONICS 6 2 Control Connections The following figure shows the SD700 control board Although the control board is insulated galvanically for safety reasons it is recommended not cha
306. tively by setting these parameters to N G4 1 5 MULTI FUNCTION DIGITAL INPUT 1 CONFIGURATION Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 5 DIGITL IN 1 06 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration 00 69 See Function for additional information 06 It allows user to configure the Digital Input 1 for its individual use The configuration options for each multi function digital input are the following ones 00 9 NOUSE The input is not programmed 01 gt START Start command from a push button with a normally open contact NO Note For configuring this option it is also necessary to configure another input as a Stop command from a push button with a normally closed contact NC previously 02 gt STOP1 Stop command in mode 1 from push button with a normally closed contact NC according to the setting of the parameter G7 1 gt Stop mode 1 03 gt STOP2 RESET Stop command in mode 2 from a push button with a normally closed contact NC according to the setting of the parameter G7 2 gt Stop mode 2 Activation of the input in this mode also acts as a Reset signal 04 gt STOP1 RESET Stop command in mode 1 from a push button with a normally closed contact NC according to the setting of the parameter G7 1 gt Stop mode 1 Activation of the input in this mode also acts as a Reset signal 05 4 START STOP It
307. tor 2 To get information about the configuration options see Function in parameter G9 1 9 Selection of output function for comparator 1 If activation and deactivation levels are set to similar values and delay times are set to OFF any noise that appears in the signals of selected source can cause an oscillation in the comparator and therefore an incorrect operation You should set these levels keeping a reasonable margin between them and if it is necessary set a delay time to improve the operation 138 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 9 3 Subgroup 9 3 59 3 Comparator 3 Comparator 3 operates in the same way of comparator 1 Additionally it includes the same setting parameters with the same configuration options Therefore figures 10 47 10 48 10 49 and 10 50 are also valid for this comparator For this we recommend observe these figures in order to understand better its operation G9 3 1 SOURCE SELECTION FOR COMPARATOR 3 Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 1 COMP 3 SEL 00 Selection of the source for the comparator 3 00 22 00 YES It allows user to select the source for the comparator 3 Configuration options are the same than the options for comparator 1 See Function in parameter G9 1 1 gt Source selection for comparator 1 to obtain information about configuration options G9 3 2 TYPE SELECTION FOR COMPARATOR 3
308. tor cosine Phi according to the motor nameplate DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G2 6 MOTOR RATED FREQUENCY Screen 6 MTR FRQ 50Hz Extended info Description Motor rated frequency Range 1 100Hz Default value 50Hz Set on run YES Function It allows setting the motor rated frequency according to the motor nameplate 2 7 MOTOR COOLING AT ZERO SPEED Screen 7 MTR COOL 40 Extended info Description Motor cooling at zero speed Range OFF 20 100 Default value 40 Set on run YES Function It calibrates the drive with the characteristics of the motor will be controlled It provides information for the protection of the motor thermal model The following settings can be taken as reference Submersible pumps gt 20 Self cool motor gt 40 Forced cool motor 100 The drive capacity kW should be between 50 and 150 of the motor power The motor must have from 2 to 12 poles If the motor power is in HP convert them in kW by using the next formula _ 746 1000 Thermal model is reset when disconnecting the drive power These parameters should be introduced before starting the drive If we introduce illogical values the drive will not operate correctly Introduce the rated parameters of the motor nameplate current voltage frequency power speed rom and cosine phi When the motor nameplate offers multiple configuration possibilities or the start delta motor configuration o
309. tric shock Do not subject the cables to abrasions excessive stress heavy loads or pinching Otherwise you may get an electric shock SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 7 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 8 CAUTION Install the drive on a non flammable surface Do not place flammable material nearby Otherwise fire could occur Disconnect the input power if the drive gets damaged Otherwise it could result in a secondary accident or fire After the input power is applied or removed the drive will remain hot for a couple of minutes Touching hot parts may result in skin burns Do not apply power to a damaged drive or to a drive with parts missing even if the installation is complete Otherwise you may get an electric shock Do not allow lint paper wood chips dust metallic chips or other foreign matter into the drive Otherwise fire or accident could occur WARNINGS RECEPTION SDRIVE 700 is carefully tested and perfectly packed before leaving the factory n the even of transport damage please ensure that you notify the transport agency and POWER ELECTRONICS 902 40 20 70 International 34 96 136 65 57 or your nearest agent within 24hrs from receipt of the goods UNPACKING Make sure model and serial number of the variable speed drive are the same on the box delivery note and unit Each variable speed drive is supplied with a SDRIVE 700 technical manual SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS POWER ELECTRONICS S
310. ty Set on run YES Function It allows setting the cavitation current below which the first detection condition to activate the protection is fulfilled This parameter operates together with parameters G25 6 5 gt Cavitation speed and G25 6 6 3 Delay time to activate cavitation protection See Function in parameter G25 6 2 gt To enable cavitation protection to obtain information about the setting of cavitation parameters G25 6 5 SPEED CAVITATION Screen 5 CAV SPED 100 Extended info CAVITATION SPEED Description Cavitation speed Range 0 0 to 250 Default value 100 Set on run YES Function allows setting the cavitation speed above which the second detection condition to activate the protection is fulfilled This parameter operates together with parameters G25 6 4 gt Cavitation current and G25 6 6 3 Delay time to activate cavitation protection See Function in parameter G25 6 2 gt To enable cavitation protection to obtain information about the setting of cavitation parameters G25 6 6 DELAY TIME TO ACTIVATE CAVITATION PROTECTION Screen 6 CAV DELAY 10s Extended info CAVIT FLT DELAY Description Delay time to activate cavitation protection Range 0 9995 Default value 10 Set on run Function It allows setting the delay time to activate cavitation protection The drive will wait for the time before activating the protection and then will stop This
311. ue of maximum level This allows the user to achieve inverse scaling In this way as the magnitude taken as reference in G8 2 6 gt Mode selection for Analogue Output 2 increases the output will decrease and vice versa See figure 10 32 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 121 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G8 2 9 HIGH RANGE SELECTION OF ANALOGUE OUTPUT 2 Screen 9 MAX2 RNG 100 Extended info Description High range selection of Analogue Output 2 Range 250 to 250 Default value 100 Set on run YES Function It allows setting the maximum level of the Analogue Output 2 Maximum value setting can be lower than the value of minimum level This allows the user to achieve inverse scaling In this way as the magnitude taken as reference in G8 2 6 Mode selection for Analogue Output 2 increases the output will decrease and vice versa See figure 10 32 G8 2 10 FILTER SELECTION FOR ANALOGUE OUTPUT 2 Screen 10 FILTER 2 OFF Extended info Description Filter selection for the Analogue Output 2 Range OFF 0 0 20 05 Default value OFF Set on run YES Function It allows selecting a filter for the Analogue Output 2 value and in the same time setting a value Sometimes if the analogue signal appears slightly unstable improved stability and response can be achieved with the addition of a suitable filter value Note Filter use can add a slight delay to the analogue output signal 122 DESCRIPTIO
312. un Function Note 10 Lop DLY 10 0s LO PRESS FLT DLY Trip delay time because of minimum pressure fault 0 999s 10 0s YES It allows setting a delay time because of minimum pressure fault During this time the pressure remains below the minimum pressure level set in parameter G25 6 9 generating a trip in the drive because of low pressure fault F65 LOW PRESSURE The protection from low pressure is deactivated during the pipe filling process If a pipe is broken during the pipe filling process or when the drive is stopped then the pipe filling process does not finish by reached pressure but by time Once finished the stage of pipe filling the breakage detection will be activated and will trip after elapsing the set time Additionally it is necessary to consider in case of existing enabled fixed pumps these ones must be connected for the minimum pressure conditions are evaluated otherwise the drive executes the normal connection process of pumps before tripping because of minimum pressure G25 6 11 MINIMUM SPEED FOR MINIMUM PRESSURE FAULT Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run 11 Lop Msp 0 0 LO PRESS MIN SPED Minimum speed for minimum pressure fault 0 0 to 250 0 0 YES DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 219 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Function It allows setting the minimum speed for the trip of minimum pressure fault F65 LOW PRESSURE possible br
313. urce 1 has not been selected Alt reference will be introduced through the Analogue Input 1 Al2 reference will be introduced through the Analogue Input 2 Al2 The reference will be the addition of the signals introduced through the Analogue Inputs 1 and 2 LOCAL reference will be introduced by keypad and will be set in G3 3 Local speed reference MREF Multi reference It allows activating different references by digital inputs For this you need to configure the digital inouts See S4 1 Digital Inputs PMOT Reference taken by motorized potentiometer with or without reference memorizing PID It will take as reference the value set in the parameters of the PID function G3 2 REFERENCE SOURCE 2 OF SPEED Screen Description Range Default value Set on run Function 2 REF2 SPD LOCAL Reference source 2 of speed NONE Alt Al2 Al2 allows selecting reference source 2 of speed See Function in parameter G3 1 Reference source 1 of speed for additional information about the configuration options DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 69 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G3 3 LOCAL SPEED REFERENCE Screen 3 LOCAL SPD 100 Extended info LOCAL SPEED Description Local speed reference Range 250 to 250 Default value 100 Set on run YES Function allows user to set the value of the motor spinning speed whenever t
314. use status due to No Flow detection NO FLOW FAULT The drive has tripped Fault status due to No Flow detection CAVITATION PAUSE The drive has stopped Pause status due to Cavitation CAVITATION FAULT The drive has tripped Fault status due to Cavitation LO PRESSURE FAUL The drive has tripped due to low pressure fault The drive has tripped due to a fault detected in one of ESTATUS PUMP the digital inputs configured as No Water PROGRAM CYCLING FAULT The drive has tripped due to excessive starting cycles The drive has tripped due to a fault in the irrigation IRRIGATOR FAULT equipment which has been detected in the digital input configured in that option LIMITING FAULT The drive is limiting the speed to limit the flow PUMP STOP The drive has received the stop command SLEPT NO DEMAND The drive is in sleep mode because there is no flow demand BYPASSING SPEED The drive is forcing the speed after starting or stopping some of the fixed pumps SETPOINT RAMP Setpoint ramp activated PIPE FILLING The drive is running at reduced speed because Pipe Fill function is active COMPLETED The time of automatic stop has expired and the drive is stopped JOCKEY PUMP ON The Jockey pump 18 running PRIMING PUMP ON The Priming pump suction filling is connected PRESSU SWITCH ON The pressure switch is open 44 VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS GROUP GO POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 10 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING
315. ut 2 12 10 4 20 G8 2 7 4 20 SD7OITCCOO14AI Figure 10 35 Example 3 Analogue Output 2 with format 4 20mA DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 125 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS Example 4 Now we want to configure Analogue Output 2 as 0 to 20mA output the analogue value of which represents the current of the previous motor with a rated current of 20A and a consumption range from to 50A Set mode of Analogue Output 2 in G8 2 6 to 02 CURRENT MOTOR motor current Select format for Analogue Output 2 G8 2 7 to 0 20mA Set minimum and maximum values high range and low range of the Analogue Output 2 scale in parameters G8 2 8 for low range and G8 2 9 for high range G8 2 8 gt 0 OA G8 2 9 gt 250 since 50A is 250 of motor rated current 20A Then 29 9 oji Sm 50 0 Analogue Output 2 will supply 8mA when motor current is 20A G8 2 8 G8 2 9 0 20 250 GB 2 7 gt Format selection for analogue output 2 12 5 25 37 5 GB 2 8 Low range selection of analogue output 2 68 2 9 gt High range selection of analogue output 2 10 mA 8mA nk 2 3 G8 2 7 0 20 SD7OITCCOO1SAI Figure 10 36 Example 4 Analogue Output 2 with format 20mA 126 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS 10 9 Group 9 G9 Comparators 10 9 1 Subgroup 9 1 59 1 Comparato
316. ut 2 according to the characteristics of the sensor that is going to be connected MAXIMUM RANGE OF SENSOR 2 7 5 2 10 01 Maximum range of sensor 2 G4 3 5 to 3200 Engineering Units 10 01 5 YES allows setting the maximum units value of the sensor connected to the Analogue Input 2 This value should also correspond to the maximum voltage or current level of the sensor set in G4 3 6 gt Maximum range of Analogue Input 2 The setting of this parameter should be checked if the sensor units are changed in parameter G4 3 2 gt Selection of sensor 2 units It is necessary to set this value to operate in open loop and closed loop This parameter will be only available if G4 3 1 gt To enable sensor of Analogue Input 2 is set to Y DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS POWER ELECTRONICS SDRIVE 700 G4 3 8 SPEED FOR THE MINIMUM RANGE OF ANALOGUE INPUT 2 Screen Extended info Description Range Default value Set on run Function 8 SPD LO2 0 Speed corresponding to the minimum range of the Analogue Input 2 250 to 250 4096 YES If the Analogue Input 2 is used for introducing the speed reference setting of parameter G4 3 1 gt To enable sensor of Analogue Input 2 to N we can set in this parameter the value of this reference corresponding to the minimum voltage or current level set in parameter G4 3 4 gt Minimum range of Analogue Input 2 The value set here is a percen
317. ut configured as pressure switch parameter G4 1 5 Multi function Digital Input 1 configuration to G4 1 10 gt Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration option 69 gt PRESSUR SWITC is opened during the time set in this parameter the fault F72 IN PRESS SW will be produced The fault F72 is only produced if there is some output relay configured with the option 30 gt PRIMING PUMP parameters G8 1 1 G8 1 5 and G8 1 9 and some digital input configured with the option 69 gt PRESSUR SWITC parameter G4 1 5 to G4 1 10 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 231 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 9 11 TRIP TIME OF F72 WHILE PRIMING PUMP IS CONNECTED Screen 11 PRp DLY OFF Extended info PRIM PUM FLTdly Description Trip time of F72 while the Priming pump is connected Range OFF 0 0 1 6000m Default value OFF Set on run YES Function It allows setting a time to produce the fault F72 when the Priming pump is connected If the Priming pump is connected and the time set in this parameter has elapsed from the starting of this pump without detecting pressure in the pressure switch the fault F72 IN PRESS SW will be produced Note The fault F72 is only produced if there is some output relay configured with the option 30 gt PRIMING PUMP parameters G8 1 1 G8 1 5 and G8 1 9 and some digital input configured with the option 69 PRESSUR SWITC parameter G4 1 5 to G4 1 10 232 DESCRIP
318. vailable to assist the user The following figure shows typical wiring configuration for a 3 wire start stop push button system 24V Usr Di CONNECTOR X1 24Vdc 3 Wires wiring Common terminal 24Vdc DI1 3 Start 012 gt Stop 1 Reset DI3 gt Stop 2 Reset 014 3 Reference 2 DIS 3 Speed inversion DI6 gt 17 Control 2 Multifunction Digital Inputs wr Motor PTC Input SD70DTCOO02AI Figure 6 12 3 wire control terminals wiring CONNECTION TERMINALS 33 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS 6 3 Control Terminals Description 34 X1 CONNECTOR X2 CONNECTOR PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION 24V USR sed di for digital inputs Short circuit and overload protected Maximum 24Vdc Programmable Digital Input 1 Digital inputs are configured in the Input group Their status can 2 011 be displayed in the visualisation group They can be supplied from terminal 1 an external power 24Vdc supply If an external power supply is used the common should be connected to the terminal 19 user GND 6 Di5 Programmable Digital Input 5 See D11 description S 7 06 Programmable Digital Input 6 See D11 description moves ouise range ct SE amaA Eo WIO 9 PTC ifthe resistance moves outside the range of 85Q 2kQ Voltage or current programmable Analogue Input 1 V or mA Configurable for 0 10Vdc 10Vdc 0 20mA or 4 20mA DIGITAL INPUTS 1
319. ve which can be set in the same way that the options available in the standard program Nevertheless when the pump program is active the drive will assume that only the configurable options from 50 to 69 for G4 1 5 Multi function Digital 1 configuration T to G4 1 10 Multi function Digital Input 6 configuration can be set without taking into consideration the setting on parameter G4 1 4 gt Selection of digital inputs configuration which means a block setting All that means that the user will configure the pump program freely according to his requirements selecting the correct functionality and protections The options for inputs configuration standard program options as well as pump program options have been detailed in the corresponding group G4 1 Digital Inputs 10 20 5 Inputs Configuration Rules 186 It is necessary to have into consideration the following rules for a correct digital input configuration when the Pump Program is active Mutual Exclusion Rule o If the pump program is deactivated the user can only set options from 0 to 23 for the digital inputs which are options for functionalities related to the standard program o If the pump program is active the user can only set options from 50 to 69 for the digital inputs which are options for functionalities related to the pump program System Start Terminal Rule Automatic To ensure the start and the stop of the system the user mu
320. whenever the operating setpoint is the local setpoint 8 set in parameter G25 1 12 gt Local setpoint 8 for PID See Function in parameter G25 4 19 gt Stop speed 1 for one fixed pump for additional information At the moment of stopping the fixed pumps additionally it will also be considered the stop delay time for each fixed pump parameter G25 4 14 to G25 4 18 depending on the what fixed is referred and the PID error G25 4 13 gt Maximum PID error to stop the fixed pumps See figure 10 50 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 213 80 700 POWER ELECTRONICS G25 4 27 LEVEL FOR ACTIVATING SLEEP MODE IN PID INVERSE Screen 27 PIDiISL 0 0 Extended info PID INVE SLEEP Description Level for activating the sleep mode in PID inverse Range 0 0 100 Default value 0 0 Set on run YES Function It allows setting the level below which the drive will go in sleep mode when the PID of the application is inverted PID inversion is realized in parameter G25 2 8 3 PID output inversion The value is set in 96 of drive setpoint G25 4 28 TO ENABLE SLEEP MODE Screen 28 SLEEP Y Description To enable sleep mode Range N Y See Function for additional information Default value be Set on run YES Function It allows enabling or disabling the sleep mode of the drive This parameter operates together with the option 31 SLEEP of the parameter G8 1 1 gt Selection of
321. xiliary fixed pumps Apart of this there is the possibility of using one of this pumps as Jockey pump it will operate only under very low demand conditions in case of the drive is in sleep mode or one pump can be used as Priming pump it will operate to fulfil the aspiration pipe if the system requires this function 10 20 2 Operation modes There are three operation modes basically Manual Protected Mode One of the digital inputs must be set as Automatic and a second digital input must be set as Protected Manual Both inputs must be closed to start In this operation mode the system protections are operative for example high pressure cavitation etc A main speed reference source and an alternative speed reference source exist they are set by means of a digital input Manual Non Protected Mode This is an operation mode thought for commissioning and test of the system It is not recommended for a normal operation since the protections are not active There are two possibilities of configuring this mode o Manual non protected mode with exclusive control from the keypad o Manual non protected mode controlled by the digital inputs A main speed reference source and an alternative speed reference source exist they are set by means of a digital input Pumps Mode The drive will operate in regulation mode with all the available functions and the protections will be operative 10 20 3 General Descriptions of Protections

User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents